درویش ګرامر PDF

Dervish English Grammar
»‫ عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو‬:‫ليکًّْکي‬ 1

‫‪Dervish English Grammar‬‬

‫دروېش انګلـيسـي ګـرامــر‬
‫ليکوونکي ‪ :‬خليل احمد "دروېش"‬

‫ټايپ او ډيزاين ‪ :‬خليل احمد" دروېش"‬
‫‪All rights of publication reserved with the author‬‬

‫د نشـر ټول حـقـوق له مـولف سـره محـفــوظ دي‪.‬‬
‫ليکًّْکي‪ :‬عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو»‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫عشيضٍ‬
‫الحوذهلل سب العلويي‪ّ،‬الصلْاج ّالغالم علي اهام الِذج الوشعليي‪ّ ،‬علي آلَ ّاصحاتَ الزيي‬
‫أًاسّا الذًيا تٌْسالذيي ّعلي هي تثعِن تاحغاى ًّؾشالِذی الی يْم الذيي اجوعيي‬
‫لَ لْي تْاًا عؼاي(د) څغَ ډېـ ىکـ ګقاؿ ين چې هاتَ يي تيا ُـن ػػي کتاب ليکلْ تْاًايي ؿاّتښلَ‪.‬‬
‫اػم (ع) لَ عاّؿي څغَ رْړ کړ اّ ّؿّمتَ يي‬ ‫(د)‬
‫ژتَ ػ پُْيؼًي اّ پًُْْي يٍْ ّميلَ ػٍ ػاچي هللا‬
‫مـاٍ ّؿػًٌَ کړٍ کلَ چي پَ اػم (ع) کي ؿّس پيؼا ىٍْ اّ اًناى تـېٌَ رْړ ىْ ًْ هللا (د) فؿ کنثَ‬
‫ػ ُغـْ لَ ًْهًْْ مـٍ ّؿّښْػل ‪ّ ًْ ،‬يلي ىْ چې ژتَ ػ اًناى لَ پيؼايښت مـٍ موَ پيؼا ىْي ػٍ ؛‬
‫لَ تلي عْا اًګليني ُغَ ًړيْالَ ژتَ ػٍ چي پَ اّمٌۍ اّ ػَـي ًړۍ کي ډېـٍ فياتَ اړتيا ّؿتَ ليؼل‬
‫کيږي ‪ ًْ ،‬فها ُـن يْ ػايٍْ اؿفّ ٍّ چې ػ اًګليني ژتي ګـاهـ تَ لَ عپلي عْږي پښتْ ژتي لَ‬
‫ژتاړي مـٍ ليکن ځکَ فهْږ پَ ټْلٌَ کي يْ تؼؼاػ پښتاًَ ّؿّڼَ اّ عْيٌؼي لَ يْ لړ متًْقّ مـٍ هظ‬
‫ػي ًْػػي کتاب مـٍ تَ اًيا هللا ػ ډېـّ ّؿّڼْ اّ عْيٌؼّ متًْقٍ ُْاؿٍ ىي‪.‬‬
‫ػاچې اًګليني يٍْ ًړيْالَ اّ ػلوي ژتَ ػٍ ًْ تايؼ پَ فػٍ کړي ّؿڅغَ ًاّړٍ ګټَ ّاًَ عينتل ىي‪.‬‬
‫لکَ څٌګَ چي ػا کتاب ها لَ هغتلفـْ ګـاهـي کتاتًْْ څغَ ؿاټْل کړي اّپغپلَ هي ډيقايي کړي ‪،‬‬
‫کوپيْټـايقډ کړي اّ تاليف کړي ًْ کَ چيـي ػ ّيًْکي پَ ًظـ کْهَ ًيوګړتيا ّؿغلَ ًْ صتوا ً تَ‬
‫هاتَ ػ تـښٌاليک پَ ؽؿيؼَ اصْال ؿاکْي ػاتَ متامْ پَ ها ډيـ لطف اّ اصناى ّي‪.‬‬
‫پَ دسًاّي‬
‫خليل احوذ«دسّېؼ»‬
‫ػکٌؼُاؿپٌُْتْى ػاًزيٌـي ػپٌُْځۍ هضَل‬
‫دروېش تماس نمبر‪0788480493 :‬‬ ‫تشښٌاليک‪KhalilDervish _ 001@yahoo .com :‬‬

‫لنډه پيژندنه‬
‫خليل احمد "دروېش" د ډاکتر محمد رحيم "رنځورمل" زوي د مرحـوم فيض هللا خان ابدالي(پوپلزي)‬
‫لمسـی په ‪ ۱۷۳۱‬لمريز کال د غـزني واليت قـره باغ ولـسوالۍ د کندلخـو په نومـي کلي په يوه درنه‬
‫کـورنۍ کي زيږيدلي ‪ ،‬چي د نسب اصلي سلسله د کندهار واليت د شاولـي کوټ په اولسوالـۍ پوري‬
‫ارتباط لري ؛ لمـړنۍ او ابتدايي زده کـړي د بي بي خديجي الکـبرای(رض) په ښـوونځـۍ کي او ثانوي‬
‫زده کـړي يـي د سلطان محمود غـزنوي په عالې لېسه کي په اول نمـره ګۍ کـي پاي ته رسولـي چي‬
‫وروسته له فـراغته د ښـوعالې نمـرو په اخذ کولو سـره د خپلـي عـالقي سـره سـم د کـندهار پوهنتون‬
‫انجېنري پوهنځۍ ته بريالي شو‪.‬‬
‫په درنښت‬
‫«دروېـش»‬

‫ډالــــۍ‬
‫‪ ‬مـوراو پـالر تـه چـي زمـا پـه ښـوونه او روزنـه کـي زيـاتـي هـڅي کـړي دي‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬خپلو استادانو ته چي زما په زده کړه کي يي نه ستړي کېدونکي هڅي کړي دي‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬هغه تنکـيو ځـوانانو ته چـي ځانـونه يـي د اسـالم په مـبارک دين پخاطرفدا کړل‪.‬‬
‫(دسّېؼ)‬

‫لغــــــــــاى ‪Language‬‬
‫‪Language is a social phenomenon which is used for understanding.‬‬
‫ژتَ يـٍْ ټْلـٌـيـقٍ پـؼيـؼٍ ػٍ چـي ػ پـُْـيـؼًـی لـپاؿٍ پـکـاؿ ّړل کـيـږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Grammar: Grammar is the series of rules regulations which is used‬‬

‫‪for correct writing , reading and speaking.‬‬
‫ګــــشاهــــش‪ :‬ګــاهــ ػثاؿت لَ يـْ لـړ همــؿاتـْ اّ اٍـْلـْ څغَ ػي‪ ،‬چـي ػ ٍـضيش ليکلـْ‪ ،‬لْمتلْ‬
‫اّ عثـي کْلْ لپاؿٍ پکاؿ ّړل کيږي‬
‫‪Alphabet: A set of letters arranged in order for forming words is called‬‬
‫‪alphabet.‬‬
‫الفثاء‪ :‬ػ تْؿّ هزوْػَ ػٍ چي ػ کلوْ ػرْړّلْ لپاؿٍ پکاؿ ّړل کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Letter: The conventional alphabetical character or a written symbol used to‬‬

‫‪represent a speech sound and constituting a unit of an alphabet is called‬‬
‫‪letter.‬‬
‫تـْسی‪ :‬لــاؿػاػي الفثايـي رْړښـت اّيا يْ ليکـٌـې موثْل ػي "چي" ػ عثـې غـږ تياًْلْ لپاؿٍ‬
‫امتؼـواليـږي اّ ػ الفثاء يـٍْ تــعَ تيکـيلـْي تـْؿی تلـل کـيـږي‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬پَ اًګليغي ژتَ کي تْسي عوْها ً پَ دٍّ ډّلَ دي‪:‬‬

‫‪ :a‬لْي تْسي )‪ُ :Capital Letters ( Uppercase Letters‬غَ تْؿي ُغَ تْؿي ػی‬
‫چي غټ اّ تـرنتَ ىکل ليکل کيږي اّپَ الًؼی ډّل ػي‪.‬‬
‫‪A , B , C , D , E , F , G , H , I , J , K , L , M , N , O , P , Q , R , S , T , U , V , W,‬‬
‫‪X , Y , Z.‬‬
‫‪ ‬لْي تْسي پَ الًذي ځايًْْ کی اعتعواليږی‪:‬‬
‫‪ :۱‬ػيْی رولی ػ ليکلْ پَ ىـّع کی امتؼواليږی‪:‬‬
‫‪Ex: We are students.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬هْږ ىاګـػاى يْ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :۲‬ػعاٍْ اموًْْ اّ ٍفتًْْ ػلوړی تْؿی ػليکلْ لپاؿٍ‪:‬‬

‫‪Ex: Dervish , Afghani , Samiullah‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ػؿّيو‪ ،‬افغاًي ‪ ،‬مويغ هللا‪.‬‬
‫‪ :۳‬ػکال ػهياىتْ اّ ػ اًّۍ ػ ًْهًْْ ػ لوړی تْؿی ػ ليکلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‪:‬‬

‫‪Ex: Sunday , Friday , March , April.‬‬
‫‪ :۴‬ػ )‪ (I‬ػ فاػلی ّويـ ػ ليکلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږی‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I am a student.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ يْ ىاګـػ ين‪.‬‬
‫‪ :۵‬ػ هغففاتْ ػ ليکلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: U.E.A , UN.‬‬

‫‪ :۶‬ػ لمثًْْ ػلْهړی تْؿي ػليکلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږی‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: The King of Pakistan.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ػ پاکنتاى پاػىاٍ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Abdul Bari (Jahani).‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ػثؼالثاؿي (رِاًي)‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Abobaker Sediq.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬اتْتکـ ٍؼيك‪.‬‬
‫‪ :۷‬ػ کتاتًْْ ػ ًْهًْْ ػليکلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Quran , Zaboor , Torat….etc.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬لـــــاى ‪ ،‬فتـــْؿ ‪ ،‬تْؿات‪ .....‬اًّْؿ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :۸‬ػ هلي ّؿځْ اّ ػوْهی ؿعَتيْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږی‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Eid , Nawrooz , Ashora.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ػــــيؼ ‪ً ،‬ـــْؿّف ‪ ،‬ػــــاىـــــْؿا‪.‬‬
‫‪ :۹‬ػ ػلْهْ اّ ژتْ ػ ًْهًْْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږی‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Biology, Pashto , Arabic.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬تـيـــــْلـــْژي‪ ،‬پــــښتْ ‪ ،‬ػـــــتي‪.‬‬
‫‪ :۱۱‬ػ غـًّْ اّ ػؿياتًْْ ػ ًْم ػليکلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږی‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Kunar River, Hindokush Mountain, Ba Ba Mountain….etc.‬‬
‫هخال‪ :‬کًْـ ػؿياب ‪ٌُ ،‬ؼّکو غـ ‪ ،‬تاتا غـ‪ ....‬اًّْؿ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :۱۱‬ػ ًؼا ػ تْؿي ػ ليکلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږی‪.‬‬
‫!‪Ex: Oh!, pooh‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬آٍ! ‪ ،‬پٍْ!‬
‫‪ّ: b‬اړٍ تْسي )‪ّ :Small letters (lowercase letters‬اړٍ تْؿي ُغَ تْؿی ػي چي پَ غيـ‬
‫تـرنتَ ىکل ليکل کيږي اّ هؼـوْالً ػ کتاتـًْْ ‪ ،‬هزلـْ‪ ،‬اعثاؿًّْ اّ ًْؿّ ليکـٌْ کـي ّؿڅغَ ګټَ‬
‫اعينتل کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪a , b , c , d , e , f , g , h , i , j , k , l , m , n , o , p , q , r , s , t , u , v , w , x , y , z.‬‬
‫ًــــــْټ‪ :‬پَ اًګليني ژتَ کي ټْل ‪ ۲۶‬تْؿي ػي‪.‬‬
‫ــ پَ اًګليغي ژتَ کي تْسي د تلفع لَ لحاظَ پَ دسي تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْی دي‪:‬‬
‫‪ :۱‬غــــږ لـــــًّـــکـــي تــــْؿي(‪.)Vowel letters‬‬
‫‪ً :۲‬يوَ غږلـًّکي تْؿي )‪.(Semi vowel letters‬‬
‫‪ :۳‬تــــــي غـــــږٍ تــــْؿي )‪.(Consonant letters‬‬
‫‪ Vowel letters:‬‬
‫‪Vowel letters are those which make syllables in a word, It means every‬‬
‫‪vowel letters can make a syllable or sound alone.‬‬
‫‪ ‬غږ لشًّکي تْسي‪:‬‬
‫غږلـًّکي تْؿي ُغَ ػی چي پَ يٍْ کلوَ کي ُزا(ميالب) رْړّي ‪ُ ،‬غَ پَ ػي هؼٌی چي ُـ‬
‫غږ لـًّکي تْؿي پَ تٌِايي مـٍ کْالي ىی يٍْ ُزا يا غږ تيکيل کړی‪.‬‬

There are five vowel letters in English language which are: (A ,E ,U ,I ,O).
.َ‫( څغ‬A , E , U , I , O) :َ‫پَ اًګليني ژتَ کي پٌځَ غږلـًّکي تْؿي ػي چي ػثاؿت ػی ل‬
 The role of vowel letters. .‫د غږ لشًّکْ تْسّ ًقؼ‬

1. All the word in English should have at least one vowel to be pronoun-
ced.
‫( ُيڅ‬.‫ ػ اًګلينی ژتي ټْلي کليوي صؼ الل تايؼ ػ يْ غږ لـًّکي ػؿلْػًّکي ّي تـڅْ تلفع ىي‬.۱
.ّ‫کلوَ ًيْ کْالي تي ػ غږ لـًّکي تْؿي لَ هْرْػيت څغَ تلفع کړ‬
‫غږلـًّکي تْؿي ًلـي‬ ‫غږلـًّکي تْؿي لـي‬
Ex: PPlz ____________ Popalzai
2. Vowel letters causes syllabication in the word ( the analysis of the

Word according to its voice).
‫ غږ لـًّکي تْؿي پَ کلواتْ کي ػ ُزاتٌؼي تاػج ګـځی( کلوي ػ اّاف لَ لضاظَ تمنين تٌؼي‬.۲
.)‫کْي‬
Syllable Syllable Syllable Syllable
Ex: Report = Re ____ port. Ex: Moral = Mo____ ral.
3. For the words that are started with a vowel sound use article ( an ).
ٍ‫( تؼـيف تْؿي څغَ امتفاػ‬an) ‫ ػ ُغْ کلواتْ لپاؿٍ چي پَ غږ لـًّکي تْؿّ ىـّع ىْي ّي ػ‬.۳
.‫کيږي‬
‫غږلـًّکي تْؿی‬ ‫غږلـًّکي تْؿی‬
Ex: an apple. Ex: an orange.
 Semi vowel letters:( w , y). .( w , y) :‫ًيوَ غږ لشًّکي تْسي‬

These letters also can make a sound in the words.
.‫ُوؼاؿًګَ ػغَ تْؿي کْالي ىی پَ کلواتْ کي غږ تيکيل کړي‬
Ex: pharmacy.
Note: the two letters (w ,y) are sometime vowel and sometime consonant
in this reason they are called semi vowels. that is to say when they are
used at the beginning of the words to start a syllable, are consonant ,but at
the middle of a word or at the end, are vowels.
middle of a word or at the end, are vowels.
‫ ( څغَ ځيٌي ّعت ػ تي غږٍ اّ ځيٌي ّعت غږ لـًّکي ّي‬w,y) ‫ ػٍّ تْؿي چي ػثاؿت ػي‬:‫ًْټ‬
‫ ُوؼاؿًګَ تْرَ ّىـي کلَ چي ػغَ(تْؿي) ػ‬.‫ًْ پَ ػي ػليـل ُغَ تَ ًيوَ غـږ لـًّکي تْؿي ّايـي‬
‫ُزايي تْؿّ پَ ىـّع کي ؿاىی تي غږٍ ػي هګـ کلَ چي ػ کلوْ پَ هاتيي اّ اعيـ کي ؿاىي غـږ‬
.‫لـًّکي ػي‬

Ex:window , word , yellow : (consonant ٍ‫( تــي غــــږ‬.

Ex: Spy , Sky , Cycle , Why : (vowel ‫( غـږلــًّکـي‬.
 Consonant letters.)‫(تـــــــي غــــــــــږٍ تــــْسي‬

Consonant letters are those which can not pronounced in a word without
vowels.
.‫تي غږٍ تْؿي ُغَ تْؿي ػي چي ػ غږ لـًّکْ تْؿّ لَ هْرْػيت څغَ پـتَ ًَ تلفع کيږي‬
Or: Consonant letters are those which can not make a sound or syllable
alone.
.‫تي غږٍ تْؿي ُغَ ػي چي ًيي کْالي پَ تٌِايي مـٍ غږ يا ُيزا(ميالب) تيکيل کړی‬:‫اّيا‬
 Except five vowel letters all the rest are consonant in English language.
.‫ پَ اًګليني ژتَ کي لَ پٌځْ غږ لـًّکْ تْؿّ پاتي ټْل تي غږٍ ػي‬
Note: Syllable is the unite of classification of a word according to its

voice (sound).
.‫ ػ تلفـع اّغـږ پَ هطا تـك ػ کلواتـْ ػ تـمـنيـن ّاصؼ تَ ُزا ّايـي‬:‫ًْټ‬
 The consonant letters are nineteen letters in English language , those are
consist in:
Bb ,Cc, Dd, Ff, Gg, Hh, Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn, Pp, Qq, Rr, Ss, Tt, Vv, Xx, Zz.
:َ‫) تي غږٍ تْؿي ػي چي ػثاؿت ػي ل‬۱۹(‫ پَ اًګليني ژتَ کي ًَ لل‬

Bb ,Cc, Dd, Ff, Gg, Hh, Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn, Pp, Qq, Rr, Ss, Tt, Vv, Xx, Zz.
 Explanation of consonant letters:

: ‫ د تي غږٍ تْسّ تؾشيح‬
.‫ ) تْؿي پَ پيتْ ژتَ ي ػ (ب) غږ ّؿکْي‬B( ‫ ػ‬:۱
Ex: Boy , Broom
:‫ ػغَ تْؿي پَ ػٍّ صالتَ کي عاهْه(تي غږٍ) ػي‬:‫ًْټ‬
.‫( ػ تْؿي هغکي ؿاىي‬t) ‫( تْؿي ػ‬b) ‫ پَ ُغَ کلوْ کي چي ػ‬.a

ٍ‫تــــــي غـــــــږ‬
Ex: Debt , Doubt …

.‫) ػ تْؿي څغَ ّؿّمتَ پَ اعيـ کي ؿاىي‬m( ‫) تْؿي ػ‬b( ‫ پَ ُغْ کلوْ کي چي ػ‬.b
ٍ‫تــــــي غـــــــږ‬
Ex: Comb , Thumb.

‫‪ :۲‬ػ (‪ )C‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ ( ك ‪،‬ک) غږ ّؿکْي ػ (‪ (e ,i ,y‬څغَ هغکي (ك) لَ ُغَ څغَ تغيـ‬
‫(ک) تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: City , Car , Cycle.‬‬
‫ك‬ ‫ک‬ ‫ك‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )c‬تْؿي لَ (‪ )h‬مـٍ يْځاي امتؼواليږي اّػ (ه ‪،‬چ ‪،‬ک) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: School , March , Choice , Mechanic.‬‬
‫ک‬ ‫چ‬ ‫چ‬ ‫ک‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )c‬تْؿي ځيٌي ّعت لَ ًْؿّ تْؿّ مـٍ يْځاي کيږي ػ (ه) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫(ه)‪Ex: Special , Ancient , Ocean , Conscious. .‬‬
‫‪ :۳‬ػ (‪ )D‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (ډ) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Door , Dram.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ځيٌي ّعت ػ (‪ )D‬تْؿي ػ (‪ )U‬ػ تْؿي هغتَ ؿاځي ػ (د) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Education , Graduate.‬‬
‫د‬ ‫د‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )D‬تْؿي ػ (‪ )G ,J‬لَ تْؿي څغَ هغکي ًَ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Adjective , bridge.‬‬
‫تي غږٍ‬ ‫تي غږٍ‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )D‬تْؿي ځيٌي ّعت ػ (ُ) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫(ؿهْاى)‪Ex: Ramadan. .‬‬
‫‪ :۴‬ػ )‪ (F‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ(ف) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Fan , Family , Father.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )F‬تْؿي ػ (‪ )of‬پَ کلوَ کي ػ (‪ )v‬غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: A part of the book.‬‬
‫ػ )‪ (v‬غږّؿکْي‬
‫‪: ۵‬ػ)‪ (G‬تْؿي ػ (د) غږ ّؿکْي ُـکلَ چي )‪ (E ,I‬څغَ هغکي ؿاىي کلَ (ګ) اّ کلَ (د) تلفع‬
‫کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Girl , Gender , Get.‬‬

‫ګ‬ ‫د‬ ‫ګ‬

‫‪ُ ‬غَ ّعت چي ػ)‪ (G‬تْؿي ػ (‪ )y‬څغَ هغکي ؿاىي ُوييَ (د) تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Geology , Gymnastic.‬‬
‫کلَ چي ػ(‪ )G‬تْؿي ػ ًْؿّ تْؿّ څغَ هغکي ؿاىي ُوييَ (ګ) تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪Ex: Garden , Grass , Good.‬‬
‫‪ُ ‬ـکلَ چي ػ (‪ )G‬تْؿي ػ (‪ )m‬اّ (‪ )n‬لَ تْؿي هغکي پَ مـيا پَ اعيـ ػ کليوي کي ؿاىي ًَ تلفع‬
‫‪Ex: Sign , Diaphragm.‬‬
‫‪ :۶‬ػ (‪ )H‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ ژتَ کي ػ (س ‪ )ٍ،‬غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Hide , Hand , Hen.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )H‬تْؿي ځيٌي ّعت تي غږٍ ّي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Hour , Honor.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )H‬تْؿي پَ تـکية ىْي ډّل لَ ًْؿّ تْؿّ مـٍ يْځاي کيږي اّ هغتلف غږًَّ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Exs:‬‬ ‫‪a: Laugh , Rough‬‬
‫ف‬ ‫ف‬
‫‪b: She , Shine‬‬
‫ش‬ ‫ش‬
‫‪c: Character ,School.‬‬
‫ک‬ ‫ک‬
‫‪d: Rhyme , Rheumatism.‬‬
‫بي غږه‬ ‫بي غږه‬
‫‪e: Biography , Phone.‬‬
‫ف‬ ‫ف‬
‫‪f: Chalk , Choice.‬‬
‫چ‬ ‫چ‬
‫‪ :۷‬ػ )‪(J‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (د) اّ ( ژ ) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Job , Jail , Jam.‬‬

‫‪ :۸‬ػ )‪ (K‬توري په پښتو کي د (ک) غږ ورکوي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Keep , Kick.‬‬
‫‪ ‬کلَ چي ػ کليوي پَ ىـّع کي ػ (‪ )k‬تْؿي ػ (‪ )n‬ػ تْؿي هغکي ؿاىي ًْ(‪ ًَ )k‬تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Knife , Knee , Knoll.‬‬
‫بي غږه‬ ‫بي غږه‬ ‫تي غږٍ‬
‫‪ :۹‬ػ )‪(L‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (ل) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Lure , like , look.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ )‪ (L‬تْؿي اکخـاً ّعت ػکليوي پَ هٌځ کي ًَ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Chalk , walk , could.‬‬
‫‪ :۱۱‬ػ (‪ )M‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ ( م ) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Mother , Mobile.‬‬
‫‪ ‬کلَ چي ػ (‪ )M‬تْؿي ػ (‪ )N‬لَ تْؿي څغَ هغکي ؿاىي ًَ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Mnemonics.‬‬
‫بي غږه‬
‫‪ :۱۱‬ػ )‪ (N‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (ى) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Nation , Near .‬‬
‫‪ ‬کلَ چي ػ (‪ )N‬پَ اعيـ ػکليوي کي ػ (‪ )M‬لَ تْؿي ّؿّمتَ ؿاىی ًَ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Autumn , Contemn.‬‬
‫‪ :۱۲‬ػ )‪ (P‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (پ) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Poem , Paper , Part.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )P‬تْؿي ځيٌي ّعت ػ (‪ )H‬لَ تْؿي مـٍ يْځاي کيږي ػ (ف) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Phone , Pharmacy.‬‬
‫‪ ‬کَ چيـي ػ (‪ )P‬تْؿي ػ کليوي پَ ىـّع کي ػ ( ‪ )s ,t ,n‬لَ تْؿّ څغَ هغکي ؿاىي ًَ تلفع‬
‫‪Ex: Pneumonic , Psychology , Ptomaine.‬‬
‫تي غږٍ‬ ‫تي غږٍ‬ ‫تي غږٍ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ليکًّْکي‪ :‬عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو»‬
‫‪ :۱۳‬ػ)‪ (Q‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (ک ‪ ،‬ق) غږ ّؿکْي ‪ ،‬اّاکخـاً ّعت ػ )‪ (U‬لَ تْؿي مـٍ يْځاي‬
‫ليکل کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Quran , Question , Quite.‬‬
‫‪ ‬کَ چيـي (‪ )Q‬لَ (‪ )U‬مـٍ پَ تـکيثي ډّل ؿاىي ػ(‪ )K‬پَ څيـ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Technique , antique.‬‬
‫‪ :۱۴‬ػ (‪ )R‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (ؿ ‪ ،‬ړ) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Read , Room , Road.‬‬
‫‪ ‬کلَ چي ػ (‪ )R‬لَ تْؿي ّؿّمتَ يْ تي غږٍ تْؿي يا ماکٌَ (‪ )e‬پَ اعيـ ػکلوي کي ػ (‪ ) R‬ػ‬
‫تْؿي څغَ هغکي ؿاغلي ّي پَ تـيتاًْي مينټن کي ًَ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Form , Teacher , Ruler.‬‬
‫تي غږٍ‬ ‫تي غږٍ‬ ‫تي غږٍ‬
‫‪ ‬ػ(‪ )R‬تْؿي ُوؼاؿًګَ کْالي ىي ػ (‪ )H‬لَ تْؿي مـٍ يْځاي امتؼوال ىي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Rhythm , Rheumatism.‬‬
‫‪ :۱۵‬ػ (‪ )S‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (ك ‪، ً ،‬ث) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Sound , Start , Single.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )S‬تْؿي ځيٌي ّعت ػ کلوي پَ مـکي ػ (‪ )U‬لَ تْؿي هغکي ػ (ه) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫(ه)‪Ex: Sure , Sugar. .‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )S‬تْؿي ځيٌي ّعت ػ (ف) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫(ف) ‪Ex: Noisy , Busy , Cousin , Poison.‬‬
‫‪ ‬کَ چيـي ػ(‪ )S‬تْؿي ػ (‪ )ure( ،)uat(، )ion‬لَ تـکيثًْْ مـٍ ؿاغلي ّي اکخـاً ّعت (ژ) تلفع‬
‫‪Ex: Pleasure , Explosion.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪)S‬تْؿي ځيٌي ّعت لَ (‪ )ia‬څغَ هغکي ؿاځي ػ (ه) يا (ژ)پَ څيـ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Asian , Persian , Controversial.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )S‬تْؿي ډيـ ځايًْْ کي تي غږّي اًَّ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Crops.‬‬
‫‪ ‬کلَ چي ػ (‪ )S‬تْؿي ػ (‪ )H‬لَ تْؿي مـٍ يْځاي ػ (ه) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Shop , Shall , Shine.‬‬
‫‪ :۱۶‬ػ )‪ (T‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ ( ت ‪ ،‬ټ ‪ )ٓ ،‬غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Teacher , Tree , Tear.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )T‬تْؿي ځيٌي ّعت ػ (‪ )U‬لَ تْؿي هغکي ػ (چ) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Picture , Actual , Signature.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )T‬تْؿي ځيٌي ّعت ػ (‪ )io‬اّ (‪ )ia‬څغَ هغکي امتؼواليږي اّ ػ(ه) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: International , Action , partial .‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ(‪ )T‬تْؿي ځيٌي ّعت لَ (‪ )S‬څغَ ّؿّمتَ ًَ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Listen , Thistle , Nestle .‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ(‪ )T‬تْؿي ځيٌي ّعت لَ (‪ )H‬مـٍ يْځاي کيږي اّ ًَ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Asthma , Isthmus.‬‬
‫‪ :۱۷‬ػ (‪ )V‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (ّي) اّ (في) غـږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Verse , Vast , Vine.‬‬
‫‪ :۱۸‬ػ (‪ )W‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ ژتَ کي ػ (ّ) غـــږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Wag , Waif .‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )W‬تْؿي ػ کليوي پَ ىـّع کي ػ (‪ )R‬ػ تْؿي هغکي ًَ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Write , Wrong.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )W‬تْؿي ػ(‪ ) H‬لَ تْؿي مـٍ يْځاي کيږي ځيٌي ّعت ػ (س) اّځيٌي ّعت ػ (ّ) غږ‬
‫ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: While , What , Whole.‬‬
‫‪ :۱۹‬ػ (‪ )X‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ ژتَ کي ػ (ايګــق) ‪( ،‬ايـکـل) اّ (اکل) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Box , Tax , Exam .‬‬
‫اکل‬ ‫ايکل‬ ‫اګق‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )X‬تْؿي ػ کليوي پَ ىـّع کي ػ (ف) غـــږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Xylem , Xeric.‬‬
‫‪ :۲۱‬ػ (‪ )Y‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (ي) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Young , Yellow , Your.‬‬
‫‪ :۲۱‬ػ (‪ )Z‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ ژتَ کي ػ (ف‪ ،‬ؽ ‪ ،‬ظ ‪ )ُ ،‬غـــږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Zero , Zinc , Zone.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )Z‬تْؿي ځيٌي ّعت ػ (‪ )U‬ػ تْؿي ػهغَ ػ (ژ) پَ څيـ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Seizure.‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
Compound Letters
‫تــرکــــيـــبـي تـوري‬
Combination of more than one letter which has particular sound are
called compound letter.
.‫ػ يٍْ تْؿی څغَ ػ فياتْ تـکية چي هيغََ غـږ لـي تـکيثي تْؿي تلل کيږي‬
)‫ (چ‬Ch Ex: Chalk. ) ‫ (ژ‬Sio Ex: Television.
)‫ (ه‬Sh Ex: Shin. )‫ (ه‬Cie Ex: Ancient.
)‫ ( ژ‬Zh Ex: Zhalah. ) ‫ ( ػ‬Th Ex: This.
) ‫ (ؽ‬Gh Ex: Ghazni. ) ّ ( Wh Ex: White.
) ‫ (ط‬Kh Ex: Khan. ) ‫ (د‬Du Ex: Education.
)‫ (ف‬Ph Ex: Phone. )‫ (ه‬Su Ex: Suger.
) ‫ (چ‬Tu Ex: Nature. )‫ (ه‬Tia Ex: Initiate.
)‫ (ه‬Tio Ex: Nation. )‫ (ه‬Cia Ex: Special.
Parts of speech
‫دکـــالم اجــــضاّي‬
Words are the base of a language they are put together to make a sense
in the sentences , these words are classified according to the work they
do in the sentences are called parts of speech.
‫کلوي ػيْي ژتي ػ تٌنټ صيخيت لـي ػّي پَ عپلْ کي يْځاي کيږي اّپَ رولَ کي يْ هفِْم رْړّي‬
‫چي ػّي پَ رولْ کي تـمـٍ کْي ٓثمَ تٌؼي کيږي چي ُوؼي‬، ‫ چي ػغَ کليوي ػُغَ ػًؼّ لَ هغي‬،
.‫تَ ػ کالم ارقاّي ّايي‬
Or: The basic words of a language are divided into nine parts that are
called parts of speech.
.‫ پَ يٍْ ژتَ کي امامي کليوي پَ ًَ تـعْ ّييل ىْي چي ػ کالم ارقاّي تلل کيږي‬:‫اّيا‬
 The parts of speech are divided in nine parts:

:‫ دکالم اجضاّي پَ ًَ تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
1. Pronoun. . ‫ّــوـيـ‬
2. Verb. . ‫فـؼـل‬
3. Article. .‫ػتؼـيف تْؿي‬
4. Noun. .‫امـــن‬
5. Adjective. .‫ٍفت‬
6. Adverb. .‫لــيــؼ‬
7. Conjunction. .‫ػ ؿتٔ تْؿي‬
8. Preposition. .‫اّافَ تْؿي‬
9. Interjection. .‫ػ ًؼا تْؿي‬
15
»‫ عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو‬:‫ليکًّْکي‬
1) Pronoun : pronoun is a word which is used in the place of a noun

and avoids its repetition.
‫ ّويـ ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي ػ ًْم پَ ځاي امتؼواليږي اّ ػُغَ لَ تکـاؿ څغَ هغٌيْي‬:‫)ضويش‬۱
.‫کْي‬
Or : Pronoun is a word that functions as a substitute for a noun and
avoids its repetation.
َ‫ ّوـيـ ُغَ کلـيوَ ػٍ چـې ػ امـن لپاؿٍ ػ تؼـْيِ پَ صيج کاؿ کـْي اّ ػ ُغـَ لَ تکــاؿ څغ‬: ‫اّيا‬
.‫هغٌيْي کْي‬
Ex: Shfiq is a student. .ٍ‫ ىـفيـك يْ ىاګـػ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Noun ‫امــن‬
Ex: He is a student. .ٍ‫ ُغَ يْ ىاګـػ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Pronoun ‫ّويـ‬
2) Verb: verb is a word which shows an action , stat, possession , pre-

sence or absence.
‫ هْرْػيت اّ ًا هْرْػيت‬،‫ هلکيت‬،)‫صالت(ّضعيت‬،‫ فؼل ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي يْ ػول‬:‫) فــعــل‬۲
.‫ښکاؿٍ کْي‬
Ex: Amran comes to school every day. .‫ ػوـاى ُـٍ ّؿځ ښًّْځۍ ت ؿاځي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Kandalakh is a beautiful place. .ٍ‫ کٌؼلظ يْ ښکلي ځاي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
3) Article: article is a word which is used with a noun or adjective and

determines them.
ّ‫ ػ تؼـيف تْؿي ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي لَ ًْم اّيا ٍفت مـٍ امتؼواليږي ا‬:‫)دتعشيف تْسي‬۳
.‫ُغَ هؼيٌْي‬
Ex: The sun.
4) Noun: noun is a word which is used as the name of some person
, place , animal , or thing.
.‫ صيْاى اّ ىي ػ ًْهْلْ پَ صيج امتؼواليږي‬،‫ ځاي‬، ٌ‫ امـن ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي ػ ىغ‬:‫)اعـن‬۴
Ex: Wardak , Asad , Cow…etc .‫ اًّْؿ‬... ‫ غْا‬، ‫ امــؼ‬، ‫ ّؿػک‬:‫هخال‬
5) Adjective: Adjective is a word which completes the meaning of a
noun or qualifies a noun.
.‫ ٍفت ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي ػ امــن هؼٌي تکويلْي اّيا ػُغَ متايٌَ کْي‬:‫)صفت‬۵
Or: Adjective is a word that describes people , things and events or gives
further information about a noun or pronoun.
‫ ىياى اّ ّالؼي تٍْيفْي اّيا ػ امن يا‬، )ً‫ ٍفت ُغَ کليوَ ػٍ چې علک(اىغا‬:‫اّيا‬
.‫ّويـ پَ تاؿٍ کي اّافي هؼلْهات ّؿکْي‬
Ex: Kandahar is a big province. .ٍ‫ کٌؼُاؿ يْ لْي ّاليت ػ‬:‫هخال‬
16
6) Adverb: Adverb is a word which is used to add something to the

meaning of a verb , an adjective , or another adverb.
‫(ػُغْي‬. ‫ اّ يا تل ليؼ پَ هؼٌي يْ ىي فياتْي‬،‫ ٍفت‬، ‫ ليؼ ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي فؼل‬:‫)قـــــيـــــذ‬۶
.)‫هؼٌي تکويلْي‬
Or : Adverb is a word which is used to describes a verb , an adjective ,
another adverb or adverbial phrase.
.‫ ٍفت تل ليؼ يا ليؼي ػثاؿت تيـيش کْي‬،‫ ليؼ ُغَ کلويَ ػٍ چي فؼـل‬:‫اّيا‬
Ex: Obaid runs fast.(verb). .)‫(فؼل‬.‫ ػــثيـؼ تيق ځغلي‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: He spoke quite correctly.(adverb). .)‫ ُغَ کاهالً پَ ٍضيش ډّل عثـي ّکړي(لــيؼ‬:‫هخال‬
7) Conjunction: Conjunction is a word which is used to join two

words, two sentences , two phrases , and two clauses.
ْ‫ ػّّ ػثاؿات‬، ْ‫ ػّّ رول‬، ْ‫ ػ ؿتٔ تْؿي ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي ػ ػّّ کلو‬:‫)دّصل(ستظ) تْسی‬۶
.‫ اّ ػّّ لْيْ ٍّل کْلْ لپاؿٍ پکاؿ ّړل کيږي‬،
Ex: Abdul Hadi and Karrim are brothers. .‫ ػثؼالِاػي اّ کـين ّؿّڼَ ػي‬:‫هخال‬
8) Preposition: Preposition is a word which is used to show the

relationship bet-ween two persons or things.
.‫ اّافي تْؿي ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي ػػّ اىغاٍْ اّيا ىياًْ تـهٌځ ؿاتطَ ښيي‬:‫)اضافي تْسی‬۴
Or:
Preposition is a word that shows the relationship of a noun or pronoun
to some other words in a sentences.
.‫اّافي تْؿي ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي ػ امـن يا ّويــ اړيکَ ػ ًْؿّ کليوْ مـٍ پَ رولَ کي ښيي‬
Ex: I am in the bazaar . .‫ فٍ پَ تافاؿ کي يـن‬:‫هخال‬
9) Interjection: Interjection is a word or phrase that expresses emotion

or exclamation , an interjection has no grammatical connection to
to other words.
َ‫ ًؼاي‬،‫ چي اصنامات يا فـياػ ښيی‬، ‫ ػ ًؼا تـْؿی يٍْ کلوَ يا ػثاؿت ػي‬:‫) د ًذا(غــږ) تـْسی‬۹
.‫تْؿي کْم ګـاهـي اړيکَ ػ ًْؿّ کلوْ مـٍ ًَ لـي‬
Or : Interjection is a word or group of words used to express strong
feelings or emotion.
.‫ػ ًؼا تْؿی يٍْ کليوَ يا ګـّپ ػ کليوْػٍ چي ػ لْي اصنامات يا ُيزاى تياًْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬:‫اّيا‬
Ex: Oh! She is so cute. .ٍ‫ آٍ! ُغَ څْهـٍ ښاينتَ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
17
Pronoun ‫ضـــويـــش‬
Pronoun : pronoun is a word which is used in the place of a noun and
avoids its repetition.
َ‫ ّـويـ ُـغـَ کلوَ ػٍ چـي ػ ًْم پَ ځـاي امتؼـوالـيږي اّ ػُغَ لَ تکــاؿ څغ‬:‫ضـــوــــيش‬
.‫هغـٌـيـْي کـْي‬
Or : Pronoun is a word that functions as a substitute for a noun and
avoids its repetation.
َ‫ ّوـيـ ُغَ کلـيوَ ػٍ چـې ػ امـن لپاؿٍ ػ تؼـْيِ پَ صيج کاؿ کـْي اّ ػ ُغـَ لَ تکــاؿ څغ‬: ‫اّيا‬
.‫هغٌيْي کْي‬
 Kinds of pronoun: ًَْ‫د ضــويـــش ډّلــ‬
1. Personal pronouns. .ًَّ‫ىغَي ّويـ‬

2. Demonstrative pronouns. .ًَّ‫اىاؿّي ّويـ‬
3. Possessive pronouns. .ًَّ‫هلکي ّويـ‬
4. Distributive pronouns. .ًَّ‫تْفيؼي ّويـ‬
5. Indefinite pronouns. .ًَّ‫ًا هؼيي ّويـ‬
6. Interrogative pronouns. .ًَّ‫پْښتًْکي(مْالي)ّويـ‬
7. Emphasizing pronouns. .ًَّ‫تاکيؼي ّويـ‬
8. Reflexive pronouns. .ًَّ‫اًؼکامي ّويـ‬
9. Relative pronouns. .ًَّ‫هٍْْلي ّويـ‬
1) Personal pronouns ًَّ‫ؽخصي ضويش‬

Personal pronouns are those which are used instead of people Places
and things in the sentences.
‫ هکاًًْْ اّ ىـياًْ پَ ځاي پَ رولْ کي‬،)ْ‫ىـغَي ّويـًَّ ُغَ ػي چي ػعلکـْ(اؽخاصـ‬
.‫امتؼواليږي‬
 Personal pronouns of two kinds: ‫ؽخصي ضويشًَّ پَ دٍّ ډّلَ دي‬
 Subjective pronouns. .ًَّ‫فاػلي ّويـ‬
 Objective pronouns. .ًَّ‫هفؼْلي ّويـ‬
 Subjective pronouns: ًَّ‫فاعلي ضويش‬

Subject pronouns are those which are used in the place of subject in
the sentence.
.‫فاػلي ّويـًَّ ُغَ ّويـًَّ ػي چي ػ فاػل پَ ځاي پَ رولَ کي امتؼواليږي‬
18
 Subjective pronouns are as follow: ‫فاعلي ضويشًَّ پَ الًذي ډّل دي‬
Subjective pronouns ًَّ‫فــاػـــلي ّـــويـــ‬

I ٍ‫ف‬
You ‫ تامي‬، َ‫ت‬
He )‫ُغَ (هؾکـ‬
She )‫ُغَ (هًْج‬
They ‫ ػّي‬، ‫ُغْي‬
We ‫هـــْږ‬
It )‫ُغَ (تيزاى‬
Subjective pronouns ًَّ‫فاػلي ّــويــــ‬
First person Singular ‫هفـػ‬ I I go to school.

)‫لْهړي ىغٌ(هتکلن‬ Plural ‫روغ‬ We We play cheese.
Second person Singular ‫هفـػ‬ You You are a student.
)‫ػُّن ىغٌ(هغآة‬ Plural ‫روغ‬ You You are students.
Third person Singular ‫هفـػ‬ He , She , It He/She is a teacher.
)‫ػؿين ىغٌ( غــايـة‬ It is a book.
Plural ‫روغ‬ They They are my family.
 Subject )‫فاعل (هثتــذا‬

 Subject is the doer of an action. .ٍ‫فاػل ػ يْ ػول مـتَ ؿمًّْکي ػ‬
Ex: Najeeb speaks English. .‫ ًزية پَ اًګليــني عثـي کْي‬:‫هخال‬
 Subject is a word which is used at the beginning of the sentences.

.‫فاػل ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي ػرــولي پَ مـکي ؿاّړل کيږي‬
Ex: This is my room. .ٍ‫ ػغَ فهـــا آـاق ػ‬:‫هخال‬
 Subject is a person or thing that we talk about.

.ّْ‫فاػل ُغَ ىغٌ يا ىي ػٍ چي هْږ ػ ُغْ پَ تاؿٍ کي عثـي ک‬
Ex: He is a doctor. .ٍ‫ ُغَ يْ ډاکتـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
 Objective pronouns: ًَّ‫هـفــعــْلـــي ضــويــش‬

Object pronouns are those which are used in the place of Object in
the sentence.
.‫هفؼْلي ّويـًَّ ُغَ ػي چي ػ هفؼْل پَ ځاي پَ رولَ کي امتؼواليږي‬
19
 Objective pronouns are as follow: :‫هفعْلي ضويشًَّ پَ الًذي ډّل دي‬
Objective pronouns ًَّ‫هـــفـعـْلــي ضويش‬

Me ‫ فها‬، ‫لَ ها‬، َ‫هات‬
You َ‫ تامي ت‬، َ‫تات‬
Us ، َ‫هْږ ت‬
Them َ‫ ػّي ت‬، َ‫ُغْي ت‬
Him َ‫ُغَ(هؾکـ) ت‬
Her َ‫ُغي (هًْج) ت‬
It َ‫ُغَ (تيزاى) ت‬
 Object: ‫هــفــعــْل‬
Object is a person or thing in which the work or action is done to.
.‫هفؼْل يْ ىغٌ يا ىي چي ػ کاؿ يا ػول پـتَ تـمـٍ کيږي‬
Or: ‫اّيا‬
Object is the receiver of an action.
.)‫( چي ػول ّؿتاًؼي تـمـٍ کيږي‬.ٍ‫هفؼْل ػ يْ ػول اعينتًْکي ػ‬
Ex: I gave him a book. .‫ ها ُغَ تَ يْ کتاب ّؿکړ‬:‫هخال‬
 Kinds of object: ًَْ‫د هــفـعـْل ډّل‬

1. Direct object. (Accusative Object).
2. Indirect object. (Dative object ).
1. Direct object: ‫هـــغــتقـين هفـعـْل‬

Direct object is an object which is affected by the action of a verb
directly.
.‫هـنتـميـن هـفؼـْل ُـغـَ هـفؼـْل ػٍ چـي فـؼـل هنـتـميوا ً ػ ػـوـل پَ ّامـطَ هتاحــٍ کـيـږي‬
Or: ‫اّيا‬
The first receiver of an action is called direct object.

.‫ػ يْ ػول لوړًي اعـينـتًْکي تَ هـنـتمـين هـفؼـْل ّايي‬
Ex: I sent a letter to Ahsan. .ٍ‫ ها يْ ليک اصناى تَ ّليږ‬:‫هخال‬
20
2. Indirect object:‫غـيش هغتـقــين هــفــعـْل‬

Indirect object is an object which is affected by the action of a verb
indirectly.
ٍ‫غيـ هنتـمين هفؼـْل ُغَ هفؼْل ػٍ چي يْ فؼل ػ ػول پَ ّامطَ پَ غيـ هنتـمين ډّل هتاحـ‬
.‫کيږي‬
Or: ‫اّيا‬
The second receiver of an action is called indirect object.
.‫ػيْ ػول ػُّـــن اعينتًْکي تَ غيــ هنتـمـيـن هفؼـْل ّايـي‬
Ex: I will buy a car for Karrim. .‫ فٍ تَ ػ کـين لپاؿٍ يْ هْټـ ّاعلـن‬:‫هخال‬
Direct object indirect object ‫هنتمين هفؼْل‬ ‫غيـهنتمين هفؼْل‬
Note: Direct object is usually a thing and indirect object is usually a person.
.‫ هنتمين هفؼْل هؼوْالً ىــي ّي اّ غيـ هنتـميـن هفؼْل هؼوْالً ىغٌ ّي‬:‫ًْټ‬
To Be verbs ًَْ‫د ّجْد لشلْ فعل‬

To Be verbs are used to show state and being the sentences.
.‫ػ ّرْػ لـلْ فؼلًَْ ُغَ فؼلًَْ ػي چي پَ رولْ کي صالت (ّّؼيت) اّ هْرْػيت تياًْي‬
 We can use to be verbs before an adjective , a noun , a place
Expression , an “ing” form of a verb and third form a verb.
، ‫ ػّعت اٍطالس‬،‫ ػهکاى اٍطالس‬، ‫ امن‬، ‫ هْږ ػ ّرْػ لـلْ فؼلًَْ لَ ٍفت‬
.ْ‫“ ىکل اّ ػ فؼل لَ ػؿين ىکل څغَ ػ هغَ امتؼوالْالي ى‬ing” ‫ػ فؼل‬
 To Be verbs consist in:َ‫دّجْد لشلْ فعـلًَْ عثاست دي ل‬
To Be verbs ًَْ‫د ّجْد لشلْ فعـل‬
Is are am was were Be been being
Present conjugation ‫صـــال ګـــــػاى‬

I am ‫فٍ ين‬
You are ‫ تامي يامت‬، ‫تَ يي‬
They are ‫ ػّي ػي‬، ‫ُغْي ػي‬
We are ْ‫هْږ ي‬
He is ٍ‫ُغَ(هؾکـ) ػ‬
She is ٍ‫ُغَ(هًْج) ػ‬
It is ٍ‫ُغَ (تيزاى) ػ‬
Ex: He is a doctor. .ٍ‫ ُغَ يْ ډاکټـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I am a student. .‫ فٍ يْ فػٍ کًّْکي ين‬:‫هخال‬
21
Past conjugation ‫هاّي(تيـ) ګـــــػاى‬

I was ‫فٍ ّم‬
You were ‫ تامي ّي‬، ‫تَ ّي‬
They were ٍّ ‫ ػّي‬، ٍّ ‫ُغْي‬
We were ٍّ ‫هْږ‬
He was ٍّ )‫ُغَ(هؾکـ‬
She was ٍّ )‫ُغَ(هًْج‬
It was ٍّ )‫ُغَ(تيزاى‬
Ex: He was a carpenter. .ٍّ ‫ ُغَ يْ ًزاؿ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: They were engeeners. .ٍّ ‫ ُغْي اًزيٌـاى‬:‫هخال‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
If there is a (to be) verb in a sentence , in the question form these verbs
are used at the beginning of the sentence and in the negative form (not)
is used after these verbs.
‫( فؼل پَ رولَ کي هْرْػ ّي پَ مْالی ىکل کي ػغَ فؼلًَْ ػ رولي پَ مـکي‬to be) ‫کَ چيـي‬
.‫( کلوَ امتؼواليږي‬not) ‫ؿاځي اّ پَ هٌفي ىکل کي لَ ػغَ فؼلًْْ ّؿّمتَ ػ‬
Ex: :‫هثال‬
- Ahmad Zia is a teacher. (+). .)+(.ٍ‫ اصوؼّيا يْ ښًّْکي ػ‬-

- Is Ahmad Zia a teacher?. (?). .)‫ـ آيا اصوؼ ّيا يْ ښًّْکي ػٍ؟ (؟‬
- Ahmad Zia is not a teacher. (-). .)-( .ٍ‫ـ اصوؼّيا يْ ښًّْکي ًَ ػ‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
( To be) verbs are both ordinary and auxiliary verbs , if they are used
alone in the sentences , they are ordinary verbs but when they are
followed by other verbs in the sentences , they are auxiliary verbs.
‫ کَ چيـي پَ رولَ کي يْافي امتؼوال‬،ًَْ‫ ( فؼلًَْ ُن اٍلي فؼلًَْ ػي اّ ُن کْهکي فؼل‬To be) ‫ػ‬
ّ‫ىــي يؼٌي چـي تل فؼل هْرْػ ًَ ّي پَ ػغـَ ٍـْؿت کـي اٍـلي فؼـلًَْ ػي هـګـ کلَ چي لَ ًْؿ‬
.‫فؼلًْْ مـٍ يْ ځاي ىي کْهکي فؼلًَْ ػي‬
Ex: Karrim is a Qari. (Ordinary verb). .)‫ (اٍلي فؼل‬.ٍ‫ کـين يْ لاؿي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Abdullah is playing football.(Auxiliary verb). )‫(کْهکي فؼل‬.ٍ‫ػثؼهللا ػفْټثال پَ لْتَ هيغْل ػ‬:‫هخال‬
‫ پَ تيــٍ فهاًَ کـي ػ‬، َ‫( فؼـلًْْ څغ‬to be) َ‫( ل‬Is ,am , are) ‫ پَ صال راؿي فهاًَ کي ػ‬:‫ًــْټ‬
‫ ( فؼـل‬to be) َ‫ ( ل‬Be)‫پَ ؿاتلًْـکي راؿي فهاًَ کـي ػ‬، َ‫( فؼلًْْ څغ‬to be) َ‫( ل‬was ,were)
.‫( فؼل څغَ ګټَ اعينتل کيږي‬to be) َ‫( ل‬been) ‫څغَ اّپَ کاهلْ فهاًْ کي‬
22
Examples: :ًَْ‫هثال‬
I am working now. .‫فٍ اّك پَ کاؿ کْلْ لګيا ين‬ ًَ‫صال راؿي فها‬
He was studying the book. .ٍّ ‫ُغَ ػهطالؼي پَ صال کي‬ ًَ‫تيـٍ راؿي فها‬
I will be going to Kabul. .‫فٍ تَ کاتل تَ ػ تلْ پَ صال کي ين‬ ًَ‫ؿاتلًْکي راؿي فها‬
We have been playing volleyball for two hour. ًَ‫صال کاهلَ راؿي فها‬
.ْ‫هْږ ػ ػّّ ماػتْ لپاؿٍ ػ ّاليثال ػ لْتي پَ صال کي ي‬

To have verbs: ًَْ‫د لشلْ فعـل‬

To have verbs are those which are used to show possession or own-
ership in the sentences.
.‫ػلـلْ فؼلًَْ ُغَ ػي چي پَ رولَ کي هلکيت اّ هالکيت ښْػلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬
 To have verbs consist in: َ‫د لشلْ فعلًَْ عثاست دي ل‬
To have verbs ًَْ‫ػ لـلْ فؼـل‬

Have Has Had
Present conjugation ‫صـــال ګـــــػاى‬

I have ‫فٍ لـم‬
You have ‫تامي لـي‬، ‫تَ لـي‬
They have ‫ ػّي لـي‬، ‫ُغْي لـي‬
We have ّ‫هْږ لـ‬
He has ‫ُغَ(هؾکـ) لـي‬
She has ‫ُغَ(هًْج) لـي‬
It has ‫ُغَ (تيزاى) لـي‬
Ex: I have a gun. .‫ فٍ يْ ټْپک لـم‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: You have three sons. .‫ تَ ػؿي فاهي لـي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He has a bicycle. .‫ ُغَ يْ تاينکل لـي‬:‫هخال‬
23
‫‪Past conjugation‬‬ ‫هاّي(تيـ) ګـػاى‬

‫‪I had‬‬ ‫ها ػؿلْػل‪،‬ها ػؿلْػ ‪،‬هاػؿلْػی‬
‫‪You had‬‬ ‫تامي ػؿلْػل ‪،‬تامي ػؿلْػ ‪،‬تامي ػؿلْػي‬
‫‪They had‬‬ ‫ُغْي ػؿلْػل ‪ُ،‬غْي ػؿلْػ‪ُ ،‬غْي ػؿلْػي‬
‫‪We had‬‬ ‫هْږ ػؿلْػل ‪،‬هْږ ػؿلْػ ‪ ،‬هْږ ػؿلْػي‬
‫‪He had‬‬ ‫ُغَ ػؿلْػل‪ُ ،‬غَ ػؿلْػ ‪ُ ،‬غَ ػؿلْػي‬
‫‪She had‬‬ ‫ُغي ػؿلْػل ‪ُ ،‬غي ػؿلْػ ‪ُ ،‬غي ػؿلْػي‬
‫‪It had‬‬ ‫ُغَ(تيزاى) ػؿلْػل ‪ُ ،‬غَ ػؿلْػ‪ُ ،‬غَ ػؿلْػي‬
‫‪Ex: I had little money.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ها ليږ پيني ػؿلْػي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: He had a car.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ُ :‬غَ يْ هْټـ ػؿلْػ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: They had a lot of books.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ُ :‬غْي ډيـ کتاتًَْ ػؿلْػل‪.‬‬
‫ًْټ ‪Note:‬‬
‫‪1. (British system): use to have verbs at the beginning of the sentence‬‬
‫‪in the question form and add (not) after to have verbs in the negative‬‬
‫‪form.‬‬
‫‪( .۱‬تـيتاًْي مينټن)‪ :‬پَ مْالي ىکل کي ػ لـلْ فؼلًَْ ػ رولي پَ مـکي ؿاّړل کيږي‬
‫اّ پَ هٌفي ىکل کي ػ لـلْ فؼلًْْ څغَ ّؿّمتَ )‪ (not‬ػالٍّ کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex:‬‬ ‫هثال‪:‬‬
‫‪British‬‬ ‫‪system‬‬ ‫تـيتاًْي مينټن‬
‫‪I have a car.‬‬ ‫)‪(+‬‬ ‫(‪)+‬‬ ‫فٍ يْ هْټـ لـم‪.‬‬
‫?‪Have I a car‬‬ ‫)?(‬ ‫آيا فٍ يْ هْټـ لـم؟ (؟)‬
‫‪I have not a car.‬‬ ‫)‪(-‬‬ ‫فٍ يْ هْټـ ًَ لـم‪)-( .‬‬
‫‪1. (American system): use to do verbs with to have verbs in the‬‬

‫‪question and negative form.‬‬
‫‪(.۲‬اهـيکايي ميـنـټن)‪ :‬ػ لـلْ فؼلًْْ پَ مْالي اّ هٌفي ىـکل کي ػ ‪ to do‬لَ فؼلًْْ‬
‫څغَ امتفاػٍ کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex:‬‬ ‫هثال‪:‬‬
‫‪American system‬‬ ‫اهـــيکايي مـينـټـن‬

‫‪He has a house.‬‬ ‫)‪(+‬‬ ‫(‪)+‬‬ ‫ُغَ يْ کْؿ لـي‪.‬‬
‫?‪Does he have a house‬‬ ‫)?(‬ ‫آيا ُغَ يْ کْؿ لـي؟ (؟)‬
‫)‪He does not have a house. (-‬‬ ‫ُغَ يْ کْؿ ًَ لـي ‪)-( .‬‬
‫ًْټ‪ :‬پَ مْالي اّ هٌفي ىکل کي ُوييَ ػ (‪ )Have‬فؼل امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
(To have) verbs are both auxiliary and ordinary when they are used alone
They are ordinary verbs , but when they are used with other main verbs
then they are auxiliary verbs.
‫ػ )لـلْ فؼلًَْ( ُن کْهکي ػي اّ اٍلي پَ ُغَ ٍْؿت کي چي يْافي امتؼوال ىي يؼٌي کْم تل‬
ٍ‫ اٍلي فؼل ًَ ػي اّپَ ُغَ ٍْؿت کي چي لَ ًْؿّ اٍلي فؼلًْْ مـ‬، ‫اٍلي فؼل ّرْػ ًّلـي‬
.‫امتؼوال ىی تيا کْهکي فؼلًَْ ػي‬
Ex: I have a book. .‫ فٍ يْ کتاب لـم‬:‫هخال‬

Ordinary verb ‫اٍلي فؼـل‬
Ex: I have studied Biology. .ٍ‫ ها تيْلْژي هطالؼَ کړي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Auxiliary verb ‫کْهکي فؼـل‬
To do verbs ًَْ‫دعشتَ سعْلْ فعـل‬

( To do verbs) are those which are used to show performing of an
action in the sentence .
ٍ‫ػ (مــتَ ؿمـْلْ فؼـلًَْ) ُغـَ ػي چـي پَ رـوـلَ کي ػ يـْ ػوـل(کـاؿ) پـَ مــتَ ؿمـْلـْ لـپـاؿ‬
 To do verbs consist in:َ‫د عشتَ سعْلْ فعـلًَْ عثاست دي ل‬
To do verbs ًَْ‫د عشتَ سعْلْ فعـل‬

Do Does Did
Present conjugation ‫صال ګـــــػاى‬

I do ‫فٍ مـتَ ؿمْم‬
You do ‫تامي مـتَ ؿمْي‬
They do ‫ُغْي(ػّي) مـتَ ؿمْي‬
We do ّْ‫هْږ مـتَ ؿم‬
He does ‫ُغَ(هؾکـ) مـتَ ؿمْي‬
She does ‫ُغَ (هًْج) مـتَ ؿمْي‬
It does ‫ُغَ(تيزاى) مـتَ ؿمْي‬
Ex: I do my homework every day. .‫ فٍ ُـٍ ّؿځ عپلَ کْؿًۍ مـتَ ؿمْم‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He does service every month. .‫ ُغَ ُـٍ هياىت عپلَ ًْکـي مـتَ ؿمْي‬:‫هخال‬
25
Past conjugation ‫هاّي (تيـ) ګـػاى‬

I did َ‫ها مـتَ ّؿمْل‬
You did َ‫تامي مـتَ ّؿمْل‬
They did َ‫ُغْي(ػّي) مـتَ ّؿمْل‬
We did َ‫هْږ مـتَ ّؿمْل‬
He did َ‫ُغَ(هؾکـ) مـتَ ّؿمْل‬
She did َ‫ُغَ (هًْج) مـتَ ّؿمْل‬
It did َ‫ُغَ(تيزاى) مـتَ ّؿمْل‬
Ex: He did his education. .‫ ُغَ(هؾکـ) عپلي فػٍ کړي مـتَ ّؿمْلي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I did my homework yesterday. .َ‫ ها تيـٍ ّؿځ عپلَ کْؿًۍ ّظيفَ مـتَ ّؿمْل‬:‫هخال‬
Note:‫ًْټ‬
The sentences which do not have any (to be) verb or other auxiliary verbs
, (To do) verbs are used in their question and negative form.
‫( فؼل اّ تل کْم کْهکي فؼل هْرْػ ًَ ّي ػُغْ پَ مْالي اّ هٌفي‬to be) ‫پَ کْهْ رولْ کي چي ػ‬
.‫( لَ فؼلًْْ څغَ امتفاػٍ کيږي‬To do) ‫ىکل کي ػ‬
Ex: :‫هثال‬
Ahmad plays volley ball. (+) )+( .‫احمد د واليبال لوبه کوي‬
Does Ahmad play volley ball? (?) )‫(؟‬ ‫آيا اصوؼ ػ ّاليثال لْتَ کْي؟‬
Ahmad does not play volley ball. (-) )-( .‫اصوؼ ػ ّاليثال لْتَ ًَ کْي‬
Note:‫ًْټ‬
(To do) verbs are both ordinary and auxiliary verbs ; when they are used
alone they are ordinary and show performing of the action ; but when
they are followed by other verbs in the sentence to form a question or
negative ,are auxiliary verbs and lose their meaning.
‫( فؼلًَْ ُن کْهکـي ػي اُّن اٍلي فؼلًَْ ؛ پَ ُغَ ٍْؿت کي چـي پَ رولَ کي يْافي‬To do) ‫ػ‬
‫استعمال شي اصلي ده او دعمل په سرته رسولو داللت کوي؛ مګر کله چي په سـوالي او منفي شکل‬
.‫کي له نورو فعلونو سره يوځاي شي کومکي فعلونه دي او عپلَ هؼٌي له السه ورکوي‬
Ex: I do my homework.(ordinary verb). .)‫ (اٍلي فؼل‬.‫ فٍ عپلَ کْؿًي ّظيفَ مـتَ ؿمْم‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He dose not play chess. (auxiliary verb). .)‫ ( کْهکي فؼل‬.‫ ُغَ ػ مطـًذ لْتَ ًَ کْی‬:‫هخال‬
26
Emphatic “Do”
“Do” ‫تـاکـيـذي‬
When the “to do” verbs are placed before the simple form of the verbs
emphasize on performance of an action , are called emphatic do.
‫“ فؼلًَْ ػ فؼل لَ ماػٍ ىکل څغَ ػهغَ ؿاىي اّ ػػول پَ مـتَ ؿمْلْ تاکيؼ ّکړي‬to do” ‫کلَ چي ػ‬
.‫“ پَ ًاهَ ياػيږي‬Do” ‫ػ تاکيؼي‬
Ex: Sifat does perform his homework. .‫ ٍفت عپلَ کْؿًۍ ّظيفَ مـتَ ؿمْي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Asif does go to work everyday. .‫ آٍف ُـٍ ّؿځ کاؿ تَ ځي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I did study English. .‫ فٍ اًګليـني هطالؼَ کْم‬:‫هخال‬
2. Demonstrative pronouns: ًَّ‫اؽــاسّي ضــوـيش‬

Demonstrative pronouns are those which are used instead of noun and
point out some person , place and thing.
ٍ‫ هکاى اّ ىي تَ اىاؿ‬،ٌ‫اىاؿّي ّويـًَّ ُغَ ػي چي ػ امـن پَ ځاي امتؼواليږي اّ ىغ‬
.‫کْی‬
 Demonstrative pronouns are divided into two parts:
:‫ اؽـاسّي ضويشًَّ پَ دٍّ تشخْ ّيـؾـل ؽــْي دي‬
1. Definite Demonstrative pronouns . .ًَّ‫هؼيي اىاؿّي ّويـ‬

2. Indefinite Demonstrative pronouns. .ًَّ‫ًاهؼيي اىاؿّي ّويـ‬
1) Definite Demonstrative pronouns . .ًَّ‫هعـيي اؽاسّي ضويش‬

Definite Demonstrative pronouns are those which point out to exact and
clear person or thing.
.‫هؼـيي اىـاؿّي ّويــًَّ ُغـَ چي يْ هؼيـي اّ ّاّـش ىغـٌ اّىــي تَ اىـاؿٍ کـْي‬
Like َ‫ لک‬: this )َ‫ (ػغـ‬, that )َ‫ (ُغـ‬, these )»‫(ػغَ«روـغ‬, those) »‫ (ُغـَ«روـغ‬, the
same )‫ (ػيـي ىـي‬, such)َ‫ ػاؿًګـ‬،‫ (ػامـي‬, the former )‫ هـغکٌـي‬، ‫(پـغـْاًـي‬, the
latter )َ‫(ّؿّمــت‬
 “This َ‫ ”دغ‬: “this” is a demonstrative pronoun or adjective which is

used for a singular noun that is near the speaker.
‫“يْ اىاؿّي ّويـاّيا ٍفت ػٍ چي ػ ُغَ هفـػ امن لپاؿٍ امـتؼواليـږي‬This”
.‫چي هتکلن (عثـي کًّْکي) تَ ًږػي ّي‬
Ex: This is a computer. .ٍ‫ يْ کوپيْ ټـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
27
 “That َ‫ ”ُغ‬: “That” is a demonstrative pronoun or adjective which is

used for a singular noun that is far from the speaker.
‫“ يْ اىاؿّي ّويـ اّيا ٍفت ػٍ چي ػ ُغَ هفـػ امن لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬That”
.‫چي لَ هتکلن(عثـي کًّْکي) څغَ لـي ّي‬
Ex: That is a pen. .ٍ‫ ُغَ يْ للن ػ‬:‫هخال‬
 “These »‫”دغـَ«جـوـع‬:“These” is a demonstrative pronoun or adjective

which is used for plural nouns that is near to the speaker , or
“ these ” is used as the plural form of “this”.
‫“ يـْ اىاؿّي ّوـيـ اّيا ٍفت ػٍ چي ػ روغ امـوـًْْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليـږي چـي هتکـلن‬These”
.‫ ػ روؼي ىکل پَ صيج امتؼواليږي‬.“this” ‫ “ ػ‬these” ‫ اّيا‬،‫(عثـي کًّْکي) تَ ًږػي ّي‬
Ex: These are my friends. .‫ ػغَ(روغ) فها هلګـي ػي‬:‫هخال‬
 “Those»‫”ُغـَ«جوع‬: “Those” is a demonstrative pronoun or adjective

which is used for plural nouns that is far from the speaker , or
“Those” is used as the plural form of “that”.
‫“ يْ اىاؿّي ّويـ اّ يا ٍفت ػٍ چي ػ روؼي اموًْْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي لَ هتکلن‬Those”
.‫“ ػ روؼي ىکل پَ صيج امتؼواليږي‬that”‫“ ػ‬Those”‫ اّيا‬،‫(عثـي کًّْکي) څغَ لـي ّي‬
Ex: Those are the books. .‫ ُغَ(روغ) کتاتًَْ ػي‬:‫هخال‬
2) Indefinite Demonstrative pronouns: ًَّ‫ًاهعـيي اؽاسّي ضويش‬

Indefinite Demonstrative pronouns are those which point out to unknown
person and things.
.‫ًاهـؼيـي ّـوـيـًَّ ُـغـَ ػي چـي ًاهؼـيي اىـغاٍـْ اّ ىـيـاًـْ تَ اىـاؿٍ کـْي‬
Ex: We are Muslims. .ْ‫هْږ هـنـلوـاًاى ي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Everybody must have good morality. .‫ُـڅْک تايؼ ښَ اعالق ّلـي‬:‫هخال‬
Usage of (It)
"ًَْ‫( د اعتعوال "ځاي‬It) ‫د‬
 (It) is used for inanimate things. .‫( ػ تي راًَ ىياًْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬It)
Ex: It is a cap. .ٍ‫ ُغَ يٍْ پيالَ ػ‬:‫هخال‬

 (It) is used for animal when do not consider their gender.
.ْ‫( ػصيْاًاتْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي ُغَ ّعت چي ػُغْ ًْػيت پَ ًظـ کي ًَّ ًين‬It)
Ex: It is a dog. .ٍ‫ ُغَ يْ مپی ػ‬:‫هخال‬
28
 (It) can be used for the people in the photo.

.‫( کْالي ىي ػ اىغاٍْ لپاؿٍ پَ تَْيـ کي امتؼوال ىي‬It)
Ex: Who is this in the picture? ‫ پَ ػي تَْيـ کي څْک ػٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
It is Noor Ahmad. .ٍ‫ُغَ ًْؿاصوؼ ػ‬
 (It) can be used for small children.
.‫( کْالي ىي ػ کـْچٌي هاىْهاًْ لپاؿٍ امتؼوال ىی‬It)
Ex: It is a clever baby. .ٍ‫ ُغَ يْ ځيـک هاىْم ػ‬:‫هخال‬
 (It) also can be used for weather and time.

.‫( ُوؼاؿًګَ کْالي ىي ػ ُْا(هْمن) اّ ّعت لپاؿٍ امتؼوال ىي‬It)
Ex: It is winter.(weather). .)‫هْمن‬،‫(ُْا‬.ٍ‫ ژهي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: It is the four o‟ clock.(time). .)‫(ّعت‬.‫ څلْؿ تزي ػي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: It is rainy today.(weather). .)‫ (ُْا‬.ٍ‫ ًي ّؿځ تاؿاًي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
 (It) is used to give emphasis to a noun or pronoun.

.‫( ػ ًْم اّيا ّويـ تاًؼي تاکيؼ کْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬It)
Ex: It was you who fought with Khalid. .‫ ُغَ تَ ّي چي لَ عالؼ مـٍ ػي رٌګ ّکړ‬:‫هخال‬
Note: (It) and (you) are both subject and object pronoun , when they are
used before the verb ,they are subject pronouns and when they are
used after the verb they are objective pronouns.
)ًَّ‫ کلَ چي (ػغَ ّويـ‬، ‫( ػّاړٍ ُن فاػلي اُّن هفؼْلي ّويـًَّ ػي‬you) ّ‫( ا‬It) :‫ًْټ‬
َ‫لَ فؼل څغَ هغکي امتؼوال ىي فاػلي ّويـًَّ ػي اّ کلَ چي (ػغَ ّويـًَّ)لَ فؼل څغ‬
.‫ّؿّمتَ امتؼوال ىي هفؼْلي ّويـًَّ ػي‬
Ex: It works good. (Subject pronoun). .)‫(فاػلي ّويـ‬.‫ ُغَ ښَ کاؿ کْي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Hashmat give it yesterday me. (Object pronoun). .)‫ صيوت ُغَ تيـٍ ّؿځ هاتَ ؿاکړ(هفؼْلي ّويـ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: You can speak Pashto. (Subject pronoun).(. .)‫ تَ پَ پښتْ عثـي کْالي ىي( فاػلي ّويـ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I give some money to you.( Object pronoun). .)‫(هفؼْلي ّويـ‬.‫ ها تاتَ يٍْ اًؼافٍ پيني ػؿکړي‬:‫هخال‬
Possessive pronouns
ًَّ‫هــلـکـي ضــوـيـش‬
Possessive pronouns are those which are used instead of noun and show
possession or ownership.
.‫هلکي ّويـًَّ ُغَ ػي چي ػًْم پَ ځاي امتؼواليږي اّ هلکيت اّ هالکيت ښيي‬
29
 Possessive pronouns consists in: َ‫هلکي ضويشًَّ عثاست دي ل‬
Possessive pronoun ًَّ‫هلکــي ّــوــيـ‬

Mine ‫فهـا‬
Your ‫ ػ متامي‬، ‫ػ متا‬
His )‫ػُغَ(هؾکـ‬
Hers )‫ػُغي(هًْج‬
Ours ‫فهًْـږ‬
Theirs )‫ػ ُغْي (ػ ػّي‬
Ex: That house is mine. .ٍ‫ ُغَ کْؿ فها ػ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: This book is yours. .ٍ‫ ػغَ کتاب ػ متامي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Tense ًَ‫صها‬
Tense is a term used in Grammar to indicate the time of the action or
event.
.‫فهاًَ يْ اٍطالس ػٍ پَ ګـاهـ کي ػ ػول ّعت اّيا ّالؼي تَ اىاؿٍ کْي‬
Or: Tense is the form of the verb which shows the time of occurrence
of an action or state.
.‫ فهاًَ ػ فؼـل ُغَ ىکل ػٍ چي ػ يْ ػول ػ هغاهظ کيؼّ ّعت اّيا صالت ښکاؿٍ کْي‬:‫اّيا‬
 There are sixteen tenses in English language.

.‫پَ اًګليغي ژتَ کي ؽپاړط صهاًي هْجْدي دي‬
Note: The word (tense) is a proper noun which indicates to a particular

part of Grammar ,but (Time) is a common noun which is used in
genral.
‫ هګـ‬،‫( کلوَ يْ عاً امن ػٍ اّ ػ ګـاهـ پَ يْ هغًَْ تغو کي امتؼواليږي‬tense) ‫ ػ‬:‫ًْټ‬
.‫( يْ ػام امن ػٍ چي پَ ټْلْ کي امتؼواليږي‬Time) ‫ػ‬
 There are four basic tenses in English language:

:‫پَ اًګليغي ژتَ کي څلْس اعاعي صهاًي هْجْدي دي‬
Simple present tense ًَ‫ماػٍ صال فها‬
Simple past tense ًَ‫ماػٍ تيـٍ فها‬
Simple futer tense ًَ‫ماػٍ ؿاتلًّْکي فها‬
Simple Future tense in the past ‫ماػٍ ؿاتلًْکي فهاًَ پَ تيـٍ(هاّي) کي‬
30
 Tense according to their type are divided into three parts:

:‫فهاًي ػ ُغْي ػ ًْػي پَ ًظـ پَ ػؿي تـعْ ّييل ىْي ػي‬
Simple tenses ‫ماػٍ فهاًې‬
Prograssive tenses ‫راؿي فهاًې‬
Perfect tenses ‫کاهلي فهاًې‬
 In a tence we study three items that are:

:‫پَ يٍْ صهاًَ کي دسي تشخي پَ ًظش کی ًيْ کيږي‬
1. Structure )‫ماعتواى (فْؿهْل‬
2. Usage ‫امتؼوال‬
3. Diagram (Chart of displaying a tense) .)‫ػياګـام(ػ فهاًي ػ ًوايو چاؿت‬
 Structure )‫(عاختواى يا جْړښت‬
Structure is the formula of a tense ,that helps us to form the sentences

of a tense and there are four forms in structure.
َ‫چي لَ هْږ مـٍ ػ يْي فهاًي ػ رولْ پَ تيکليل کي هـمت‬، ٍ‫ماعتواى ػ يْي فهاًي فْؿهْل ػ‬
.‫کْي اّ ػيْي فهاًي ماعتواى پَ څلْؿّ ىکلْ مـٍ ّي‬
Structure of a tense ‫د يْي صهاًي عاختواى‬
Affirmative form ‫هخثت ىکل‬

Question form ‫مْالي ىکل‬
Negative form ‫هٌفي ىکل‬
Negative interrogative form ‫هٌفي مْالی ىکل‬
 Usage )ًَّ ٍ‫ کــاس‬، ‫(اعتعوال‬
“Usage” is the way which shows where and how to use a tense.
.ْ‫“ ُغَ ٓـيمَ ػٍ ښيي چي يٍْ فهاًَ چيـي اّ څٌګَ امتؼوالْالي ى‬Usage”
Some tenses have only one usage but some others have two or more than
two usages.
.‫ځيٌي فهاًي يْافي يْ امتؼوال لـي هګـ ځيٌي ًْؿي ػٍّ اّيا لَ ػّّ څغَ فيات کاؿٍ ًّي لـي‬
31
 “Usages” are divided into two parts: ‫”کاسٍ ًّي” پَ دّّ تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
1) Main usages. .)ًَّ ٍ‫اٍلي امتؼوال (کاؿ‬

2) Accessory usages. .)ًَّ ٍ‫فـػي امتؼوال(کاؿ‬
4. Diagram (Chart of displaying a tense) .)‫دياګشام(د صهاًي د ًوايؼ چاست‬
 Complement )‫(تکويل کًّْکي‬

Complement is a word or a group of words which completes the meaning
of a sentences after verb.
‫تکويل کًّْکي لَ ُغَ کلوي اّيا ګـّپ ػ کلوْ څغَ ػثاؿت ػٍ چي ػ فؼل څغَ ّؿّمتَ ػ رولي‬
.‫هؼٌي تکويلْي‬
Ex: Najeeb works in a bank. .‫ ًزية پَ يٍْ تاًک کي کاؿ کْي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I go to school every day. .‫ فٍ ُـٍ ّؿځ ښًّْځۍ تَ ځن‬:‫هخال‬
Note: Complement can be a noun , adjective , pronoun or a number.

.‫ّويـ اّيا يْ ػؼػ ّي‬، ‫ ٍفت‬، ‫ تکويل کًّْکي کيؼاي ىي يْ امن‬:‫ًْټ‬
Simple present tense

ًَ‫حال عادٍ صها‬
Helping verbs of simple present tense ًَْ‫د حال عادٍ صهاًي کْهکي فعل‬
Do /Does Do /Does
Structure: ‫عاختواى‬
Affirmative form Subject + V1 + Complement.
‫هثثت ؽکل‬
Ex: Bilal teaches English. .‫ تالل اًګليني تؼؿينْي‬:‫هخال‬
Question form Do/Does + Subject + V1 + Complement?
‫عْالي ؽکل‬
Ex: Does Bilal teach English? ‫ آيا تالل اًګليني تؼؿينْي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form Subject + Do/Does + Not + V1 + Complement.
‫هٌفي ؽکل‬
Ex: Bilal Does not teach English. .‫ تالل اًګليني ًَ تؼؿينْي‬:‫هخال‬
Do/Does +Subject + Not + V1 + Complement -?
Negative interrogative form Ex: Does Bilal not teach English ? ‫ آيا تالل اًګليني ًَ تؼؿينْي؟‬:‫هخال‬
‫هٌفي عْالي ؽکل‬ Don‟t/Doesn‟t + Subject + V1 + Complement -?
Ex: Doesn‟t Bilal teach English ? ‫ آيا تالل اًګليني ًَ تؼؿينْي؟‬:‫هخال‬
(V1) is first form of verb. .ٍ‫( د فعل لْهړًي(اصلي) حالت د‬V1)
32
1. Note : ‫ًْټ‬
 Subject: ‫فاعـل‬
The word which is is used at the beginning of the sentences is called
subject.
.‫ُغَ کلوَ چي ػ رولي پَ مـکي امتؼواليږي ػ فاػل پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Ex: Mohammad is a boy. .ٍ‫ هضوؼ يْ ُلک ػ‬:‫هخال‬
 It is mentionable that all the verbs exept of auxiliaries take (s) or

(es) in the third singular person (He ,she ,it) of the simple present
tense.
‫( کي‬He ,she ,it)ٌ‫ػ ياػًّي ّړ ػٍ چي ټْل فؼلًَْ تغيـ ػ کْهکي فؼلًْْ پَ ػؿين هفـػ ىغ‬
‫((الثتَ ػغَ ُؼايت يْافي پَ هخثتَ تياًيَ رولَ کي‬.‫( اعتياؿّي‬es) ‫( يا‬s) ‫پَ صال فهاًَ کي‬
.))‫هطـس ػٍ هګـ پَ مْالي اّ هٌفي کي ًَ هطـس کيږي‬
Ex: He speaks loud. .‫ ُغَ پَ لْړ اّاف عثـي کْي‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: She watches TV. .‫ ُغَ(هًْج) تلْيقّى ګْؿي‬:‫هخال‬
 Verbs ending in (s - ss - ch - sh - o - x - z) take (es) and verbs ending

in other letter take only (s).
‫( اعتياؿّي اّ ُغَ فؼلًَْ چي‬es) ‫( عتويږي‬s - ss - ch - sh - o - x - z) َ‫ُغَ فؼلًَْ چی پ‬
.‫( اعتياؿّي‬s) ‫پَ ًْؿّ تْؿّ عتويږي «پَ اعيـکي» يْافي‬
Ex: :‫هثال‬
Wash – Washes Go – Goes Mix – Mixes
Play – Plays Agree – Agrees Live – Lives
2. Note : ‫ًْټ‬
 When (es) is added , it is pronounced like an extra (iz) syllable.
.‫( پَ ىاى پَ يٍْ رال ُزا تاًؼي تلفع کيږي‬iz) ‫( اّافَ ىي ػ‬es) )‫کلَ چي (ػ فؼلًْْ پَ اعيـ کي‬
Ex: Fix – Fixes .
 Verbs ending in (y) following a consonant change (y) into (I) and
add (es).
‫( ػ تي غـږٍ تـْؿي پَ تؼـمـية ؿاغلي ّي (( ػ‬y) ّ‫( پَ(تْؿي) عتويږي ا‬y) ‫ُغَ فؼـلًَْ چي ػ‬
(es) ّ‫( تؼلـيږي ا‬I) َ‫( تـْؿي پ‬y) ‫( لَ تـْؿي هغتَ يْ تي غـږٍ تـْؿي ؿاغـلـي ّي)) ػ‬y) ‫ػ‬
.‫اّافَ کيږي‬
Ex: Study – Studies .
33
 Verbs ending in (y) following a vowel , add only (s).

(y) ‫( ػ غږ لـًّکي تْؿي پَ تؼمية ؿاغلي ّي(( ػ‬y) ّ‫( پَ (تْؿي) عتويږي ا‬y)‫ُغَ فؼلًَْ چي‬
.‫( (پَ اعيـکي) اّافَ کيږي‬s) ‫لَ تْؿي هغتَ يْ غږ لـًّکي تْؿي ؿاغلي ّي)) يْافي‬
Ex: Stay – Stays .
Usages of simple present tense

)‫د حال عادٍ صهاًي کاسٍ ًّي(اعتعواالت‬
1) Usage: Simple present tense is used to shows habitual actions ,habitual

action is an action which is done frequently or habitually.
َ‫ ػاػتي کاؿ ُغَ کاؿ ػٍ چي پ‬،‫ صال ماػٍ فهاًَ ػ ػاػتي کاؿًّْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۱
.‫کخـت اّ تکـاؿ يا پَ ػاػتي ډّل تـمـٍ کيږي‬
Diagram:
The adverb of frequency like (Always ,Often , Usually , Sometimes , seldom

, Rarely , Ever , Never), and also the other adverbs like (Every day , Every-
night , Every morning , Every week , Every month) and etc are used in this
usage in simple present tense.
)‫ پَ ًاػؿٍ تْګَ(ډيـليږ‬، ‫ ډيـ ليږ‬،‫ ځيٌي ّعت‬،ً‫ هؼوْال‬, ‫ اکخـاً ّعت‬،َ‫ػ تـکــاؿ ليـؼًَّ لکـَ ( ُويي‬
ٍ‫ ُـ‬، َ‫ ُـٍ ُفت‬، ‫ ُـمِاؿ‬، َ‫ ُـٍ ىپ‬، ‫ ُيڅکلَ اّ ُوؼاؿًګَ ًْؿليؼًَّ لکَ ( ُـٍ ّؿځ‬، َ‫ُـکل‬
.‫ اّ ًْؿ ػ صال ماػٍ فهاًي پَ ػي امتؼوال کي پکاؿ ّړل کيږي‬، )‫هياىت‬
Ex: I go to school at 7:00 AM every day. .‫ تزْ ښًّْځۍ تَ ځن‬۷:۱۱ َ‫ فٍ ُـ ّؿځ ػ مِاؿ پ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: She often washes the dishes. .‫ ُغَ(هًْج) اکخـاً ّعت کالي پـيوٌځي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Ahmad always gets up at 6:00 in morning. .‫ تزْ پْؿتَ کيږي‬۶:۱۱ َ‫ اصوؼ ُوييَ مِاؿ پ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: She never tells lie. .‫ ُغَ(هًْج) ُيڅکلَ ػؿّؽ ًَ ّايي‬:‫هخال‬
34
‫‪Always‬‬ ‫ُـويـيـَ‬
‫‪Often‬‬ ‫اکـخـاً ّعت‬
‫‪Usually‬‬ ‫هؼوْالً‬
‫‪Sometimes‬‬ ‫ځيٌي ّعت‬
‫‪Seldom‬‬ ‫ډيـ ليږ‬
‫‪Rarely‬‬ ‫پَ ًاػؿٍ تْګَ«ډيـکن»‬
‫‪Ever‬‬ ‫ُــکـلـَ‬
‫‪Never‬‬ ‫ُيـڅـکـلـَ‬
‫‪Every day‬‬ ‫ُــٍ ّؿځ‬
‫‪Every night‬‬ ‫ُــٍ ىپَ‬
‫‪Every morning‬‬ ‫ُــ مِاؿ‬
‫‪Every week‬‬ ‫ُــٍ ُـفـتَ‬
‫‪Every month‬‬ ‫ُــٍ هياىت‬
‫ًْټ‪ :‬کلَ چي پَ صال ماػٍ فهاًَ کي پَ (‪ )Usage 1‬کي ػ ّعت ليؼًَّ ػ تکـاؿي ليؼًّْ مـٍ ػ‬
‫ػ رولي پَ مـکي ؿاىي پَ صميمت کي ػ ػاػتي ػول پَ مـ تاکيؼ تـمـٍ کيږي ‪ ،‬هګـ کَ چيـي فاػل‬
‫ػ رولي پَ مـکی کي ؿاىي تاکيؼ تَ ػ رولي پَ فاػل تاًؼي ّي‪.‬‬
‫ُوؼاؿًګَ تايؼ ؽکـ کړّ چي کَ چيـي ػ )‪ (to be‬فؼلًَْ پَ رولَ کي هْرْػ ّي ًْ(تکـاؿي ليؼًَّ‬
‫‪ (frequency adverbs‬ػ )‪ (to be‬فؼلًْْ څغَ ّؿّمتَ ؿاځي تغيـ لَ ُغْ هؼوْالً لَ فاػل څغَ‬
‫ّؿّمتَ اّ لَ فؼل څغَ ػهغَ ؿاځي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I usually meet my friends.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ هؼوْالً لَ عپلْ هلګـّ مـٍ هاللات کْم‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: He is always at home.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ُ :‬غَ ُوييَ پَ کْؿ کي ّي‪.‬‬
‫‪2) Usage : Simple present tense shows general facts ; that is to say , it‬‬
‫‪shows that something was true in the past is true in the present and‬‬
‫‪will be true in the future.‬‬
‫‪ )۲‬اعتعـوـال‪ :‬صـال ماػٍ فهاًَ کـلي اّ ػـوْهـي صـمـيـمـتـًَْ تياًْي ؛ پَ تل ػثاؿت ُـغَ ىـي‬
‫چـي پَ هـاّي کي يي صميمت ػؿلْػ اّك ُن صمـيمـت لـي اّ پَ ؿاتلًْکي کي تَ هـوکي صمـيمـت‬
‫ّلـي‪.‬‬
‫‪Diagram:‬‬
‫‪Note: Genral fact is a fact which is clear for all.‬‬

‫ًْټ‪ :‬کلي صميمت ُغَ صميمت ػٍ چي ػ ټْلْ(ىياًْ) لپاؿٍ ّاّش اّ ښکاؿٍ ّي‪.‬‬
‫کلي حقـيـقتًَْ پَ دٍّ ډّلَ دي ‪ Genral facts are of two kinds:‬‬
‫تغيش خْړًّکي کلي حقـيقـتًَْ ‪a) Changeable genral facs.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I hve a lot of friends.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ ډيـ هلګـي لـم‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: My car is new.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فها هْټـ ًْي ػٍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ )۱‬پَ لْهړي هخال کي (فٍ ډيـ هلګـي لـم) عْ ػا هلګـي هوکي ػ ّعت پَ تيـيؼّ مـٍ کن ىي‪( .‬تغيـ عْؿي)‪.‬‬
‫‪ )۲‬پَ ػُّن هخال کي (فها هْټـ ًْي ػٍ) عْ ػا هْټـ ػ ّعت پَ تيـيؼّ مـٍ هوکي فّړ ىي‪ ( .‬تغيـعْؿي)‪.‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫تغيش ًَ خْړًّکي کلي حقيقتًَْ ‪b) Unchangeable genral facts.‬‬
‫‪Ex: The earth moves around the sun.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ځوکَ ػ لوـ پَ ىاّعْا ګـځي‪.‬‬
‫‪( is one.‬د) ‪Ex: Allah‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬هللا(د) يْ ػٍ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Ali is a man.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ػلي يْ مړي ػٍ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ )۱‬پَ لْهړي هخال کي(ځوکَ ػ لوـ پَ ىاّعْا ګــځي) يؼـٌي ػ ځوکي ګـځيؼل ػ لوـ پَ ىاّعْا تغـيـ ًيـي عْړالي‪.‬‬
‫(تغيـ ًَ عْؿي)‪.‬‬
‫(د)‬
‫يْالي ُيڅکلَ تغيـ ًيي عْړالي‪( .‬تغيـ ًَ عْؿي)‪.‬‬ ‫‪ )۲‬پَ ػُّن هخال کي (هللا(د) يْ ػٍ) يؼٌي ػ هللا‬
‫‪ )۳‬پَ ػؿين هخال کي (ػلي يْ مړي ػٍ) ًْ ػلي ُيڅکلَ تغيـ ًيي عْړالي يؼٌي ُوييَ تَ مړي ّي عْ ښځَ کيؼاي‬
‫ًيي‪ ( .‬تغيـ ًَ عْړًّکي ػٍ)‪.‬‬
‫‪3) Usage: Simple present tense is can be used for a planned future action‬‬
‫‪, and series of actions or a future event that is a part of a fixed‬‬
‫‪timetable or fixed program (scheduled future).‬‬
‫‪ )۳‬اعتعوال‪ :‬صال ماػٍ فهاًَ ػ(ًږػي) ؿاتلًْکي پالى ىْي ػول لپاؿٍ (چي صتوا ً ّالغ کيږي)‬
‫امتؼواليؼاي ىي ‪،‬اّ ُغَ اػوال يا صْاػث تياًْي چي پَ تـمـنـين اّلات اّ پـّګـام هطاتك ّالغ‬
‫‪Diagram:‬‬
‫‪Ex: The president visit Pakistan next Friday.‬‬

‫هخال‪ :‬ؿيل روِْؿ ؿاتلًّْکي روؼَ لَ پاکنتاى څغَ ليؼًَ کْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I go to Kandahar tomorrow.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ مثا کٌؼُاؿ تَ ځن‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Azat leave Kabul at 10:00 AM next Sunday.‬‬

‫هخال‪ :‬ػقت ؿاتلًّْکي يکيٌثَ ػ مِاؿ پَ ‪ ۱۱:۱۱‬تزْ کاتل پـيږػي‪.‬‬
‫‪4) Usage: Simple present tense is also used in the newspaper headlines‬‬
‫‪to show past , present and future actions or states.‬‬
‫‪ )۴‬اعتعوال‪ُ:‬وؼاؿًګَ صال ماػٍ فهاًَ ػ اعثاؿ پَ ػٌْاًْ کي امتؼواليږي تـڅْ ‪ ،‬تيـ‪ ،‬صال ‪،‬‬
‫اّ ؿاتلًّْکي ػولًَْ يا صالتًَْ تياى کړي‪.‬‬
‫‪a) When simple form of the verb is used in newspaper , shows a past‬‬
‫‪action or state.‬‬
‫کلَ چي ػ فؼل ماػٍ ىکل پَ اعثاؿ کي امتؼوال ىي‪ ،‬تيـ ػول يا صالت ښيي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: THE NATIONAL ARMY WITHDRAWS.‬‬

‫هخال‪ :‬ػ هلي اؿػّ لښکـ ػمة ًـيـيٌي کْي‪(.‬ػ هلي اؿػّ لښکـ ػـمة ًـييٌي ّکړٍ)‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: PEACE TALKS FAIL.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ػ مْلي عثـي ًاکاهَ کيږي‪ً (.‬اکاهَ ىْي)‪.‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
b) When (Verb + ing) is used , shows a present action.

.‫( مـٍ امتؼوال ىي يْ صاّـ ػول(کاؿ) ښيی‬ing ) ‫کلَ چي فؼل ػ‬
Ex: THE PEOPLE ELECTING THE PRESIDENT.

.)‫ (صاّـ ّعت‬.‫ عـلک ؿيـل رـوِـْؿ اًـتغـاتـْي‬:‫هخال‬
c) When (To + verb) infinitive is used , shows a future action or state.

.‫ ( هَؼؿ پَ ىکل امتؼوال ىي ؿاتلًْکي ػول يا صالت ښيي‬To +verb) ‫کلَ چي ػ‬
Ex: THE MINISTER TO RESIGN FROM HIS POST.

.)‫ (ّفيـ تَ لَ عپلَ پْمتَ امتؼفاء ّکړي‬.‫ ّفيـ لَ عپلَ پْمتَ څغَ امتؼفاء کْی‬:‫هخال‬
5) Usage : Simple present tense is also used to introduce a quotation ,

narration and a historical event in the past time.
‫ ػامـتاى اّ يْي تاؿيغي‬، ‫ ُـوؼاؿًګَ صال ماػٍ فهاًَ پَ تـيـ ّعت کي ػ لْل‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۵
.‫پـيـښي ػ هؼـفي کْلْ اّ تياًْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬
Diagram:
Ex: Hazrat Ali )ُ‫ (ؿ‬says: ” One who teaches me a word , is my master”.
.ٍ‫ فها امتاػ ػ‬، ٍ‫ چاچي هاتَ يٍْ کلوَ ؿا فػٍ کړ‬:‫ صْـت ػلي (ؿُ) ّّيل‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: At this time Ahmad Shah Ba Ba leads his troops over Kandahar.
.‫ پَ ػي ّعت کي اصوؼىاٍ تاتا عپلي لْاّي ػ کٌؼُاؿ لَ لْي ؿُثـي کْي‬:‫هخال‬
6) Usage:Simple present tense is also used in the exclamatory sentences

beginning with (here) and ( there).
َ‫ ُوؼاؿًګَ صال ماػٍ فهاًَ پَ ُغَ ًؼايي رولْ کي امتؼواليږي چي پ‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۶
.‫( مـٍ ىـّع کيږي‬here( ّ‫ ) ا‬there)
Ex: Here comes Massod! !‫ هنؼْػ ػلتَ ؿاځي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: There stops the bus! !‫ ُلتَ تل هْټـػؿيږي‬:‫هخال‬
7) Usage: Simple present tense is used to show nature of something.

.‫ صال ماػٍ فهاى ػ ىي ػ ٓثؼيت ښْػلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۷
Ex: The lion eats raw meat. .‫ فهـي عاهَ غْښَ عْؿي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The snake bites. .‫ هاؿ چيـچـل کْي‬:‫هخال‬
37
8) Usage: Simple present tense is used to show natural law.

.‫ صال ماػٍ فهاًَ ػ ٓثؼي لاًْى ښْػلْ لپاؿٍ پکاؿ ّړل کيږي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۸
Ex: The sun rises from the east. .‫ لوـ لَ عتيځ څغَ ؿاعيژي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Stars shine at night. .‫ متْؿي پَ ىپَ کي ځليږي‬:‫هخال‬
Present continuous tense

(Present progressive tense)
َ‫حـال جـاسي صهـاًـ‬

)ًَ‫(حال اعتوشاسي صها‬
Helping verbs of peresent continuous tense ًَْ‫ػ صال راؿي فهاًي کْهکي فؼل‬
Is / Am /Are Is / Am /Are
Structure )‫(عاختواى‬
Affirmative form Subject + H.V + V1 - ing + Complement.
Ex: He is playing football. .ٍ‫ ُغَ ػ فْټثال ػ لْتي پَ صال کي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Question form H.V + Subject + V1 - ing + Complement?
Ex: Is He playing football? ‫آيا ُغَ ػفْټثال ػلْتي پَ صال کي ػٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form Subject + H.V + Not + V1 - ing + Complement.
‫هٌف ي ؽکل‬
Ex: He is not playing football. .ٍ‫ُغَ ػ فْټثال ػلْتي پَ صال کي ًَ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
H.V +Subject + Not + V1 - ing + Complement -?
Negative interrogative form Ex: Is He not playing football ? ‫آيا ُغَ ػفْټثال ػلْتي پَ صال کي ًؼٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
‫هٌفي عْالي ؽکل‬ H.V+‟nt + Subject + V1 - ing + Complement -?
Ex: Isn‟t He playing football ? ‫ آيا ُغَ ػ فْټثال ػلْتي پَ صال کي ًؼٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Diagram:
Spelling Rules
‫اهاليي قاعذي‬
 Rules of adding (ing) suffix at the end of verbs.
.‫( هختاړي اضافَ کْلْ قاعذي‬ing) ‫د فعلًْْ پَ اخيش کي د‬
1. Verbs enging in (ee) take (ing) without any change.

.‫( تي لَ کْم تغيـ څغَ اعلي‬ing) ‫( عتن ىْي ّي‬ee) َ‫ُغَ فؼلًَْ چي پ‬
Ex: Agree – Agreeing.

Ex: Flee – Fleeing.
38
2. Verbs ending in a single (e), drap last (e) and than add (ing).
.ّْ‫( اّافَ ک‬ing) َ‫( صـؾفــْ اّ ّؿّمت‬e) ٍ‫اعيـ‬، ‫( عتن ىْي ّي‬e) ٌَ‫ُغَ فؼلًَْ چي پَ ماک‬
Ex: Take – Taking.

Ex: Write – Writing.
 Except of these verbs: ًْْ‫پَ اعـتـثـٌا د دغَ فعـل‬

 Age – Ageing .
 Singe – Singeing.
 Dye – Dyeing.
3. Verbs ending in (ie), change (ie) into (y) than add (ing).
.‫( اّافَ کيږي‬ing) َ‫( تثؼليږي ّؿّمت‬y) َ‫( پ‬ie) ، ‫( عتويږي‬ie) َ‫ُغَ فؼلًَْ چي پ‬
Ex: Die – Dying.
Ex: Tie – Tying.
4. When a verb of one syllable has one vowel and end in single
consonant, the last consonant is doubled befor adding (ing).
(( ‫کلَ چـي يْ ُـزايي فؼـل يـْ غـږ لــًّکي تـْؿي ّلــي اّ پَ يـْ تـي غــږٍ تـْؿي عتـن ىـي‬
ٍ‫( لَ اّافَ کْلْ اعيـي تي غږ‬ing) ‫غږ لـًّکي تْؿي ػ تي غږٍ تْؿي هغکي ؿاغلي ّي)) ػ‬
.‫تْؿي ػٍّ چٌؼٍ کيږي‬
Ex: Stop – Stopping.

Ex: Run – Running.
Ex: Hit – Hitting.
5. Verbs of two syllables or more than two if last syllable contains one
vowel and end in a consonant , if the stress falls on the last syllable ,
the last consonant is doubled befor adding (ing).
‫ کَ چيـي پَ اعيـي ُزاء کي يْ غږ لـًّکي تْؿي ىاهل‬، ‫ُغَ فؼلًَْ چي ػٍّ ُزايي يا فيات ّي‬
،‫ّي ((ػ تي غږٍ تْؿي ػ هغَ يْ غږ لـًّکي تْؿي هْرْػ ّي)) اّ فياؿ پَ اعيـي ُزاٍ تاًؼي ّي‬
‫( ّؿ‬ing) َ‫( لَ اّافَ کْلْ څغَ هغکي ػٍّ چٌؼٍ کّْ؛(( اّ ّؿّمت‬ing) ‫اعيـي تي غږٍ(تْؿي) ػ‬
.))ّْ‫اّافَ ک‬
Ex: Admit – Admitting.
Ex: Prefer – Preferring.
Ex: Begin – Beginning.
39
6. Verbs ending in (C), an extra (K) is added befor adding (ing).

.‫( اّافَ کيږي‬K) ٍْ‫( لَ اّافَ کْلْ هغکي ي‬ing) ‫( تاًؼي عتويږي ػ‬C) َ‫ُغَ فؼلًَْ چي پ‬
.))ٍ‫( ػعپل غږ ػ ماتلْ پَ غـُ ػ‬C) ‫(( ػغَ ُؼايت يْافي ػ‬
Ex: Picnic – Picnicking.
Ex: Traffic – Trafficking.
7. Verbs ending (Y) following a consonant or vowel take (ing) without

any change.
‫( تاًؼي عتويږي کَ ػ تي غږٍ اّيا غږ لـًّکي تْؿي پَ تؼمية ؿاغلي ّي‬Y) َ‫ُغَ فؼلًَْ چي پ‬
َ‫( څغَ تي غږٍ اّيا غږ لـًّکي تْؿي ؿاغـلي ّي)) تي لَ کْم تغـيـ څغ‬Y) َ‫(( کَ هغکي ل‬،
.‫( اعتياؿّي‬ing)
Ex: Study – Studying.
Ex: Play – Playing.
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
In British System the final (L) is always doubled and than add (ing).
.‫( اّافَ کيږي‬ing) َ‫( ُوييَ ػٍّ چٌؼٍ کيږي اّ ّؿّمت‬L) ‫پَ تـيتاًْي مـيـنټن کي اعيـي‬
Ex: Travel – Travelling.

Ex: Signal – Signalling.
Ex: Feel – Feelling.
Usages )‫(کاسٍ ًّي‬

1) Usage: Present continuous tense is used to express an activity that
is happening at the moment of speaking.
‫ صال راؿي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ فؼاليت ػ تياًْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي ػ عثـّ پَ صالت‬:‫) اعتعـوال‬۱
.‫کي ّالغ کيږي‬
Or: Present continuous tense shows the duration of an action which is in
progress at the moment of speaking.
.‫ صال راؿي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول هْػٍ ښيي ػ عثـّ پَ صالت کي رـياى لـي‬:‫اّيا‬
Diagram:
40
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
When present continuous tense is used in this way, it is usually follo-
wed by adverb of time, such as (now , right now, at the moment, at
present)… etc.`
‫ُوؼا اّك‬، ‫ هؼوْالً ػ ّعت لَ ليؼًّْ لکَ (اّك‬،‫کلَ چي صال راؿي فهاًَ پَ ػي ٓـيمَ امتؼواليږي‬
.‫اًّْؿّ مـٍ يْځاي کيږي‬...)‫ پَ ػي صاّـ ّعت کي‬،‫ پَ ػي لضَْ کي‬،
now ‫اّك‬
right now ‫ُوؼا اّك‬
at the moment ‫پَ ػي لضَْ کي‬
at present ‫پَ ػي صاّـ ّعت کي‬
Ex: I am working right now. .‫ فٍ ُوؼا اّك پَ کاؿکْلْ هيغْل ين‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Nazeer is watching T.V at present. .ٍ‫ ًؾيـ پَ ػي صاّـ ّعت کي ػ تلْيقّى پَ ليؼلْ لګيا ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Samiullah is studing now. .ٍ‫ مويغ هللا اّك پَ هطالؼَ کْلْ هيغـْل ػ‬:‫هخال‬
2) Usage : The present continuous tense is also used to show the duration
of an action which is apparently going on ,but not necessarily at the
moment of speaking.
‫ ُـوؼاؿًګَ صال راؿي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػـول ښْػلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼوالـيږي چي ظاُـاً ػ‬:‫) اعـتعوال‬۲
.)‫( ػ عثـّ پَ هْلغ کي رـياى ًّلـي‬.‫هګـ ًَ ػ عثـّ پَ هْلغ کي‬،‫مـتَ ؿميؼّ پَ صالت کي ّي‬
Ex: Omer is working in a company. .‫ ػوـ پَ يٍْ کوپٌۍ کي کاؿ کْي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Amran is teaching Pashto at school. .‫ ػوـاى پَ ښًّْځۍ کي پښتْ تؼؿينْي‬:‫هخال‬
2) Usage: The present continuous tense is used for the action that has
already been arranged and to take place in the future.
َ‫ صال راؿي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي هغکي تـتية ىْي ّي اّپ‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۳
.‫ؿاتلًّْکي ّالغ ىي‬
Diagram:
Ex: Abrahim is coming here tomorrow. .‫ اتـاُين مثا ػلتَ ؿاځي‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: He is leaving Kandahar next week. .‫ ُغَ تَ ؿاتلًّْکي کٌؼُاؿ تـک کړي‬:‫هخال‬
 Note:‫ًْټ‬
In this way the adverbs of future tense like: Tomorrow, To night , and etc
are used.
‫( اًّْؿ‬To night) َ‫ ًي ىپ‬،( Tomorrow(‫ مثا‬:َ‫پَ ػغَ ٓـيمَ تايؼ ػ ؿاتلًّْکي فهاًي ليؼًَّ لک‬
.‫امتؼوال ىي‬
41
Ex: I am going to Mazar to night. .‫ فٍ ًي ىپَ هقاؿ تَ ځن‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: My brother is arriving tomorrow. .‫ فها ّؿّؿ مثا ؿاميږي‬:‫هخال‬
3) Usage: Present continuous tense is used with (always) to show a
frequently action , usually when the repetition annoys the speaker
or seems unreasonable.
ٍ‫( لَ ليؼ مـٍ ػ تکـاؿي ػول لپاؿٍ چي ػ ّيًّْکي لپاؿ‬always) ‫ صال راؿي فهاًَ ػ‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۴
.‫ًاؿاصت کًّْکي اّ غيـ هؼـمـْل ّي امتؼواليږی‬
Diagram:
Ex: You are always coming late. .‫ تامي ُوييَ ًاّعتَ ؿاځي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He is always fighting at this time. .‫ ُغَ ُوييَ پَ ػغَ ّعت کي رٌګ کْي‬:‫هخال‬
4) Usage: The present continuous tense can be used for an action which
appears to be continuous.
.‫ صال راؿي فهاًَ کْالي ىي ػ راؿي ػول ػ ښکاؿٍ کْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼوال ىي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۵
Ex: Shabeer is always laughing. .‫ ىثيـ ُوييَ عاًؼي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: They are always working. .‫ ُغْي ُوييَ کاؿ کْي‬:‫هخال‬
 Note: ‫ًْټ‬
The present continuous tense is not used with out of control verbs.
These verbs are used in the simple present tense, followed by adverbs
of present continuous tense.
.‫صال راؿي فهاًَ لَ غيـ اؿاػي فؼلًْْ مـٍ ًيي امتؼواليؼاي‬
.‫ ػ صال راؿي فهاًي لَ ليؼًّْ مـٍ يْځاي کيږي‬،‫ػغَ فؼلًَْ پَ ماػٍ صال فهاًَ کي امتؼواليږي‬
Some of the out of control verbs ًَْ‫ځيٌي غيـ اؿاػي فؼـل‬
Know ‫ پُْيؼل‬، ‫پيژًؼل‬ Cost ‫اؿفه لـل‬
Understand ‫پُْيؼل‬ Become ‫ ّالغ کيؼل‬، ‫کيؼل‬
Believe ‫تاّؿلـل‬ Think ‫فکـ کْل‬
Feel ‫اصناك کْل‬ Have ‫لـل‬
Forget ‫ُيـّل‬ Has ‫لـل‬
See ‫ليؼل‬ Love ‫هيٌَ لـل‬
Hear ‫اّؿيؼل‬ Like ‫عْښيؼل‬
Smell ‫تْيْل‬ Wish ‫ غْښتل‬، ‫اؿفّ لـل‬
Appear ‫ ظاُـيؼل‬، ‫ښکاؿٍ کيؼل‬ Are
Seem ‫ ظاُـيؼل‬، ‫پَ ًظـ ؿاتلل‬ Was
Want ‫غْښتل‬ Were
Ex: ‫هخال‬
 I am smelling a flower now .(incorrect ٔ‫)غل‬.
 I smell a flower now. (correct ‫)ٍضيش‬.
42
In some cases most of the out of control verbs are commonly used as
progressive verbs with difference in meaning.
‫پَ ځيٌي هْاؿػّ کي اکخـيت غيـ اؿاػي فؼـلًَْ ػوْها ً ػ هؼٌي پَ تغيـ مـٍ ػ راؿي فؼلًْْ پَ صيج‬
.))‫(( اؿاػي رٌثَ ځاًتَ غْؿٍ کْي‬.‫امتؼواليږی‬
Ex: I am thinking about this question. .‫ فٍ ػ ػغَ مْال پَ تاؿٍ کي فکـ کْم‬:‫هخال‬
Distributive pronouns
َ‫تـْصيـعـي ضـوـيشًّـ‬
Distributive pronouns are used in the place of noun and indicate each
person of a number of group.
)‫ فـػ‬،‫تْفيؼي ّويـًَّ ُغَ ػي چي ػ ًْم پَ ځاي امتؼواليږي اّ ػ يْ ګـّپ پَ ُـ ىغٌ (پَ فـػ‬
.‫تاًؼي ػاللت کْي‬
 Distributive pronouns consist in: َ‫تْصيعي ضويشًَّ عثاست دي ل‬

Every )ْ‫(ُـي‬, Either )ٍ‫ (ػّاړ‬Neither )ْ‫ (ُيڅ ي‬Each)ْ‫ُـي‬، ‫ (ُـ‬,None)ْ‫ُيڅ ي‬، ‫(ُيڅ‬
Both)ٍ‫ (ػّاړ‬, Any)‫ ُـ‬، ‫ُيڅ‬، ‫(کْم‬.
Ex: Each of you is present. .ٍ‫ ُـيْ لَ تامْ څغَ صاّـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Neither of us is lazy. .ٍ‫ ُيڅ يْ لَ هْږ څغَ ټٌثل ًَ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Both must come on time. .‫ ػّاړٍ تايؼ پَ ّعت ؿاىي‬:‫هخال‬
Indefinite pronouns
ًَّ‫ًاهـعـيي ضـوـيش‬
Indefinite pronouns are used instead of noun and denote some unknown
person , place or thing.
.‫هکاى يا ىي تاًؼي ػاللت کْي‬، ٌ‫ًاهؼيي ّويـًَّ ػ امــن پَ ځاي امتؼواليږي اّپَ ًاهؼيي ىغ‬
43
‫ًاهعيي ضويشًَّ عثاست دي لَ‪ The Indefinite pronoun are consist in:‬‬
‫‪Indefinite pronouns‬‬ ‫ًاهعيي ضويشًَّ‬
‫‪One‬‬ ‫يْ‪ ،‬ىغٌ‬

‫‪Few‬‬ ‫څْ ‪،‬ليږ‬
‫‪No‬‬ ‫ُيڅ ‪ًَ ،‬‬
‫‪All‬‬ ‫ټْل‬
‫‪None‬‬ ‫ُيڅکلَ‪ُ ،‬يڅ ‪ً،‬ا‬
‫‪Somebody‬‬ ‫يْىغٌ ‪،‬کْم ىغٌ ‪،‬کْم کل‬
‫‪Some one‬‬ ‫يْ ىغٌ‪،‬کْم يْ‪ُ ،‬غَ يْ‬
‫‪No one‬‬ ‫ُيڅ يْ‪ُ ،‬يڅْک‬
‫‪Any body‬‬ ‫ُـىغٌ‪ ،‬کْم ىغٌ‪ُ،‬ـڅْک‬
‫‪No body‬‬ ‫ُيـڅـْک ‪ُ ،‬يـڅ ىـغـٌ‬
‫‪Some thing‬‬ ‫څَ ىـي ‪،‬کْم ىـي ‪،‬ىـي‬
‫‪Any thing‬‬ ‫ُـىي‪ ،‬کْم ىي‬
‫‪No thing‬‬ ‫ُيڅ ىي‪ ،‬تي اؿفښتَ‬
‫‪Every one‬‬ ‫ُـيْ‬
‫‪Every body‬‬ ‫ُــىـغـٌ‪ُ ،‬ــ مـړي ‪ُ،‬ـتـي‬
‫‪Every thing‬‬ ‫ُــىـي‬
‫‪Some‬‬ ‫يْ تؼـؼاػ ‪ ،‬يـْڅـْ ‪ ،‬لـږ ‪ ،‬يٍْ اًؼافٍ‬
‫‪Any one‬‬ ‫ُـــيــْ‪ُ ،‬ــڅـْک ‪ ،‬کـْم يــْ‬
‫‪Any where‬‬ ‫ُــځاي ‪ ،‬کْم ځاي ‪ُ،‬ــچيـتَ‬
‫‪No where‬‬ ‫ُيچــتَ ‪ُ ،‬يـڅ ځاي‬
‫‪Every where‬‬ ‫ُــچـيـتَ ‪ُ ،‬ــځاي‬
‫‪Some where‬‬ ‫ُــځاي ‪،‬کـْم ځـاي‬
‫‪Others‬‬ ‫ًْؿ‬
‫‪Any‬‬ ‫ُـ‪،‬کْم‪ ،‬ځيٌي ‪ ،‬يْ تؼؼاػ‬
‫‪Many‬‬ ‫ډيـ ‪ ،‬فيات‬
‫‪Much‬‬ ‫ډيـ ‪ ،‬فيات‬
‫‪Ex: I bought some thing.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ُ :‬ا څَ ىي ّاعينتل‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Did you see any body.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬آيا تَ کْم ىغٌ ّليؼ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: He told my every thing.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ُ :‬غَ هاتَ ُـىي ّّيل‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Any body can not speak English.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ُ :‬ـڅْک پَ اًګليني عثـي ًَ ىي کْالي‪.‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
 “Many”‫ډيش‬: “Many” usually used with plural countable nouns in

positive statements , negative statements and in question sentences.
‫ هٌفي تياًيَ اّپَ مْاليَ رولْ کي‬، َ‫“ هؼوْالً لَ ىويـًّکي اموًْْ مـٍ پَ هخثتَ تياًي‬Many”
Ex: I have many friends. .‫ فٍ ډيـ هلګـي لـم‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: I have not many brothers. .‫ فٍ ډيـ ّؿّڼَ ًَ لـم‬:‫هخال‬
 “ Much‫” ډيش‬: “Much” is usually used with uncountable nouns in neg-

tive statement and in question sentences , but rarely used in positive
statement sentences.
،‫” هؼوْالً لَ غيـ ىويـًّکي اموًْْ مـٍ پَ هٌفي تياًي اّ مْالي رولْ کي امتؼواليږي‬Much”
.‫هګـ پَ کن ډّل پَ هخثتْ رولْ کي امتؼواليږی‬
Ex: He doesn‟t eat much rice. .‫ ُغَ ډيـي ّؿيځي ًَ عْؿي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Do you have much money? ‫ آيا تَ ډيـي پيني لـي؟‬:‫هخال‬
 “Some”: “Some” is used as follow:

:‫“ پَ الًذي ډّل اعتعواليږي‬Some”
 “Some” is usually used in affirmative sentences.

.‫“ هؼوْالً پَ هخثتْ رولْ کي امتؼواليږي‬Some”
Ex: Mustafa bought some cars last week. .‫ هَطفي تيـٍ اًّۍ يْ څْ هْټـاى ّاعينتل‬:‫هخال‬
 “Some” is used for request in interrogative sentences.

.‫“ پَ مْالي رولْ کي ػ غْښتٌي (ػؿعْامت) لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Some”
Ex: Do you have some coffee? ‫ آيا تَ ليږ لٍِْ لـي؟‬:‫هخال‬
 “Some” is used with countable and plural nouns.

.‫“ ػ ىويـًّکي اّ روؼي اموًْْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږی‬Some”
Ex: Asmatullah have some books. .‫ ػَوت هللا يْ څْ کتاتًَْ لـي‬:‫هخال‬
 “Some” is also used with uncountable and singular nouns.

.‫“ ُوؼاؿًګَ لَ غيـىويـًّکْ اّ هفـػ اموًْْ مـٍ امتؼواليږي‬Some”
Ex: Alam Khan have some food. .‫ ػلن عاى يٍْ اًؼافٍ غؾا لـي‬:‫هخال‬
45
 “Any” is used as follow: :‫”پَ الًذي ډّل اعتعواليږي‬Any”
 “Any” is usually used in negative sentences.

.‫“ هؼوْالً پَ هٌفي رولْ کي امتؼواليږی‬Any”
Ex: Arfan didn‟t buy any thing. .‫ ػـفاى کْم ىي ّاًَ عينتل‬:‫هخال‬
‫ۍ‬
 “Any” is used in interrogative sentences.

.‫“ پَ مْالي رولْ کي امتؼواليږی‬Any”
Ex: Did you see any one here? ‫ آيا تا ػلتَ کْم کل ّليؼ؟‬:‫هخال‬
 “Any” is used When the idea of the sentence is negative.

.‫“ امتؼواليږي‬Any”‫کلَ چي پَ رولَ کي هٌفی ًظـ ّی‬
Ex: Abdul Bari have not any mobile. .‫ ػثؼالثاؿي ُيڅ هثايل ًلـي‬:‫هخال‬
Note: “Reciprocal pronouns” are used instead of nouns and talk

about a mutual relationship.
.‫ ”هتقاتل ضويشًَّ“ ػ امن پَ ځاي امتؼواليږي اّ هتماتل ؿّاتٔ تياًْي‬:‫ًْټ‬
Like:
Each other ٍ‫ يْلَ تل مـ‬،ٍ‫ يْتل مـ‬، ‫يْ تل‬
One another ٍ‫ يْلَ تل مـ‬،ٍ‫ يْ تل مـ‬، ‫يْلَ تل‬
 “Each other” : is used to talk about two persons.

.‫ ػ ػّّ اىغاٍْ پَ تاؿٍ کي عثـي کْلْ(تضج کْلْ) لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬:“Each other”
Ex: The boys hit each other. .‫ ُلکاى يْ تل مـٍ ُّي‬:‫هخال‬
 “One another”: is used to talk about more than two persons or thing.
.‫ ػ ػّّ څغَ ػ فياتْ اىغاٍْ پَ تاؿٍ ػعثـي کْلْ(تضج کْلْ) لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬: “One another”
Ex: All Muslims love with one another. .‫ ټْل هنلواًاى يْلَ تل مـٍ هيٌَ لـي‬:‫هخال‬
46
Interrogative Pronouns
ًَّ‫پْښتًْکي(اعتفِاهي) ضويش‬
Interrogative Pronouns are those which are used instead of noun and
ask a question.
.‫امتفِاهي ّويـًَّ ُغَ ػي چي ػ امن پَ ځاي امتؼواليږي اّ مْال پْښتي‬
Interrogative Pronouns )ًَّ‫پْښتًْکي(امتفِاهي ّويـ‬

Who ‫ چا‬، ‫څْک‬
Whose ‫ ػچا هال‬، ‫ػ چا‬
Which ْ‫ کْم ي‬، ‫کْم‬
What ‫ څَ ىي‬، َ‫څ‬
Whom َ‫چات‬، ‫ څْک چي‬، ‫چاتَ چي‬
 “Who”‫څْک‬:
“Who” is used when we ask about person or persons.
.ّْ‫“ُغَ ّعت امتؼواليږي کلَ چي هْږ ػ ػ ىغٌ يا اىغاٍْ پَ تاؿٍ کي پْښتٌَ ک‬Who”
Or: “Who” is used only for people in subject and object case.
.‫“ فمٔ ػ اىغاٍْ( علکْ) لپاؿٍ پَ فاػلي اّ هفؼْلي صالت کي امتؼواليږي‬Who” :‫اّيا‬
Ex: Who is this? ‫ ػغَ څْک ػٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Who did you see? (Object case) .)‫ تا څْک ّليؼ؟ (هفؼْلي صالت‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Who is knocking the door? (Subject case) .)‫ څْک ػؿّافٍ ټکْي؟(فاػلي صالت‬:‫هخال‬
 “Whose”‫د چا‬ :
“Whose” is used in possessive case of subject and object.

.‫“ػ فاػل اّ هفؼْل پَ هلکي صالت کي امتؼواليږي‬Whose”
Or: “Whose” is used to ask about possession.
.‫“ ػ هلکيت پَ تاؿٍ کي ػ پْښتٌَ کْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Whose” :‫اّيا‬
Ex: Whose computer is this? (Subject). .)‫ ػغَ کوپيْټـ ػچا ػٍ؟(فاػل‬:‫هخال‬
It‟s Muhammad. .ٍ‫ُغَ ػ هضوؼ ػ‬
Ex: Whose car did you take? (Object). .)‫ تا ػچا هْټـ اعينتي ػٍ؟ (هفؼْل‬:‫هخال‬
Niamat‟s. .‫ػ ًؼوت‬
47
 “Which”ْ‫ کْم ي‬، ‫ کْم‬:
“Which” is used for person or thing , It implies selection.

ٌ‫(ػيْىي يا ىغ‬.‫اّپَ اًتغاب تاًؼی ػاللت کْي‬، ‫“ ػ ىغٌ اّ ىي لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Which”
.)‫پَ اًتغاب تاًؼي ػاللت کْي‬
Ex: Which class are you in? ‫ تامي پَ کْم ټْلګۍ کي يامت؟‬:‫هخال‬
I am in 12th class. .‫فٍ پَ ػّلنن ټْلګۍ کي ين‬
Ex: Which is your friend ? ‫ کْم يْ متامي هلګـي ػٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Sifat is my friend. .ٍ‫ٍفت فها هلګـي ػ‬
 “What” ‫څَ ؽي‬، َ‫ ”څ‬:
“What” is used for things in general sense.

.‫“ پَ ػوْهي هفِْم ػ ىياًْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬What”
Ex: What is this? ‫ ػغَ څَ ىي ػٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬

It is a book. .ٍ‫ُغَ يْ کتاب ػ‬
Ex: What your tribe name? ‫متامي ػ لثيلي ًْم څَ ىي ػٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
My tribe name is Pashton. .ٍ‫فها ػلثيلي ًْم پښتْى ػ‬
Article
)‫(د تعشيف تْسي‬
Article is a word which is used with a noun or adjective to define or
determine them.
‫ػ تؼـيف تْؿي ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي لَ امن اّيا ٍفت مـٍ (لَ امن هغتَ) امتؼواليږي اّ ُغْي تؼـيفْي‬
.‫يا هيغَْي‬
 The articles is actually Demonstrative Adjective.

.‫د تعشيف تْسي پَ حقيقت اؽاسّي صفتًَْ دي‬
 The articles are divided into two parts:

:‫د تعـشيف تْسي پَ دّّ ډّلًْْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
1. Definite article. ‫هؼيي ػ تؼـيف تْؿی‬

2. Indefinite article . ‫غيـ هؼيي ػ تؼـيف تْؿی‬
48
1. Definite article ‫هعيي د تعشيف تْسی‬

An article which is used to refer to a particular person or thing is
known as the definit article.
.‫ػ تؼـيف ُغَ تْؿی ػٍ چي ػ هيغٌ ىغٌ اّيا ىي ػ هؼيي کْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬
 There is only one definite article in English language which is (The).

.ٍ‫( څغَ ػثاؿت ػ‬The) ‫پَ اًګليني ژتَ کي يْافي ػ تؼـيف يْ هؼيي تْؿی ػٍ چي‬
 “The” is called the definite article , because it points out some particular
person or thing.
.‫ ځکَ چي هيغٌ ىغٌ يا ىي تَ اىاؿٍ کْي‬،ٍ‫“ ػ تؼـيف هؼيي تْؿي ػ‬The”
 The definite article (The) is used in the following ways:

:‫( د تعشيف هعيي تْسي پَ الًذي طشيقْ اعتعواليږي‬The) ‫د‬
1) Is used befor untique things in nature in their kind.

.‫ػ تي هخالَ ىياًْ هغتَ چي پَ ٓثؼيت کي (اّ) پَ عپلَ ًْع کي (تي هخالَ) ّي امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: The sun. .‫ لوـ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: The earth. .َ‫ ځوک‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The sky. .‫ امواى‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The moon. .‫ مپْږهۍ‬:‫هخال‬
2) Is used befor common nouns in order to be determined.

.‫ػ ػاهْ اموًْْ هغکي ػ ُغْ ػ هيغَْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: The man. .‫ مړي‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: The boy. .‫ ُلک‬:‫هخال‬
Ex:The car. .‫ هْټـ‬:‫هخال‬
3) Is used befor ordinal numbers.

.‫ػ ٍّفي(ؿتثَ يي) اػؼاػّ هغکي امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: The first. .‫ لْهړي‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: The second. .‫ ػُّن‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The 10th. .‫ لــنـن‬:‫هخال‬
49
4) Is used before the superlative form of adjective.

.‫ػ ٍفت ػػالي ىکل(ػالي ػؿري) هغکي امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: The cleverest. .‫ ځيـک تـيي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The tallest. .)‫ ػاؿفتـيي (لْړتـيي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The most beautiful. .‫ ډيـ فيات ښکلي‬:‫هخال‬
5) Is used befor double comparative form of an adjective.

.‫ػ ٍفت ػ ػٍّ ګْى هماينْي ىکل(ػٍّ ګْى هماينْي ػؿري) هغکي امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: The more iron is beaten , the stronger it becomes.

.)‫( ټيٌګيـيږي‬.‫ لْي تـٍ ګـځي‬، ‫ اّمپٌَ چي فياتَ ُّّل ىي‬:‫هخال‬
6) Is used befor singular nouns representing the whole class.

.‫ػ هفـػ اموًْْ هغکي چي ػ ټْلي ډلي ًوايٌؼګی کْي امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: The cow is a useful animal. .ٍ‫ غْا يْ ګټْؿ صيْاى ػ‬:‫هخال‬
7) Is used before names of rivers , seas , deserts , and mountains.

.‫ اّ غـًّْ ػ ًْهًْْ هغکي امتؼواليږي‬، ْ‫ ػښت‬، ًْْ‫ ػؿيات‬، )ًّْ‫ػ ًِـًّْ(ميٌؼ‬
Ex: The Amu River. .‫ ػ اهْ ميٌؼ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: The Ba Ba Mountain. .‫ ػ تاتا غـ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The Bagh Ater Desert. .َ‫ ػ تاؽ ػطـ ػښت‬:‫هخال‬
8) Is used before directions nouns.

.‫ػ موتًْْ(ٓـفًْْ) لَ اموًْْ هغکي امتؼواليږی‬
Ex: The north. .‫ ىوال‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: The south. .‫ رٌْب‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The east. .‫ عتيځ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The west. .‫ لْيؼيځ‬:‫هخال‬
9) Is used before names of news papers , magazine.

.‫ػ ّؿځپاڼْ(اعثاؿًّْ) اّ هزلْ ػ ًْهًْْ هغکي امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: The Kabul Times News paper . .َ‫ کاتل ټايوق ّؿځپاڼ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The Mursal. Magazine . . َ‫ هـمل هزل‬:‫هخال‬
50
10) Is used befor the historical buildings and historical events.

.‫ػ تاؿيغي ّػاًيْ اّ صاػحْ څغَ هغکي امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: The Taj Mahal. .‫ تاد هضل‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: The Bala Hesar. .‫ تاال صَاؿ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The independence day. .‫ ػ آفاػي ّؿځ‬:‫هخال‬
11) Is used befor names of nationalities , tribes ,sects , communities.

.‫ ټْلٌْ ػ ًْهًْْ ػ هغَ امتؼواليږي‬، ًْْ‫ هؾُث‬، ًْْ‫ لْه‬، ًْْ‫ػ هلت‬
Ex: The Muslims. .‫ هنلواًاى‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: The Wardak. .‫ ّؿػک‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The Afghans. .‫ افغاًاى‬:‫هخال‬
12) “The” is used when we talk about a particular person or thing.

.ّْ‫“ ُغَ ّعت امتؼواليږي کلَ چي هْږ ػ هيغٌ ىغٌ يا ىي پَ تاؿٍ کي عثـي ک‬The”
Ex: Le‟s go to the park. (The park this town). .)‫( ػ ػغَ ښاؿ پاؿک‬.ْ‫ ځَ چي پاؿک تَ ځ‬:‫هخال‬
13) Is used befor some proper nouns.

.‫ػ ځيٌْ عاٍْ اموًْْ هغکي امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: The Afghanistan people. .‫ ػ افغاًنتاى علک‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: The Suez Canal. .‫ ػ مْيـل کاًال‬:‫هخال‬
“The” is the same for singular and plural and for all genders.
.ٍ‫ اّ ټْلْ رٌنيتْ لپاؿٍ يْىاى ػ‬، ‫روغ‬، ‫“ ػ هفـػ‬The”
Ex:
Singular noun ‫هفشد اعن‬ Plural noun ‫جوع اعن‬
The book ‫کتاب‬ The books ًَْ‫کتات‬
Male gender ‫هزکش جٌغيت‬ Female gender ‫هًْث جٌغيت‬
The boy ‫ُلک‬ The girl ‫اًزلۍ‬
51
 Article (The) can not be used in the following ways:

:‫( تعـشيف تْسي پَ الًذي طشيقـْ ًؾي اعتعواليذاي‬The) ‫د‬
1) “The” is can not be used befor proper noun.

.‫“ ػ عاٍْ اموًْْ هغتَ ًيي امتؼواليؼاي‬The”
Ex: The Ahmad. (incorrect ٔ‫) غل‬. Ex: Ahmad. (correct‫)ٍضيش‬. √

Ex: The Kabul. (incorrect ٔ‫)غل‬. Ex: Kabul. (correct‫)ٍضيش‬. √
2) “The” is can not be used befor the months of the year.

.‫“ ػ کال ػ هياىتْ هغکي ًيي امتؼواليؼاي‬The”
Ex: The Jun. (incorrect ٔ‫)غل‬. Ex: Jun. (correct‫) ٍضيش‬. √
3) “The” is can not be used befor the days of the week.

.‫“ ػ ػ اًّۍ ػ ّؿځْ هغکي ًيي امتؼواليؼاي‬The”
Ex: The Sunday. (incorrect ٔ‫)غل‬. Ex: Sunday. (correct ‫) ٍضيش‬. √
4) “The” is also can not be used befor the languages.

.‫“ ُوؼاؿًګَ ػ ژتْ څغَ ػ هغَ ًيي امتؼواليؼاي‬The”
Ex: The Pashto. (incorrect ٔ‫)غل‬. Ex: Pashto. (correct‫) ٍضيش‬. √
5) “The” is also can not be used befor names of diseases.

.‫“ُوؼاؿًګَ ػ ًا ؿّغيْ څغَ ػ هغَ ًيي امتؼواليؼاي‬The
Ex: The Malaria. (incorrect ٔ‫)غل‬. Ex: Malaria. (correct ‫)ٍضيش‬. √
Indefinite Articles
‫غيش هعيي د تعشيف تْسي‬
The indefinite articles is related to the number (One) used in the sense
(Any one).
.‫ػ تؼـيف غيـهؼيي تْؿي پَ (يْ) ػؼػ پْؿي هـتْٓ ػٍ (اّ) ػ (ُـيْ) پَ هفِْم امتؼواليږي‬
52
 There are two indefinite articles in English language which are (a)
and (an).
.َ‫( څخ‬an) ّ‫( ا‬a) َ‫پَ اًګليغي ژتَ کي دٍّ ًاهعيي د تعشيف تْسي دي چي عثاست دي ل‬
 Usages of (a). ‫( اعتعواالت‬a) ‫د‬
The form (a) is used before the words beginning with a consonant
letter.
.‫( ىکل ػ ُغَ کلوْ هغکي امتؼواليږي چي پَ يْ تي غږٍ تْؿي ىـّع ىْي ّي‬a) ‫ػ‬
Ex: a book. .‫ يْ کتاب‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: a door. .ٍ‫ يٍْ ػؿّاف‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: a cup. .َ‫ يٍْ پيال‬:‫هخال‬
When (U) give the sound of (U) at the beginning of the words (a)
is used instead of (an) .
.‫( امتؼواليږي‬a ) ‫( پَ ځاي‬an) ‫( ػ کلوي پَ مـکي ػ (يّْ) غږ ّؿکړي ػ‬U) ‫کلَ چي‬
Ex: a university. .‫ يْ پٌُْتْى‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: a union. .‫ يْ اتفاق‬:‫هخال‬
The form (a) can be sometimes used befor peoples names and it ind-
icates some one stronger.
ٌ‫( ىکل ځيٌي ّعت کْالي ىي ػ اىغاٍْ ػ ًْهًْْ هغکي امتؼوال ىي اّ پَ ًا اىٌا ىغ‬a) ‫ػ‬
.‫ػاللت کْي‬
Ex: A Mr. Popal came here yesterday. .ٍّ ‫ ػ ښاغلي پْپل پَ ًاهَ پـّى ػلتَ يْ ىغٌ ؿاغلي‬:‫هخال‬
The form (a) is used with certain words.(Numbers ,half…etc).

.)‫ اًّْؿ‬... ‫ ًين‬، ًَّ‫( ػؼػ‬.‫( ىکل لَ ټاکلي کلوْمـٍ امتؼواليږي‬a) ‫ػ‬
Ex: a hundred.
Ex: a third.
Ex: a quarter. 1/4.
Ex: a half kilo.
53
The form (a) is also used with words like (few , little , lot of …etc).
.‫ اًّْؿ( کلوْمـٍ امتؼواليږي‬.... lot of , little , few ) َ‫( ىکل ُوؼاؿًګَ لک‬a) ‫ػ‬
Ex: a few people. .‫ يْ تؼؼاػ علک‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: a lot of things. .‫ ډيـ علک‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: a little milk. .‫ ليږ ىيؼي‬:‫هخال‬
 Usages of (an). ‫( اعتعواالت‬an)‫د‬
The form (an) is used before words beginning with a vowel letter.
.‫( ىکل ػ ُغَ کلوْ څغَ هغکي امتؼواليږي چي پَ يْ غږ لـًّکي تْؿي ىـّع ىْي ّي‬an) ‫ػ‬
Ex: an orange. .‫ يْ ًاؿًذ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: an egg. .‫ يٍْ ُګۍ‬:‫هخال‬
When the words start with a silent (H) and are pronounced like a
vowel sound , we use article (an).
(an) ‫( ىـّع ىْي ّي اّ ػ غږلـًّکي پَ څيـ تلفع ىي هْږ ػ‬H) ٍ‫کلَ چي کلوي پَ يْ تي غږ‬
.ّْ‫ػ تؼـيف تْؿي امتؼوال‬
Ex: an hour. (an our). Ex: an honest man. ( an onest man).

Silent ٍ‫تي غږ‬ Silent ٍ‫تي غږ‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
Article (a) and (an) are not used before plural and uncountable nouns.
.‫( ػ تؼـيف تْؿي ػ روغ اّ ًاىويـًّکي اموًْْ هغکي ًَ امتؼواليږي‬an) ّ‫( ا‬a) ‫ػ‬
Ex: a books. (incorrect ٔ‫)غل‬.

Ex: a water. ( incorrect ٔ‫)غل‬.
54
Simple past tense

َ‫تـيـشٍ عـادٍ صهـاًـ‬
)‫(هطلمَ هاّي‬
Helping verb of simple past tense ‫ػ تيـي ماػٍ فهاًي کْهکي فؼل‬
Did Did
Structure:‫عاختواى‬
Affirmative form Subject + V2 + Complement.
Ex: Asif played Cricket. .ٍ‫ آٍف ػ کـيکيټ لْتَ ّکړ‬:‫هخال‬
Question form Did + Subject + V1 + Complement?
Ex: Did Asif play Cricket? ‫آيا آٍف ػ کـيکيټ لْتَ ّکړٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form
Subject + Did + Not / Didn‟t + V1 + Complement.
Ex: Asif did not /Didn‟t play Cricket..ٍ‫ آٍف ػ کـيکيټ لْتَ ًَّ کړ‬:‫هخال‬
Did +Subject + Not + V1 + Complement -?
Negative interrogative form Ex: Did Asif not play cricket ? ‫آيا آٍف ػ کـيکيټ لْتَ ًَّ کړٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
‫هٌفي عْالي ؽکل‬ Didn‟t + Subject + V1 + Complement -?
Ex: Didn‟t Asif play Cricket ? ‫ آيا آٍف ػ کـيکيټ لْتَ ًَّ کړٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Usages "ًَْ‫د اعتعوال "ځاي‬

1. Usage: Simple past tense is used to show an action which started
and finished at some exact time in the past.
‫ تيـٍ ماػٍ فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول ػ ښْػلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي پَ هؼيي تيـ ّعت کي‬:‫ اعتعوال‬.۱
.‫ىـّع اّ عتن ىْي ّي‬
Diagram:
Note: When simple past tense is used in this way, it usually followed by
adverbs of time like: yesterday , last week , last month , last year , ago , last
night…etc.
:َ‫ هؼوْالً ػ ّعت لَ ليؼًّْ مـٍ لک‬، ‫ کلَ چي تيـٍ ماػٍ فهاًَ پَ ػغَ ٓـيمَ امتؼواليږي‬:‫ًْټ‬
‫ اًّْؿ مـٍ يْ ځاي‬....، َ‫ تيـٍ ىپ‬، ‫ هغکي‬، ‫ تيـ کال‬، ‫ تيـٍ هياىت‬، ‫ تيـٍ اًّّۍ‬، ‫تيـٍ ّؿځ‬
.‫کيږي‬
Ex: I wrote a letter yesterday. .َ‫ ها تيـٍ ّؿځ يٍْ ؿمالَ ّليکل‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He died last year. .ْ‫ ُغَ تيـ کال ّفات ى‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I saw him last month. .‫ ها ُغَ تيـٍ هياىت ّليؼ‬:‫هخال‬
55
2. Usage: Simple past tense is also used with always to show past
habit….etc.
.‫ مـٍ امتؼواليږي‬always :َ‫ ُوؼاؿًګَ تيـٍ ماػٍ فهاًَ ػ تيـ ػاػت لپاؿٍ ل‬:‫ اعتعوال‬.۲
Diagram:
Ex: Khalid always talked about himself. .‫ عالؼ ُوييَ لَ عپل ځاى مـٍ عثـي کْلي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Haafiz Shabeer Ahmad always recited Quran. .ٍّ‫ صافع ىثيـ اصوؼ ُوييَ لـآى تالّت کا‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He was always busy. .ٍّ ‫ ُغَ ُوييَ هيغـْل‬:‫هخال‬
3. Usage : Simple past tense is also used in improbable conditional sen-

tences.
.‫ ُوؼاؿًګَ تيـٍ ماػٍ فهاًَ پَ ًاهوکي ىـٓيَ رولْ امتؼواليږي‬:‫ اعتعوال‬.۳
Ex: If I studied hard , I could pass the exam.
.‫ پَ اهتضاى کي کاهياتيؼلن‬، ‫ کَ چيـي ها مغتَ هطالؼَ کړی ّاي‬:‫هخال‬
4. Usage: Simple past tense is also used to ask about a past action.
.‫ ُوؼاؿًګَ تيـٍ ماػٍ فهاًَ ػ تيـ ىْي ػول ػ پْښتلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬:‫ اعتعوال‬.۴
Ex: Where were you yesterday? ‫ تيـٍ ّؿځ چيـي ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Who did meet you last week? ‫ لَ تامـٍ تيـٍ اًّّۍ چا هاللات ّکړّ؟‬:‫هخال‬
5. Usage: Simple Past tense is also used to show an action which starts
and stops in the past ,in this way it is usually followed by expression
of time like: "for two years," , "for five minutes " "all day" or "all year.
….etc.
‫ ُوؼاؿًګَ تيـٍ ماػٍ فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي پَ تيـ(ّعت) کي ىـّع‬:‫ اعتعوال‬.۵
″ٍ‫ ػ ػّّ کلًْْلپاؿ‬″ :َ‫ پَ ػغَ ٓـيمَ کي هؼوْالً ػ ّعت لَ اٍطالس مـٍ لک‬،‫اّ پاي تَ ؿميؼلي ّي‬
.‫ اًّْؿ‬.... ″‫ټْل کال‬″ ‫ اّيا‬، ″‫ټْلَ ّؿځ‬″ ، ″ٍ‫ ػ پٌځْ ػليمْلپاؿ‬″ ،
Diagram:
Ex: I lived in Kabul for two years. .ٍ‫ ها ػ ػّّ کلًْْ لپاؿٍ پَ کاتل کي ژًّؼ کړي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
.)ٍ‫(ها پَ کاتل کي ػٍّ کالَ ژًّؼ کړي ػ‬
Ex: Baseer sat at the beach all day. .‫ تَيـ ټْلَ ّؿځ ػ ماصل پَ غاړٍ ًامت ّي‬:‫هخال‬
56
Past continuous tense

(Past progressive tense)
َ‫تـيـشٍ جـاسي صهـاًـ‬

)ًَ‫(تيشٍ اعتوشاسي صها‬
Helping verbs of P.C tense ًَْ‫ػ تيـي راؿي فهاًي کْهکي فؼل‬
Was / Were Was / Were
Structure: )‫عاختواى( جْړښت‬
Affirmative form Sub + Was /Were + V - ing + Comp.

Ex: He was eating food. .ٍّ ‫ ُغَ ػ غؾاعْړلْ پَ صال کي‬:‫هخال‬
Question form Was /Were + Sub + V - ing + Comp?
Ex: Was he eating food ? ‫آيا ُغَ ػ غؾا عْړلْ پَ صال کي ٍّ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form Sub +Was /Were + Not / Wasn‟t/Weren‟t +V -ing + Com .
Ex: He was not/wasn‟t eating food..‫ ُغَ تَ د غزا خْړلْ پَ حال کي ًَ ّي‬:‫هثال‬
Was/Were +Sub + Not + V - ing + Comp -?
Negative interrogative form Ex: Was he not eating food ? ‫آيا ُغَ ػ غؾا عْړلْ پَ صال کی ًؼٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
‫هٌفي عْالي ؽکل‬ Wasn‟t/Weren‟t + Sub + V - ing + Comp -?
Ex: Wasn‟t he eating food ? ‫آيا ُغَ ػ غؾا عْړلْ پَ صال کي ًؼٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Usages ‫اعتعوالت‬
1) Usage: Past continuous tense is used to shows an action which was
going on at some exact time in the past.
‫ تيـٍ راؿي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول ښکاؿٍ کْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي پَ تيـ هؼيي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۱
.‫ّعت کي ػ رـياى پَ صال کي ّي‬
Diagram:
Note: In this usage it is usually used with a (When) and (While) clause.
.‫( لَ يْي لْيي مـٍ امتؼواليږي‬While) ّ‫( ا‬When) ‫ پَ ػغَ امتؼوال کي هؼوْالً ػ‬:‫ًــْټ‬
Ex: I was swimming in the pool yesterday morning.

.َ‫ فٍ تيـٍ ّؿځ مِاؿ پَ صُْ کي الهثْ ُّل‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: They were playing volleyball when I called them.
.ٍّ ‫ کلَ چي ها فًګ ّّاَُ ػّي ػ ّاليثال پَ لْتَ هيغْل‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: While I was studying he knocked the door.
.َ‫ ُغَ ّعت چي فٍ پَ هطالؼَ هيغْل ّم ُغَ ػؿّافٍ ّټکْل‬:‫هخال‬
57
2) Usage: Past continuous tense is also used without a time expression

to indicate gradual development .
‫ ُـوؼاؿًګَ تـيـٍ راؿي فهاًَ تـي ػ ّعت لَ اٍطالس څغَ ػ تؼؿيزي پـهغتګ‬:‫) اعـتعـوال‬۲
.‫ښْػلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼـواليږي‬
Ex: The weather was getting colder. .ٍّ ‫ ُْا ػ يغيؼّ پَ صال کي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: It was getting darker. .ٍّ ‫ ُغَ ػ تاؿيکيؼّ پَ صال کي‬:‫هخال‬
3) Usage: Past continuous tense is used with (always) to show a persistent

habit in the past.
‫ چي پَ تيـٍ کي يْ هکـؿ ػول‬، ‫( مـٍ امتؼواليږي‬always) َ‫ تيـٍ راؿي فهاًَ ل‬:‫) اعتعـوال‬۳
Ex: He was always making noise in the class.
.ٍّ‫ ُغَ ُوييَ پَ ټْلګۍ کي غالـوغال رْړا‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Abdul Hadi and Ahsan were always studying together.
.َ‫ ػثؼالِاػي اّ اصناى ُوييَ يْځاي هطالؼَ کْل‬:‫هخال‬
4) Usage: Past continuous tense is also used to show an unfulfilled dec-

ision in the past.
ٍ‫ ُـوؼاؿًګـَ تـيــٍ راؿي فهـاًَ پَ هاّي کـي ػ مــتَ ًَ ؿمـيؼلـي تَوـين لپاؿ‬:‫) اعـتعـوال‬۴
Ex: I was going to call you , but I didn‟t have your number.
.‫ هګـ متا ًوثـ هي ًَ ػؿلْػ‬، َُ‫ ها تاتَ فًګ ّا‬:‫هخال‬
Regular and Irregular verbs

ًَْ‫تا قاعـذٍ اّ تـي قاعـذٍ فعـل‬
1) Regular verbs ًَْ‫تا قاعذٍ فعل‬
The regular verbs are those which form their past and past participle
by taking (d) or (ed) at the end of the simple form.
)‫تا لاػؼٍ فؼلًَْ ُغَ ػي چي تيـ صالت(ػُّن صالت) اّ ػؿين صالت يي ػ ماػٍ ىکل(اّلي صالت‬
.‫( پَ اعينتلْ رْړيږي‬ed) ‫( اّ يا‬d) ‫پَ پاي کي ػ‬
Ex: :‫هثال‬
Simple form )‫عادٍ ؽکل(اّلي حالت‬ Past form )‫تيش حالت (دُّن حالت‬ Past participle form ‫دسين حالت‬
Talk Talked Talked
Agree Agreed Agreed
Like Liked Liked
58
Rule of adding (d) or (ed)

‫( عالٍّ کْلْ قاعذي‬ed) ‫( اّيا‬d) ‫د‬
1) Verbs ending in (e) or (ee) take only (d) in the end.

.‫( اعتياؿّي‬d) ‫( پَ اعيـ کي يْافي‬ee) ‫( عتن ّي‬e) ‫ُغَ فؼلًَْ چي‬
Encourage Encouraged Encouraged

Agree Agreed Agreed
Love Loved Loved
2) Verbs ending in (y) following a consonant , change (y) into (I) and
than add (ed).
ْ‫( څغَ ػهغَ ي‬y) َ‫( عتن ّي اّ ػيْ تي غږٍ تْؿي پَ تؼمية ؿاغلي ّي(( ل‬y) َ‫ُغَ فؼلًَْ چي پ‬
.‫( اّافَ کيږي‬ed) َ‫( تؼليږي اّ ّؿّمت‬I) َ‫( پ‬y) ))‫تي غږٍ تْؿي ؿاغلي ّي‬
Ex: :‫هثال‬
Try Tried Tried

Carry Crried Crried
Marry Married Married
3) Verbs ending in (y) following a vowel add (ed) without any change.
(y) َ‫( عتن ىْي ّي اّ ػغږ لـًّکي تْؿي پَ تؼمية ؿاغلي ّي(( ل‬y) َ‫ُغَ فؼلًَْ چي پ‬
.‫( تي لَ کْم تغيـ څغَ ّؿ اّافَ کيږي‬ed) ))‫څغَ ػهغَ غږ لـًّکي تْؿي ؿاغلي ّي‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
Pray Prayed Prayed

Play Played Played
Pay Payed Payed
4) One syllable regular verbs ending in a consonant and following a

vowel , double the last consonant and than add (ed).
‫يْ ميالتَ تا لاػؼٍ فؼلًَْ چي پَ تي غږٍ تْؿي عتن ّي اّ ػ يْ غږ لـًّکي تْؿي پَ تؼمية ؿاغلي‬
‫ّي (( ػ تي غــږٍ تـْؿي هغکي يـْ غـږ لـًّکــي تْؿي ؿاغـلي ّي)) اعـيــي تـي غــږٍ تــْؿي‬
ٍ‫ ػٍّ چـٌؼ‬.ّْ‫( ّؿػالٍّ ک‬ed) َ‫کّْ اّ ّؿّمت‬
59
Ex: :‫هخال‬
Simple form )‫عادٍ ؽکل(اّلي حالت‬ Past form )‫تيش حالت (دُّن حالت‬ Past participle form ‫دسين‬
‫حالت‬
Stop Stopped Stopped
Drop Dropped Dropped
Dip Dipped Dipped
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
Verbs ending in (C) take an extra (K) befor adding (ed).
.‫( غْاړي‬K) ٍْ‫( لَ فياتْلْ هغکي ي‬ed) ‫( عتن ّي ػ‬C) َ‫ُغَ فؼلًَْ چي پ‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
Simple form )‫عادٍ ؽکل(اّلي حالت‬ Past form )‫تيش حالت (دُّن حالت‬ Past participle form)‫(دسين حالت‬
Picnic Picnicked Picnicked

Mimic Mimicked Mimicked
2) Irregular verbs ًَْ‫تي قاعذٍ فعل‬
Irregular verbs are those which do not have any special rule for forming
their past and and past participle forms.
.‫تي لاػؼٍ فؼلًَْ ُغَ ػي چي ػ تيـ صالت(ػُّن صالت) اّ ػؿين صالت لپاؿٍ کْهَ عاٍَ لاػؼٍ ًّلـي‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
Simple form )‫عادٍ ؽکل(اّلي حالت‬ Past form )‫تيش حالت (دُّن حالت‬ Past participle form )‫(دسين حالت‬
Rid Rid Rid

See Saw Seen
Ring Rung Rung
Say Said Said
Write Wrote Written
60
Emphasizing pronouns
َ‫تـاکـيذي ضـوـيـشًّـ‬
Emphasizing pronouns are those pronoun which are used instead of noun
and emphasize on performing of an action.
.‫تاکيؼي ّويـًَّ ُغَ ػي چي ػ امن پَ ځاي امتؼواليږي اّ ػ ػول پَ مـتَ ؿمْلْ تاکيؼ کْي‬
 Emphasizing pronouns consist is: َ‫تاکيذي ضويشًَّ عثاست دي ل‬

Emphasizing pronouns ًَّ‫تاکيذي ضويش‬
My self ‫عپل ځاى‬، َ‫ فٍ پغپل‬، َ‫ها پغپل‬
Yourself ‫ متا ځاى‬،َ‫تَ پغپل‬
Himself ‫ ُغَ(هؾکـ)ځاى‬،َ‫ُغَ(هؾکـ) پغپل‬
Herself ‫ُغَ(هًْج)ځاى‬،َ‫ُغَ(هًْج) پغپل‬
Itself َ‫ُغَ(تيزاى)پغپل‬،َ‫ُغَ(تيزاى) پغپل‬
Ourselves ‫ فهْږ ځاى‬،َ‫هْږ پغپل‬
Yourselves ‫ متامي ځاى‬،َ‫تامي پغپل‬
Themselves ‫ ػُغْي ځاى‬،َ‫ ػّي پغپل‬، َ‫ُغْي پغپل‬
Ex: I myself saw him in Kandahar. .‫ ها پغپلَ ُغَ پَ کٌؼُاؿ کي ّليؼ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: She herself broke the glass. .‫ ُغي پغپلَ ګالك هات کړ‬:‫هخال‬
Note ‫ًْټ‬:
1. Emphasizing pronouns can be placed after object in the sentence it
there is one object.
َ‫تاکيؼي ّويـًَّ کْالي ىي لَ هفؼْل څغَ ّؿّمتَ امتؼوال ىي پَ ُغَ ٍْؿت کي چي پ‬
.‫رولَ کي يْ هفؼْل هْرْػ ّي‬
Ex: Aziz opened the door himself. .ٍ‫ ػقيق پغپلَ ػؿّافٍ عالٍَ کړ‬:‫هخال‬
2. Emphasizing pronouns after an intransitive verb.

.‫تاکيؼي ّويـًَّ لَ الفهي فؼل څغَ ّؿّمتَ امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: Haseeb told himself me the fact. .َ‫ صنية هاتَ پغپلَ صميمت ّّاي‬:‫هخال‬
intransitive verb ‫الفهي فؼـل‬
61
3. When the emphasizing pronoun used with preposition (by) it mean by

my own self.
ّ‫ پَ تٌِاي( تي ػًْؿ‬، ‫( لَ اّافی تْؿي مـٍ امتؼوال ىي‬by) ‫ُغَ ّعت چي تاکيؼي ّويـًَّ ػ‬
.‫لَ کْهک څغَ) هؼٌي ّؿکْي‬
Ex: I did every thing by myself.(without any body is help).
.)َ‫(تي ػ کْم ىغٌ لَ هـمتي څغ‬.‫ ها ُـىي پَ تٌِايي مـٍ مـتَ ّؿمْل‬:‫هخال‬
Reflexive pronoun
ًَّ‫اًعکاعــي ضوـيـش‬
Reflexive pronoun are used instead of nouns and show that the subject
and object of the sentence is the same , that is to say, the action reflects
from subject to object and from object to subject.
‫اًؼکامي ّويـًَّ ػ امن پَ ځاي امتؼواليږي اّ ښيی چي ػ رولي فاػل اّ هفؼْل يْ ػٍ يؼٌي ػا چي‬
.‫ػول لَ فاػل څغَ هفؼْل تَ اّلَ هفؼْل څغَ فاػل تَ اًؼکاك کْي‬
Reflexive pronouns are as follow: ‫اًعکاعي ضويشًَّ پَ الًذي ډّل دي‬
Reflexive pronouns ًَّ‫اًؼکامي ّويـ‬

My self ‫عپل ځاى‬، َ‫ فٍ پغپل‬، َ‫ها پغپل‬
Yourself ‫ متا ځاى‬،َ‫تَ پغپل‬
Himself ‫ ُغَ(هؾکـ)ځاى‬،َ‫ُغَ(هؾکـ) پغپل‬
Herself ‫ُغَ(هًْج)ځاى‬،َ‫ُغَ(هًْج) پغپل‬
Itself َ‫ُغَ(تيزاى)پغپل‬،َ‫ُغَ(تيزاى) پغپل‬
Ourselves ‫ فهْږ ځاى‬،َ‫هْږ پغپل‬
Yourselves ‫ متامي ځاى‬،َ‫تامي پغپل‬
Themselves ‫ ػُغْي ځاى‬،َ‫ ػّي پغپل‬، َ‫ُغْي پغپل‬
Ex: I hurt my self. .‫ ها عپل ځاى ژّتل کړ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He will depended him self. .‫ ُغَ تَ لَ عپل ځاى څغَ ػفاع ّکړي‬:‫هخال‬
62
Relative pronouns
ًَّ‫هْصْلي(ستطي) ضويش‬
The relative pronouns are used instead of nouns and join two sente-
nces.
.)‫ؿتطي ّويـًَّ ػ اموًْْ پَ ځاي امتؼواليږي اّ ػٍّ رولي مـٍ ًښلْي(اؿتثآ ّؿکْي‬
 These pronouns consist in: َ‫دغَ ضويشًَّ عثاست دي ل‬
Relative pronouns ًَّ‫هْصْلي(ستطي) ضويش‬
Who ‫څْک چي‬
Whom ‫ چاچي‬،‫ کْم تَ چي‬، ‫چاتَ چي‬
Whose ‫لَ چا څغَ چي‬
Of which ‫لَ څَ ىي چي‬
What ‫څَ ىي چي‬
That ‫چــــي‬
Which ‫ ُغَ چي‬،‫ کْم ىي چي‬،‫ُغَ ىي چي‬
Ex: That is the car which I bought yesterday. .‫ُغَ هْټـػٍ چي هاپـّى ّاعينت‬:‫هخال‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
 “Who” ‫څْک چي‬:
“Who” is used for people. .‫“ ػ اىغاٍْ(علکْ) لپاؿٍ امتؼـواليږي‬Who”
 “Whom” : ‫ کْم تَ چي‬، ‫چاتَ چي‬

“Whom” is used instead of object for people.
.‫“ ػ اىغاٍْ(علکْ) لپاؿٍ ػ هفؼْل پَ ځاي امتؼواليږي‬Whom”
 “Whose”‫لَ چا څخَ چي‬

“Whose” is used only for people and sometimes used for things without
life.
ٍ‫“ فمٔ ػ علـکْ(اىغـاٍْ) لپاؿٍ امـتؼوالـيږي اّ ځـيٌي ّعـت ػ تيزـاًَ ىياًْ لپاؿ‬Whose”
 “Which” ‫ ُغَ چي‬،‫ کْم ؽي چي‬، ْ‫ک‬
“Which” is used for things and animals.
.‫“ ػ ىياًْ اّصيْاًاتْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Which”
 “ What” ‫څَ ؽي چي‬
“ What” is only used for things.
.‫ “ فمٔ ػ ىياًْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږی‬What”
63
Present perfect tense

َ‫حـال کاهـلـَ صهـاًـ‬
)‫(ًـږدي هاضـي‬
Helping verbs of P.P tense ًَْ‫ػ صال کاهلي فهاًي کْهکي فؼل‬
Have / Has Have / Has
Structure: ‫جْړښت‬
Affirmative form Sub + Have /Has + V3 + Comp.
Ex: Shabir has gone to Ghazni. .ٍ‫ ىثيـ غقًي تَ تللي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Question form Have /Has + Sub + V3 + Comp?
Ex: Has Shabir gone to Ghazni? ‫ آيا ىثيـ غقًي تَ تللي ػٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form Sub + Have/Has + Not +V3 + Com .
Ex: Shabir has not gone to Ghazni. .‫ ىثيـ غقًي تَ ًؼٍ تللي‬:‫هخال‬
Have/Has +Sub + Not + V3 + Comp -?
Negative interrogative form Ex: Has Shabir not gone to Ghazni ? ‫ آيا ىثيـ غقًي تَ ًؼٍ تللي؟‬:‫هخال‬
‫هٌفي عْالي ؽکل‬ Haven‟t/Hasn‟t + Sub + V3 + Comp -?
Ex: Hasn‟t Shabir gone to Ghazni ? ‫ آيا ىثيـ غقًي تَ ًؼٍ تللي؟‬:‫هخال‬
1) Usage: Present perfect tense is used for those recent past actions
which started and finished at some unknown time in the past.
‫ صال کاهلَ فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ًـږػي تـيـ ىْي ػـولًْْ لپاؿٍ امـتؼوالـيږی چـي پَ تيـ‬:‫) اعـتعـوـال‬۱
. ‫ًاهؼلْم ّعت کي ىـّع اّ عتن ىْي ّي‬
Diagram:
Ex: I have eaten food. ( time is unknown). .)ٍ‫ (ّعت ًاهؼلْم ػ‬.ٍ‫ ها ډّډۍ عْړلي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The students have traveled to India. )time is unknown).

.)ٍ‫ ( ّعت ًاهؼلْم ػ‬.ٍ‫ هضَيليٌْ ٌُؼّمتاى تَ مفـ کړي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
When present perfect tense is used in this way usually followed by
adverbs of time , like: already ,recently ,yet ,so for ,several times ,before,
lately…..etc.
،‫کلَ چي صال کاهلَ فهاًَ پَ ػي ٓـيمَ امتؼوال ىي هؼوْالً ػ ّعت لَ ليؼًّْ مـٍ يْځاي کيږي‬
‫ پَ ػي ّؿمتيْ کي‬،‫ هغکي‬، َ‫ څْځل‬، َ‫ تـػي ځاي‬،َ‫ تـاّم‬، )‫ اعيـاً(ًږػي‬، )‫ هغکي(پغْا‬:َ‫لک‬
.‫ اّ ػامي ًْؿ‬......
64
already )‫هغکي(پغْا‬ recently ‫ ًږػي‬،‫ پَ پاي کي‬، ً‫اعيـا‬

yet َ‫تـ اّم‬ so for َ‫تـػي ځاي‬
several times َ‫څْ ځل‬ before ‫هغکي‬
lately ‫پَ ػي ّؿمتيْ کي‬
Ex: We have already finished the work. .ٍ‫ هْږ هغکي کاؿ عتن کړي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I have not visited Paris yet. .‫ ها تـاّمَ پاؿيل ًؼٍ ليؼلي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Mohammad has gone to Kandahar several times.
.ٍ‫ هضوؼ څْ ځلَ کٌؼُاؿ تَ تللي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
‫ څغَ ّؿّمتَ اّ ځيٌي ّعت ػ رولي پَ اعيـ کي‬Have , has َ‫ ؽکـ ىْي ليؼًَّ ځيٌي ّعت ل‬:‫ًْټ‬
.‫ؿاځي‬
2) Usage: present perfect tense is used with (Just) to show a recently

completed action. (to show immediate past action).
.‫( مـٍ ػ يْ ًږػي تکويل ىْي ػول لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Just) َ‫ صال کاهلَ فهاًَ ل‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۲
.) ‫(ًږػي تيـىْي ػول ښيي‬
Ex: We have just finished the lesson. .‫ هْږ ليږىيثَ هغکي ػؿك عتن کړ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He has just arrived from Kandahar. .‫ ُغَ ليږ ىيثَ هغکي لَ کٌؼُاؿٍ ؿاّؿميؼ‬:‫هخال‬
3) Usage: Present perfect tense is used with (since) and (For) to show an
action which started in the past and continued up to now.
‫( مـٍ ػُغَ ػول ښْػلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬For) ّ‫( ا‬since) َ‫ صال کاهلَ فهاًَ ل‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۳
.‫چي پَ هاّي کي ىـّع ىْي ّي اّ تـاّمَ اػاهَ لـي‬
Ex: The students have continued the lessons for ten months.
.ٍ‫ فػٍ کًّْکْ ػ لنْ هياىتْ لپاؿٍ ػؿمًْْ تَ ػّام ّؿکړي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Naim has lived in Kandahar city since 2008 AD.
.ٍ‫م کال ؿا پؼي عْا ػ کٌؼُاؿ پَ ښاؿ کي ژًّؼ کړي ػ‬۲۱۱۸ ‫ ًؼين ػ‬:‫هخال‬
.‫( ػ ّعت اّږػّالي ښيي‬Since) ّ‫( ػ ّعت هْػٍ ښيي ا‬For) :‫ًْټ‬
4) Usage: Present perfect tense shows an action which happened in the

past but the results or effects are still seen in the present time.
ّ‫ صال کاهلَ فهاًَ ُغَ ػول ښيی چي پَ تيـّعت کي ّالغ ىْي ّي اّ ًتايذ ا‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۵
.‫احـات يي پَ صاّـ ّعت کي ليؼل کيږي‬
Ex: I have painted my room. ٍ‫ ها عپل آاق ؿًګ کړي ػ‬:‫هخال‬

.)‫(د سًګ اثشات تشاّعَ ليذل کيږي‬.
Ex: Ali has cut his finger. .)‫(اّط ُن ّيٌَ جشياى لشي‬.ٍ‫ ػلي عپلَ ګْتَ پـي کړي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
65
Note:‫ًْټ‬
In present perfect tense the action it is self is very important than of
the exact time , but in the simple past tense exact time is important.
َ‫ هګـ پ‬، ٍ‫پَ صال کاهلَ فهاًَ کي پغپلَ ػول (ػ ػول مـتَ ؿميؼل) لَ ػ ليك ّعت څغَ ډيـ هِن ػ‬
.ٍ‫ماػٍ تيـٍ فهاًَ کي ػ ليك ّعت هِن ػ‬
Ex: I have seen Mustafa today. (at any time today).

.)‫ ( ًي پَ کْم ّعت کي‬.ٍ‫ ها ًي هَطفي ليؼلي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I saw Mustafa at nine o‟clock today. (at an exact time).

.)‫ ( يْ ػ ليك ّعت‬.‫ ها ًي پَ ًَ تزْ هَطفي ّليؼ‬:‫هخال‬
Note: Present perfect tense and simple past tense are both used with
adverbs of time like:( ever ,never, always, often, several times,…..etc) but
both tenses express the same idea in different periods of times.
،)َ‫ (ُـ(ُـکل‬:َ‫صال کاهلَ فهاًَ اّ تيـٍ ماػٍ فهاًَ ػّاړٍ ػ ّعت لَ ليؼًّْ مــٍ امتؼواليږي لک‬
ْ‫اًّْؿ) هګـ ػّاړٍ فهاًي يْىاى هفکْؿٍ ػ ّعت پَ هغتلف‬......َ‫ څْځل‬، ً‫ اکخـا‬، َ‫ ُويي‬، َ‫ُيڅکل‬
.‫ػّؿّ کي تياًْي‬
Ex: :‫هثال‬
 We lived in Kabul for three years. (past but now).
.)ًَ ‫ (پغْا هګـ اّك‬.‫ها ػؿي کالَ پَ کاتل کي ژًّؼ ّکړ‬
 We have lived in Kabul for three years. (past and now).

.)‫ ( پغْا اّ اّك‬.ٍ‫ها ػؿي کالَ پَ کاتل ژًّؼ کړي ػ‬
Present perfect continuous tense

(Present perfect progressive tense)
َ‫حـال کـاهـلـَ جـاسي صهـاًـ‬

)ًَ‫(حال کاهلَ اعتوشاسي صها‬
Helping verbs of P.P.C tense ًَْ‫ػ صال کاهلي راؿي فهاًي کْهکي فؼل‬
Have been / Has been Have been / Has been
66
Affirmative form
‫هثثت ؽکل‬ Sub + Have /Has + been + V1 - ing + Comp.
Ex: I have been studing Pashto. .‫ فٍ ػ پښتْ پَ هطالؼَ هيغْل ّم‬:‫هخال‬
Question form
‫عْالي ؽکل‬ Have /Has + Sub + been + V1 - ing + Comp?
Ex: Have I been studying Pashto? ‫ آيا فٍ ػ پښتْ پَ هطالؼَ هيغْل ّم؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form
‫هٌفي ؽکل‬ Sub + Have/Has + Not + been + V1 – ing + Comp .
Ex: I have not been studying Pashto. .‫ فٍ ػ پښتْ پَ هطالؼَ هيغْل ًَ ّم‬:‫هخال‬
Have/Has +Sub + Not + been + V1 - ing + Comp -?
Negative interrogative Ex: Have I not been studying Pashto? ‫ آيا فٍ ػ پښتْ پَ هطالؼَ هيغْل ًَ ّم؟‬:‫هخال‬
form ‫هٌفي عْالي ؽکل‬
Haven‟t/Hasn‟t + Sub + been +V1 - ing +Comp -?
Ex: Haven‟t I been studing Pashto. ‫ آيا فٍ ػپښتْ پَ هطالؼَ هيغْل ًَ ّم؟‬:‫هخال‬
1) Usage: Present perfect continuous tense is used for the actions which
begin in the past , continued upto now is still continuing (may or may
not go the future.
‫صال کاهلَ راؿي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػولًْْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي پَ تيـّعت کي ىـّع‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۲
‫( هوکي‬.‫ تـاّمَ يي اػاهَ پيؼا کړي (پَ ػي صاّـ ّعت کي) تَ ُن رـياى ّلـي‬، ‫ىْي ّي‬
.)‫ؿاتلًْکي تَ اػاهَ پيؼا کړي‬
Note : Present perfect continuous tense is usually used with (since) and
(For) to show the duration of an action.
ٍ‫چي ػ يْ ػول هْػ‬، ‫( مـٍ امتؼواليږي‬For)ّ‫( ا‬since) َ‫ صال کاهلَ راؿي فهاًَ هؼوْالً ل‬:‫ًْټ‬
Ex: Karrim has been swimming in the pool since four o‟clock.
.ٍ‫ کـين لَ څلْؿتزي ؿاُيني پَ صُْ کي پَ الهثْ ُّلْ هيغْل ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Naghma has been washing the clothes for three hours.
.ٍ‫ ًغوَ ػ ػّّ ماػتْ لپاؿٍ ػ کالْ پـيوٌځلْ هيغْلَ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
2) Usage: present perfect continuous tense is also shows the duration of

an action which has been going on continually a certain period of time.
ٌَ‫ ُوؼاؿًګَ صال کاهلَ راؿي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول هْػٍ ښيي چي پَ ػ ّعت پَ يٍْ هؼي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۲
.‫ػّؿٍ کي پَ رـياى کي ّي‬
Note: The adverbs like: all day long , all this morning , all week , all night ,
…etc are used in this usage of present perfect continuous tense.
‫ اّػامي ًْؿ ػ صال کاهلي‬...، َ‫ ټْلَ ىپ‬، ‫ ټْلَ اًّّۍ‬،‫ ًي ټْل مِاؿ‬، ‫ ټْلَ ّؿځ‬: َ‫ ليؼًَّ لک‬:‫ًْټ‬
.‫راؿي فهاًي پَ ػغَ امتؼوال کي پکاؿ ّړل کيږي‬
67
Ex: Abdul Hadi has been playing cricket all this morning.
.َ‫ ػثؼالِاػي ًي ټْل مِاؿ ػ کـکيټ لْتَ کْل‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Basheer has been watching T.V all day long.
.ْ‫ تييـ ټْلَ ّؿځ تلْيقّى کتل‬:‫هخال‬
3) Usage: Present perfect continuous tense is used to show emphasize

on duration of an action which has been continually going on.
ٍ‫ صال کاهلَ راؿي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول ػ هْػي ػ تاکيؼ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي تي ځٌډ‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۳
.‫ؿّاى ّي‬
Ex: Masood has been calling his friend on and on.
.‫ هنؼْػ تي ځٌډٍ عپل هلګـي تَ ټيليفْى کړي‬:‫هخال‬
4) Usage: Present perfect continuous tense is used to shows an action

which has taken a special period of time in the past.
ٍْ‫ صال کاهلَ راؿي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول ػ تياى لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي ػ ّعت پَ ي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۴
.‫ټاکلي ػّؿٍ کي پَ تيـٍ (فهاًَ) کي تـمـٍ ىْي ّي‬
Ex: Fareed has been working in a bank for the last years.
.ٍّ ‫ فـيؼ تيـ کلًَْ پَ تاًک کي پَ کاؿ تْعت‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Asmat has been studing the lesson in Kabul university for last years.
.ٍّ ‫ ػَوت تيـ کلًَْ ػ کاتل پَ پٌُْتْى کي پَ ػؿك تْعت‬:‫هخال‬
(Verbs ًَْ‫)فعل‬
Verb is a word which shows an action , state , possession , presence or
absence.
.‫ هْرْػيت اّ ًا هْرْػيت ښکاؿٍ کْي‬، ‫ هلکيت‬،)‫ صالت(ّّؼيت‬، ‫فؼل ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي يْ ػول‬
Ex: Sibghatullah is writing a letter. (action). .)‫(ػول‬.‫ ٍثغت هللا ػ ليک ليکلْ پَ صال کي ػي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Arghandab is a beautiful place .(state). .)‫(صالت‬.ٍ‫ اؿغٌؼاب يْ ښکلي ځاي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Sidiqullah has a car.(possession). .)‫ (هلکيت‬.‫ ٍؼيك هللا يْ هْټـ لـي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: There is milk in the glass.(presence). .)‫(هْرْػيت‬.‫ پَ ګالك کي ىيؼي ػي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Karrim is not here. (absence). .)‫(ًا هْرْػيت‬.َ‫ کـين ػلتَ ًيت‬:‫هخال‬
68
 Kinds of verb ًَْ‫دفـعـل ډّلـ‬

 Verbs divided into two parts: ‫فعـلًَْ پَ دٍّ ډّلَ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
1. Auxiliary (Helping) verbs. .ًَْ‫کْهکي فؼـل‬
2. Ordinary (main) verbs. .ًَْ‫هؼوْلي فؼـل‬
3. Auxiliary (Helping) verbs. .ًَْ‫کْهکي فعـل‬

Auxiliary verbs are those with present or past participle or infinitive to
form the tense or ordinary verb.
)‫ػؿين صالت اّلَ هَؼؿ مــٍ يْځاي اّ ػهؼوْلي(اٍلي‬، ‫کْهـکي فؼـلًَْ ُغَ ػي چـي لَ مـاػٍ ىکل‬
.‫فؼلًْْ فهاًَ تيکليلْي‬
 The auxiliary verbs consist in:َ‫کْهکي فعلًَْ عثاست دي ل‬
auxiliary verbs ًَْ‫کْهکي فعـل‬

Am is was were have has had do does
did can could will would shall should may might
ought to must need used to
 Auxiliary verbs are divided into three parts:‫کْهکي فعلًَْ پَ دسي تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي‬
1) Principal auxiliary verbs. .ًَْ‫اٍــلي کْهکي فؼـل‬

2) Modal auxiliary verbs. .ًَْ‫ًوًَْ يي(ّرِي) کْهکي فؼـل‬
3) Semi modal auxiliary verbs. .ًَْ‫ًيوَ ًوًَْ يي(ًيوَ ّرِي) فؼـل‬
1) Principal auxiliary verbs ًَْ‫اصــلي کْهکي فعـل‬:

The Principal auxiliary verbs are those which form the main part of
auxiliary verbs.
.‫اٍلي کْهکي فؼلًَْ ُغَ ػي چي ػ کْهکي فؼلًْْ امامي تـعَ تيکيلْي‬
Principal auxiliary verbs ًَْ‫اٍلي کْهکي فؼل‬
Is am are was were been being

have has had do does did
Ex: Shabeer is a moralist student. .ٍ‫ ىثيـ يْ اعاللي فػٍ کًّْکي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Khalid was a pilot. .ٍّ ‫ عالؼ يْ پيلْټ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I am a teacher. .‫ فٍ يْ هؼلن ين‬:‫هخال‬
69
 Parts Principal auxiliary verbs ‫د اصلي کْهکي فعلًْْ تشخي‬
1 2 3
To be verbs To have verbs To do verbs
 To Be verbsًَْ‫د ّجْد لشلْ فعـل‬:
To Be verbs are used to show state and being the sentences.

.‫ػ ّرْػ لـلْ فؼلًَْ ُغَ فؼلًَْ ػي چي پَ رولْ کي صالت (ّّؼيت) اّ هْرْػيت تياًْي‬
 To Be verbs consist in:َ‫دّجْد لشلْ فعلًَْ عثاست دي ل‬
To Be verbs ًَْ‫ػ ّرْػ لـلْ فؼـل‬

Is are am was were Be been being
 To have verbs: ًَْ‫د لشلْ فعـل‬

To have verbs are those which are used to show possession or own-
ership in the sentences.
.‫ػلـلْ فؼلًَْ ُغَ ػي چي پَ رولَ کي هلکيت اّ هالکيت ښْػلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬
 To have verbs consist in: َ‫د لشلْ فعلًَْ عثاست دي ل‬
To have verbs ًَْ‫ػ لـلْ فؼل‬

Have Has Had
Ex: You have three sons. .‫ تَ ػؿي فاهي لـي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He has a bicycle. .‫ ُغَ يْ تاينکل لـي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: They had a lot of books. .‫ ُغْي ډيـ کتاتًَْ ػؿلْػل‬:‫هخال‬
 To do verbsًَْ‫دعشتَ سعْلْ فعـل‬

( To do verbs) are those which are used to show performing of an
action in the sentence .
ٍ‫ػ (مــتَ ؿمـْلْ فؼـلًَْ) ُغـَ ػي چـي پَ رـوـلَ کي ػ يـْ ػوـل(کـاؿ) پـَ مــتَ ؿمـْلـْ لـپـاؿ‬
70
 To do verbs consist in:َ‫دعشتَ سعْلْ فعـلًَْ عثاست دي ل‬

To do verbs ًَْ‫ػ مـتَ ؿمْلْ فؼـل‬
Do Does Did
Ex: I do my homework every day. .‫ فٍ ُـٍ ّؿځ عپلَ کْؿًۍ مـتَ ؿمْم‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He does service every month. .‫ ُغَ ُـٍ هياىت عپلَ ًْکـي مـتَ ؿمْي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I did my homework yesterday. .َ‫ ها تيـٍ ّؿځ عپلَ کْؿًۍ ّظيفَ مـتَ ّؿمْل‬:‫هخال‬
Simple future tense

ًَ‫عادٍ ساتلـًّْکـي صهـا‬
Helping verbs of simple future tense ًَْ‫ػ ماػٍ ؿاتلًّْکي فهاًي کْهکي فؼل‬
Will / Shall Will / Shall
Structure 1: ‫ جْړښت‬:۱
Affirmative form
‫هثثت ؽکل‬ Sub + Will /Shall +V1 + Comp.
Ex: Khalid will learn Arabic. .‫ عالؼ تَ ػـتي فػٍ کړي‬:‫هخال‬
Question form
‫عْالي ؽکل‬ Will /Shall + Sub + V1 + Comp?
Ex: Will Khalid learn Arabic? ‫ آيا عالؼ تَ ػـتي فػٍ کړي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form
‫هٌفي ؽکل‬ Sub + Will /Shall + Not +V1 + Comp .
Ex: Khalid will not learn Arabic. .‫ عالؼ تَ ػـتي فػٍ ًکړي‬:‫هخال‬
Will /Shall +Sub + Not + V1 + Comp -?
Negative interrogative Ex: Will Khalid not learn Arabic? ‫ آيا عالؼ تَ ػـتي فػٍ ًکړی؟‬:‫هخال‬
Won‟t/Shan‟t + Sub +V1 + Comp -?
Ex: Won‟t Khalid learn Arabic? ‫ آيا عالؼ تَ ػـتي فػٍ ًکړي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Note: (Will not = Won‟t) and (Shall not = Shon‟t)

Structure 2: ‫ جْړښت‬:۲
Affirmative form
‫هثثت ؽکل‬ Sub + To be + going to +V1 + Comp.
Ex: Khalid is going to learn Arabic. .‫ عالؼ تَ ػـتي فػٍ کړي‬:‫هخال‬
Question form
‫عْالي ؽکل‬ To be + Sub + going to + V1 + Comp?
Ex: Is Khalid going to learn Arabic? ‫ آيا عالؼ تَ ػـتي فػٍ کړي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form
‫هٌفي ؽکل‬ Sub + To be + Not + going to +V1 + Comp .
Ex: Khalid is not going to learn Arabic. .‫ عالؼ تَ ػـتي فػٍ ًکړي‬:‫هخال‬
Negative interrogative To be + Not + Sub + going to + V1 + Comp -?
form ‫هٌفي عْالي ؽکل‬ Ex: Is not Khalid going to learn Arabic? ‫ آيا عالؼ تَ اًګليني فػٍ ًکړي؟‬:‫هخال‬
.ٍ‫( فْؿهْل ًنثت لْهړي فْؿهْل تَ ډيـ ػام ػ‬To be going to) ‫ ػ‬:‫ًْټ‬
71
1) Usage: Simple future tense is used to show an action which will take
place at some exact time in the future.
‫ ماػٍ ؿاتلًّْکي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ کاؿ ػ تياى لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي پَ ؿاتلًّْکي کي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۲
.‫تَ ؿاهٌځ تَ ىي‬
Diagram:
Note: Some advrbs like: tomorrow , next week , next year , next month
…etc are used in this usage of simple future tense.
‫ اًّْؿ‬... ‫ ؿاتلًّْکي هياىت‬، ‫ ؿاتلًّْکي کال‬، ‫ ؿاتلًّْکي اًّّۍ‬، ‫ مثا‬:َ‫ ځيٌي ليؼًَّ لک‬:‫ًْټ‬
.‫ػ ماػٍ ؿاتلًّْکي فهاًي پَ ػي امتؼوال کي پکاؿ ّړل کيږي‬
Ex: Haneef will go to Ghazni tomorrow. .‫ صٌيف تَ مثا غقًي تَ الړ ىي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I is going to meet him next week. .‫ فٍ تَ ؿاتلًّْکي اًّّۍ لَ ُغَ مـٍ هاللات ّکړی‬:‫هخال‬
2) Usage: Simple future tense is used to talk about things which we

can not control ; it expresses genral facts in the future.
‫ ؿاتلًّْکي ماػٍ فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ىياًْ پَ تاؿٍ کي عثـي کْي چي فهْږ پَ کٌتـّل کي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۲
.‫ًَ ّی ؛ (يؼٌي) ُغَ صميمتًَْ چي پَ ؿاتلًّْکي کي ّالغ کيږي‬
Ex: It will be nawrooz in a week. .‫ ًْؿّف تَ پَ يٍْ اًّّۍ کي ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: We will know the exam results in April. .‫ هْږ تَ تَ ػ اهتضاى ًتيزي پَ اپـيل کي هؼلْهي ىي‬:‫هخال‬
3) Usage: Simple future tense is used in the sentences which contain

conditional clauses.
‫ماػٍ ؿاتلًّْکي فهاًَ پَ ُغْ رولْکي امتؼواليږي چي ىـٓي لْيي پَ کي هْرْػي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۳
.‫ّي‬
Ex: He will discuss with his father if he gets time.

.‫ کَ چيـي ُغَ ّعت پيؼا کړي لَ عپل پالؿ مـٍ تَ عثـي ّکړي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I will go to Kandahar if I buy a car.
.‫ کَ چيـي هْټـ ّاعلن کٌؼُاؿ تَ تَ ځن‬:‫هخال‬
4) Usage: Simple future tense is also used to express condition or hesit-

ation.
.‫ ُوؼاؿًګَ ماػٍ ؿاتلًّْکي فهاًَ ػ ىـٓ اّيا ىک اّ ًَ هٌلْ ػ تياى لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۴
Ex: What will I do at this time next year, I really surprised.

.‫ پَ ؿښتيا صيـاًيږم چي ؿاتلًّْکي کال پَ ػي ّعت کي تَ څَ کاؿ ّکړم‬:‫هخال‬
72
Future continuous tense

(Future progressive tense)
َ‫ساتلـًّْکـي جـاسي صهـاًـ‬

)ًَ‫(ساتلًّْکي اعتوشاسي صها‬
Helping verbs of F. C tense ًَْ‫ػ ؿاتلًّْکي راؿي فهاًي کْهکي فؼل‬
Will be / Shall be Will be / Shall be

Structure 1: ‫ جْړښت‬۱
Affirmative form
‫هثثت ؽکل‬ Sub + Will be /Shall be + V1 - ing + Comp.
Ex: He will be playing now . .‫ ُغَ تَ اّك ػ لْتي پَ صال کي ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Question form
‫عْالي ؽکل‬ Will /Shall + Sub + be + V1 - ing + Comp?
Ex: Will he be playing now? ‫ آيا ُغَ تَ اّك ػ لْتي پَ صال کي ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form
‫هٌفي ؽکل‬ Sub + Will /Shall + Not + be +V1 - ing + Comp .
Ex: He will not be playing now. .‫ ُغَ تَ اّك ػ لْتي پَ صال کي ًَ ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Will /Shall +Sub + Not + be +V1 - ing + Comp -?
Negative interrogative Ex: Will he not be playing now? ‫ آيا ُغَ تَ اّك ػ لْتي پَ صال کي ًَ ّي؟‬:‫م هخال‬
Won‟t/Shon‟t + Sub + be +V1 - ing + Comp -?
Ex: Won‟t he be playing now? ‫ آيا ُغَ تَ اّك ػ لْتي پَ صال کي ًَ ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Structure 2: ‫ جْړښت‬۲
Affirmative form
‫هثثت ؽکل‬ Sub + To be + going to + be +V1 - ing + Comp.
Ex: He is going to be playing now. .‫ ُغَ تَ اّك ػ لْتي پَ صال کي ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Question form
‫عْالي ؽکل‬ To be + Sub + going to + be +V1 - ing + Comp?
Ex: Is he going to be playing now? ‫ آيا ُغَ تَ اّك ػ لْتي پَ صال کي ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form
‫هٌفي ؽکل‬ Sub + To be + Not + going to + be + V1 - ing + Comp .
Ex: He is not going to be playing now. .‫ ُغَ تَ اّك ػ لْتي پَ صال کي ًَ ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Negative interrogative To be + Not + Sub + going to + be + V1 - ing + Comp -?
form ‫هٌفي عْالي ؽکل‬ Ex: Is not I going to be playing now? ‫ آيا ُغَ تَ اّك ػ لْتي پَ صال کي ًَ ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
1) Usage : Future continuous tense is used to expresses the duration of

an action which will be in progress at some exact time in the future.
‫ ؿاتلًّْکي راؿي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول ػ تياى لپاؿٍ امتؼـوالـيږي چي پَ ؿاتلًّْکي‬:‫) اعـتعـوال‬۱
.‫کي پَ يْ ټاکلي ّعت کي ػ رـياى پَ صالت کي ّي‬
Ex: Shabeer will be cleaning the room tomorrow.
.‫ ىثيـ تَ مثا ػ کْټي پَ پاکْلْ هيغْل ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Bilal will be fixing the picture on the wall.
.‫ تالل تَ پَ پَ ػيْال تاًؼي ػ تَْيـ پَ ټکُْلْ هيغْل ّي‬:‫هخال‬
73
2) Usage: Future continuous tense is also used to show the duration of

two actions that will be simultaneously going on.
ٍ‫ ُـوؼاؿًګـَ ؿاتـلًّْکـي راؿي فهاًَ ػ ػّّ ػـولًْْ ػ هـْػي ػ ښـْػلـْ لـپـاؿ‬:‫) اعـتعـوـال‬۲
.‫امتؼـوالـيږي چـي ُـوـقهاى(پَ يْ ّعت کي) ػ رـياى پَ صالت کي ّی‬
Ex: We will be doing our homework, while they will be working in the garden.
.‫ فٍ تَ ػ کْؿًي کاؿ پَ تـمـٍ کْلْ تْعت ين‬، ‫ کلَ چي ُغْي پَ تاؽ کي پَ کاؿ تْعت ػي‬:‫هخال‬
3) Usage: future continuous tense is used to show an action which will

be continuing in an exact course of time in the future.
ٍْ‫ ؿاتـلًّْکي راؿي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػـول ػ تياى لپاؿٍ امتؼـواليږي چي ػ ّعت پَ ي‬:‫) اعـتعوـال‬۲
.‫عاٍَ هْػٍ کي تَ ؿاتلًّْکي کي ػ رـياى پَ صالت کي ّي‬
Ex: He will be getting ready for the exam all next week.
.‫ ُغَ تَ ټْلَ ؿاتلًّْکي اًّۍ ػ اهتضاى لپاؿٍ ځاى چوتْ کْي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Our classmates will be exercising for the races all next month.
.‫ فهْږ ُوٌَــفـياى تَ ټْلَ ؿاتلًّْکي هياىت ػ هناتمي لپاؿٍ ځاى چوتْ کْي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Amin will be typing the letters all afternoon .
.‫ اهيي تَ ټْل هامـپـښيـي پَ عٔ ليکلْ تْعت ّي‬:‫هخال‬
4) Usage: The future continuous tense can be also used in the conditional
sentences.
.‫ ُوؼاؿًګَ ؿاتلًّْکي راؿي فهاًَ کْالي ىي پَ ىـٓيَ رولْ کي امتؼوال ىي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۴
Ex: I am going to be meeting him at 5:00 PM if I do not face any problem.

.‫ تزي تَ لَ ُغَ مـٍ پَ هاللات هيغْل ين‬۵:۱۱ َ‫ کَ لَ هيکل مـٍ هغاهظ ًين پَ ػ هافػيګـ پ‬:‫هخال‬
2. Modal auxiliary verbs ًَْ‫ًوًَْ يي (ّجِي) کْهکي فعـل‬

The modal auxiliary verbs are those which don‟t have any final (s) or
(es) at the third singular person ,they don‟t have any past participle and
infinitive form; therefore can‟t be used in the continuous form.
ًَْ‫( ًَ غْاړي ؛ ػغَ فؼل‬es) ‫( اّيا‬s) ٍ‫ًوًَْ يـي کْهـکي فؼلًَْ ُغـَ ػي چـي ػ ػؿين ىغـٌ لپاؿ‬
ْ‫ػؿين صالـت ًَ لــي اّ ُـوؼاؿًګَ ػ هَؼؿ ىـکل ًَ لــي لـَ ػي کثلَ يـي پَ رـاؿي ىـکل ًيـ‬
.‫امتؼوالْالي‬
 The modal auxiliary verbs are consist in:َ‫ًوًَْ يي کْهکي فعلًَْ عثاست دي ل‬
The modal auxiliary verbs ًَْ‫ًوًَْ يي کْهکي فعـل‬

Can Could Shall Should Will
Would May Might Must Ought to
74
 Can: ‫تْاًيذل‬، ‫کْل‬
“Can” is modal auxiliary verb which shows ability.

.‫“ يْ ًوًَْ يي کْهکي فؼل ػٍ چي تْاًايي ښکاؿٍ کْي‬Can
 Formula of “Can”: :‫“ فْؿهْل‬Can”‫ػ‬
Subject + Can + V1 + Object / Complement. (+)‫ماػٍ صالت‬

Najeeb can speak Pashto. .‫ًزية پَ پښتْ عثـي کْالي ىي‬
Can + Subject + V1 + Object / Complement? (?) ‫مْالي صالت‬
Can Najeeb speak Pashto? ‫آيا ًزية پَ پښتْ عثـي کْالي ىي؟‬
Subject + Can + not / Can‟t +V1 + Object / Complement. (-) ‫هٌفي صالت‬
Najeeb can not/can‟t speak Pashto. .‫ًزية پَ پښتْ عثـي ًيي کْالي‬
Can + Subject + not + V1 + Object / Complement -? (?/-)‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
Can Najeeb not speak Pashto-? ‫؟‬- ‫آيا ًزية پَ پښتْ عثـي ًيي کْالي‬
Can‟t + Subject + V1 + Object/ Complement -? (?/-)‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
Can‟t Najeeb speak Pashto -? ‫؟‬- ‫آيا ًزية پَ پښتْ عثـي ًيي کْالي‬
Complement )‫(تکويل کًّْکي‬

Complement is a word or a group of words which completes the meaning
of a sentences after verb.
‫تکويل کًّْکي لَ ُغَ کلوي اّيا ګـّپ ػ کلوْ څغَ ػثاؿت ػٍ چي ػ فؼل څغَ ّؿّمتَ ػ رولي‬
.‫هؼٌي تکويلْي‬
Ex: I saw Aziz . .‫ ها ػقيق ّليؼ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex : Salim seems happy. .‫ ملين عْىضالَ هؼلْهيږي‬:‫هخال‬
Note: Complement can be a noun , adjective , pronoun or a number.

.‫ّويـ اّيا يْ ػؼػ ّي‬، ‫ ٍفت‬، ‫ تکويل کًّْکي کيؼاي ىي يْ امن‬:‫ًْټ‬
Note :‫ًْټ‬
 “ (Be) able to” ‫ تْاًيذل‬،‫ تْاًايي لشل‬، ‫کْل‬
“ (Be) able to” is possible to use instead of (Can), but (Can) is more
usual.
.ٍ‫( ډيـ هؼوْل ػ‬Can) ‫ هګـ‬، ‫( پَ ځاي امتؼوال ىي‬Can) ‫) “ هوکي ػ‬Be( able to”
Ex: I am able to speak Arabic. .‫ فٍ ػ ػـتي پَ عثـي کْلْ لاػؿ ين‬:‫هخال‬
75
 “ Can” has only two forms , “Can” is in the (present) and “Could” is
used in the (Past) ; So sometimes it is necessary to use (be) able to.
‫“پَ هاّي‬Could” ّ‫ “ پَ ماػٍ صالت کي امتؼواليږي ا‬Can” ‫ “ يْافي ػٍّ صالتَ لـي‬Can”
.‫( امتؼوال ىي‬be) able to. ‫کي امتؼواليږي؛ ًْ پَ ػي عآـ ځيٌی ّعت ّـّؿت ػٍ چي‬
Ex: I will be able to win this match easily. .‫ فٍ تَ تْاًايي ّلـم چي ػغَ هناتمَ پَ اماًۍ مـٍ ّګټن‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I was able to swim. .‫ ها کْالي ىْاي الهثْ ُّّن‬:‫هخال‬
 “ Could”: ‫ تْاًيذل‬، ‫کْل‬
“ Could” is a modal auxiliary verb which is used in the past form of

can , but it is used in the present ,past and future tenses.
‫ (تيـٍ تْاًايي‬.‫) پَ هاّي ىکل امتؼواليږي‬Can( ‫ “ يْ ًوًَْ يي کْهکي فؼل ػٍ ؛ چي ػ‬Could”
.‫ اّ ؿاتلًْکي فهاًْ کي امتؼواليږي‬، ‫ هاّي‬، ‫ هګـ پَ صال‬،‫ښيي‬
 Formula of “Could” ‫“ فْسهْل‬Could”‫د‬
Subject + Could + V1 + Object / Complement. (+) ‫ماػٍ صالت‬

He could teach English. .‫ُغَ کْالي ىْاي اًګليني تؼؿيل کړي‬
Could + Subject + V1 + Object / Complement? ‫مْالي صالت‬ (?)

Could he teach English? ‫آيا ُغَ کْالي ىْاي اًګليني تؼؿيل کړي؟‬
Subject + Could + not +V1 + Object / Complement (-) ‫هٌفي صالت‬
He could not teach English. .‫ُغَ ًيْاي کْالي اًګليني تؼؿيل کړي‬
Could + Subject + not + V1 + Object / Complement -? (?/-) ‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
Could he not teach English -? ‫؟‬- ‫ُغَ ًيْاي کْالي اًګليني تؼؿيل کړي‬
Couldn‟t + Subject + V1 + Object/ Complement -? (?/-) ‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
Couldn‟t he teach English -/? ‫؟‬/-‫آيا ُغَ ًيْاي کْالي اًګليني تؼؿيل کړي‬
Note:‫ًْټ‬
The verb “could” is may sometimes show a present probability.
.‫“ فؼل ځيٌي ّعت کْالي ىي يْ اصتوالي ػول پَ صال فهاًَ کي تياى کړي‬could” ‫ػ‬
Ex: If I participate in the class every day , I could succeed in the exam.
. ‫ اصتواالً پَ اهتضاى کي کاهياب کيږم‬، ‫ کَ چيـي پَ ټْلګۍ کي ُـٍ ّؿځ ىـکت ّکړم‬:‫هخال‬
 “May”: ‫ اهکاى لشل‬، ‫ ؽايذ‬، ً‫احتواال‬
“May” shows a present probability. .‫“ يْ صاّـ اصتوال ښکاؿٍ کْي‬May”
Ex: If you open window , you may catch cold.

.‫ اهکاى لـي يغٌۍ هْ ّىي‬،‫ کَ چيـي تامي کړکۍ عالٍَ کړي‬:‫هخال‬
76
 When “May” is placed at the beginning of the sentence show permiss-

ion and request.
.‫“ ػ رولي پَ مـکي ؿاىي ارافٍ اّ غْښتٌَ تياًْي‬May” ‫کلَ چي‬
Ex: May I come in? (permission). .)ٍ‫ آيا ػاعل تَ ػؿتالي ىن؟ (اراف‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: May he succeed!(request). .)ٌَ‫ عؼاي(د) ػي ُغَ کاهياب کړي! (غْښت‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: May Allah save his evil eyes!(request) .)ٌَ‫ عؼاي(د) ػي ُغَ لَ تؼّ متـګْ ّماتي!(غْښت‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: May I have a glass of water.(request). .)ٌَ‫(غْښت‬.‫ اهکاى لـي يْ ګالك اّتَ ؿاکړي‬:‫هخال‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
In some sentences “God” comes and in some doesn‟t come.
.‫“ اّپَ ځيٌْ رولْ کي ًَ ؿاځي‬God” ‫پَ ځيٌْ رولْ کي‬
 Formula of “may” ‫“ فْسهْل‬may” ‫د‬
Subject + may + V1 + Object / Complement. (+) ‫ماػٍ صالت‬

He may go to home. .‫ُغَ اهکاى لـي کْؿتَ تللي ّي‬
May + Subject + V1 + Object / Complement? (?) ‫مْالي صالت‬
May he go to home? ‫آيا اهکاى لـي ُغَ کْؿتَ تللي ّي؟‬
Subject + may + not +V1 + Object / Complement. (-) ‫هٌفي صالت‬
He may not go to home. .‫ُغَ اهکاى لـي کْؿتَ ًَ ّي تللي‬
May + Subject + not + V1 + Object / Complement -? (?/-) ‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
May he not go to home -? ‫؟‬- ‫آيا ُغَ اهکاى لـي کْؿتَ ًَ ّي تللي‬
Mayn‟t + Subject + V1 + Object/ Complement -? (?/-) ‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
Mayn‟t he go to home -? ‫؟‬-‫آيا ُغَ اهکاى لـي کْؿتَ ًَ ّي تللي‬
 “Might”:‫ اهکاى لشل‬، ‫ ؽايذ‬، ً‫احتواال‬

“Might” is used in the past form of (may) and in the indirect speech.
.‫( پَ تيـ(هاّي) ىکل کي اّپَ غيـهنتمين عثـّ اتـّ(کالم) کي امتؼواليږي‬may) ‫“ ػ‬Might”
Ex: It might rain in Kabul. .‫ پَ کاتل کي ىايؼ تاؿاى ىْي ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He might have gone. .‫ ُغَ ىايؼ تللي ّي‬:‫هخال‬
 Formula of “might” ‫“ فْسهْل‬might”‫د‬
Subject + might + V1 + Object / Complement. (+) ‫ماػٍ صالت‬
Ali might go to Ghazni. .‫ػلي ىايؼ غقًي تَ تللي ّي‬
Might + Subject + V1 + Object / Complement? (?) ‫مْالي صالت‬
Might Ali go to Ghazni? ‫آيا ػلي ىايؼ غقًي تَ تللي ّي؟‬
Subject + might + not +V1 + Object / Complement. (-) ‫هٌفي صالت‬
Ali might not go to Ghazni. .‫ػلي ىايؼ غقًي تَ ًَ ّي تللي‬
Might + Subject + not + V1 + Object / Complement -? (?/-) ‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
Might Ali not go to Ghazni -? ‫؟‬- ‫آيا ػلي ىايؼ غقًي تَ ًَ ّي تللي‬
Mightn‟t + Subject + V1 + Object/ Complement -? (?/-) ‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
Mightn‟t Ali go to Ghazni -? ‫؟‬- ‫آيا ػلي ىايؼ غقًي تَ ًَ ّي تللي‬
77
 “Must”:)ً‫تايذ (حتوا‬
“Must” is a modal auxiliary verb which shows strongest command or obligation.
.‫“ يْ ًوًَْ يي کْهکي فؼل ػٍ چي ډيـ لْي اهـ اّيا هزثْؿيت ښکاؿٍ کْي‬Must”
Ex: We must help the poor. .ّ‫ هْږ تايؼ لَ فميـاًْ مـٍ هـمتَ ّکړ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Every Muslim must pray five time in a day. .‫ ُـ هنلواى تايؼ پَ ّؿځ کي پٌځَ ّعتَ لوًْځ ّکړي‬:‫هخال‬
 “Must” is used to express a necessity.

.‫“ػ ّـّؿت تياًْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Must
Ex: He must work hard for promotion. .‫ ُغَ ػ پـهغتګ لپاؿٍ تايؼ مغت کاؿ ّکړي‬:‫هخال‬
 “Must” is used to express a fixed or strong determination.

.‫“ ػ ټاکل ىْي لْي تَوين يا اؿاػي ػ څـګٌؼّلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Must”
Ex: We must finish the work to day. .ّ‫ هْږ تايؼ ًي ّؿځ کاؿ عتن کړ‬:‫هخال‬
 “Must” is also used to express a probability.

.‫“ ػ لْي اصتوال لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Must” َ‫ُوؼاؿًګ‬
Ex: I think , she must be sick. .‫ فٍ فکـ کْم ُغَ تَ ًاؿّؽ ّي‬:‫هخال‬
 Formula of “must” ‫“ فْسهْل‬must” ‫د‬
Subject + must + V1 + Object / Complement. (+) ‫ماػٍ صالت‬

He must go to school. .‫ُغَ تايؼ ښًّْځۍ تَ الړ ىي‬
Must + Subject + V1 + Object / Complement? (?) ‫مْالي صالت‬
Must he go to school? ‫آيا ُغَ تايؼ ښًّْځۍ تَ الړ ىي؟‬
Subject + must + not +V1 + Object / Complement. (-) ‫هٌفي صالت‬
He must not go to school. .‫ُغَ تايؼ ښًّْځۍ تَ الړ ًَ ىي‬
Must + Subject + not + V1 + Object / Complement -? (?/-) ‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
Must he not go to school -? ‫؟‬- ‫آيا ُغَ تايؼ ښًّْځۍ تَ الړ ًيي‬
Mustn‟t + Subject + V1 + Object/ Complement -? (?/-) ‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
Mustn‟t he go to school -? ‫ ؟‬- ‫آيا ُغَ تايؼ ښًّْځۍ تَ الړ ًيي‬
Note: “Mustn‟t” is the contracted from of “Must not” the first “t” is silent
, which is pronounced “Mussant”.
‫“ تلفع‬Mussant” ‫چي‬، ٍ‫“ تي غږ‬t” ‫“ اعتَاؿي ىکل ػٍ لْهړًۍ‬Must not” ‫“ ػ‬Mustn‟t”:‫ًْټ‬
.‫کيږي‬
.‫“ څغَ کاؿ اعينتل کيږي‬Had to” َ‫“ پَ ځاي ل‬Must” ‫ پَ هاّي کي ػ‬:۲‫ًْټ‬
Ex: He had to go to the bazaar. .‫ ُغَ تايؼ تافاؿ تَ تللي ّاي‬:‫هخال‬
78
 “Have to” , “Has to”: ‫تـايـذ‬
‫هګـ‬،‫“ اکخـاً ُغَ ّعت امتؼواليږي چي ارثاؿ يا ُؼايت فهْږ(هتکلن) لَ عْا ّي‬Must” :۳ ‫ًْټ‬
.‫ “ ُغَ ّعت امتؼواليږي چي ارثاؿ اّ ُؼايت ػ عاؿري ػْاهلْ لَ ٓـفَ ّي‬Has to”
You
We Have to
They
Ex: We have to study for exam. .ّ‫ هْږ تايؼ ػ اهتضاى لپاؿٍ هطالؼَ ّکړ‬:‫هخال‬
He
She Has to
It
Ex: He has to work in this company. .‫ ُغَ تايؼ پَ ػغَ کوپٌۍ کي کاؿ ّکړي‬:‫هخال‬
 “Shall” / “Will”: َ‫ت‬
“Shall” and “will” are modal auxiliary verbs , which are used in the future
tenses.
.‫چي پَ ؿاتلًْکْ فهاًْ کي امتؼواليږي‬، ‫“ ًوًَْ يي کْهکي فؼلًَْ ػي‬will” ّ‫“ ا‬Shall”
Ex: I shall call him tomorrow. .‫ فٍ تَ مثا ُغَ تَ فًګ ُّّن‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He will play cricket. .‫ ُغَ تَ ػ کـکيټ لْتَ ّکړي‬:‫هخال‬
 “Will” and “Shall” are used in the future tenses as helping verbs.
“will” is usually used with the pronouns (he ,she, they, it ,you ,and
singular or plural names). “shall” is usually used with “I” and “we”.
.‫“ ػ کْهـکـي فؼـلًْـْ پَ صـيج پَ ؿاتـلـًْکـْ فهاًـْ کي امـتؼـوالـيږي‬Shall” ّ‫“ ا‬Will”
.‫( فؼلًْْ اّهفـػ يا روغ اموًْْ مـٍ امتؼواليږي‬he ,she, they, it ,you)‫“ هؼوْالً ػ‬Will”
.‫“ مـٍ امتؼواليږي‬we” ّ‫“ ا‬I” َ‫“ هؼوْالً ل‬shall”
Ex: She will help his. .‫ ُغَ (هًْج) تَ لَ ُغَ مـٍ هـمتَ ّکړي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: They will come tomorrow. .‫ ُغْي تَ مثا ّؿځ ؿاىي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I shall play tomorrow. .‫ فٍ تَ مثا لْتَ ّکړم‬:‫هخال‬
79
Note : “Will” is more common but in interrogative sentences with “I” and
“we” “Shall” is used.
“Shall” ٍ‫“ مــ‬we” ّ‫“ ا‬I” َ‫“ ډيــ هؼوـْل ػٍ هګـ پَ مـْالـي رولْ کـي لـ‬Will” :‫ًــْټ‬
Ex: Will /Shall we help them today? ‫ آيا هْږ تَ ًي لَ ػّي مـٍ کْهک ّکړّ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Shall we meet them? ‫ آيا هْږ تَ ًي لَ ػّي مـٍ هاللات ّکړّ؟‬:‫هخال‬
 “ Should”: ‫ښـايي‬، ‫ تايذ‬، َ‫ت‬
1. “ Should” is used in the past form of “Shall”.

.‫“ پَ هاّي ىکل امتؼواليږي‬Shall” ‫ “ ػ‬Should”
Ex: I should clean my room. .‫ فٍ تايؼ عپلَ کْټَ پاکَ کړم‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Should he swim in this river? ‫ آيا ُغَ تايؼ پَ ًِـ کي الهثْ ُّّی؟‬:‫هخال‬
2. “ Should” is used to express an obligation or duty.

.‫ “ ػهزثْؿيت يا هنؤليت لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Should”
Ex: He should studied his lesson. .‫ ُغَ تايؼ عپل ػؿمًَْ هطالؼَ کړي‬:‫هخال‬
3. “ Should” is also used to express a probability.

.‫ “ ُوؼاؿًګَ ػ يْ اصتوال لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Should”
Ex: He should be in the class room now. .‫ ُغَ تَ اّك پَ ټْلګۍ کي ّي‬:‫هخال‬
 “ Would”: ‫ښـايي‬، ‫ تايذ‬، َ‫ت‬
1. “ Would” is used in the past form of “will”, it can be used in the

present ,past and future.
ّ‫ ا‬، ‫هاّي‬، ‫ ُغَ کْالي ىي پَ صال‬،‫“ پَ هاّي ىکل امتؼواليږي‬will” ‫ “ ػ‬Would”
.‫ؿاتلًْکي کي امتؼوال ىي‬
80
Formula of “Would”. ‫“ فْسهْل‬Would” ‫د‬

Subject + would + V1 + Object / Complement. (+) ‫ماػٍ صالت‬
You would learn English. .َ‫تامي تَ اًګليني فػٍ کْل‬
Would + Subject + V1 + Object / Complement? (?) ‫مْالي صالت‬
Would You learn English? ‫آيا تامي تَ اًګليني فػٍ کْلَ ؟‬
Subject + would + not +V1 + Object / Complement. (-) ‫هٌفي صالت‬
You would not learn English. .َ‫تامي تَ اًګليني ًَ فػٍ کْل‬
Would + Subject + not + V1 + Object / Complement -? (?/-) ‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
Would you not learn English - ? ‫ ؟‬- َ‫آيا تامي تَ اًګليني ًَ فػٍ کْل‬
Wouldn‟t + Subject + V1 + Object/ Complement -? (?/-) ‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
Wouldn‟t you learn English-? ‫؟‬- َ‫آيا تامي تَ اًګليني ًَ فػٍ کْل‬
Ex: I would pass the exam, If I studied hard..‫ فٍ کاهياتيؼلن کَ چيـي ها مغتَ هطالؼَ کړي ّاي‬:‫هخال‬
 “Would” is usually combined with words (please) and (mind) to express

a polite request.
‫( لَ کلوْ مـٍ تـکيثيږي هاػتاًَ تماّا( غْښتٌَ) تياًْي‬mind) ّ‫( ا‬please) ‫“ هؼوْالً ػ‬Would”
Ex: Would you please close the door ? ‫ آيا هِـتاًي تَ ّکړي يْ ګالك اّتَ ؿاکړي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Would you mind telling me the fact? ‫ آيا هِـتاًي تَ ّکړي چي صميمت ؿاتَ ّّايي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Would you mind ringing me? ‫ آيا هِـتاًي تَ ّکړي هاتَ يْ فًګ ُّّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Note :‫ًْټ‬
(Please) is used with simple form of the verb but (mind) is used with (ing)
form of the verb.
.‫( ىکل مـٍ امتؼواليږي‬ing) َ‫( ػ فؼل ل‬mind)‫( ػ فؼل لَ ماػٍ ىکل مـٍ امتؼواليږي هګـ‬Please)
 [Would + like] is used to express a wish.

.‫[ ػ ُيلي(اؿفّ) لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Would + like]
Ex: I would like to see you after. .‫ فٍ غْاړم ّؿّمتَ لَ تامـٍ ّّيٌن‬:‫هخال‬
 [Wish + like] is used to express wish desire.

.‫[ ػ اؿهاى يا اؿفّ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Wish + like]
Ex: I wish! I would pass the exam. .‫ کاىکي فٍ پَ اهتضاى کي کاهياب ىْي ّاي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He wishes ! He would visit Kandahar. .‫ کاىکي! فٍ ػّتاؿٍ کٌؼُاؿ تَ تللي ّاي‬:‫هخال‬
81
 “Ought to”:‫تايذ‬
“Ought to” indicates a command or instruction.
.‫“ اهـــــ يا ُــــؼايــت تــيــا ًـــْي‬Ought to”
Ex: I Ought to tell him the fact. .‫ فٍ تايؼ ُغَ تَ صميمت ّّاين‬:‫هخال‬
Formula of “Ought to” ‫“ فْؿهْل‬Ought to” ‫ػ‬

Subject + Ought to + V1 + Object / Complement. (+) ‫ماػٍ صالت‬
You ought to learn English. .‫تامي تايؼ اًګليني فػٍ کړي‬
Ought + Subject + to + V1 + Object / Complement? (?) ‫مْالي صال‬
Ought You to learn English? ‫آيا تامي تايؼ اًګليني فػٍ کړي؟‬
Subject + Ought + not + to + V1 + Object / Complement. (-) ‫هٌفي صالت‬
You ought not to learn English. .‫تامي تايؼ اًګليني فػٍ ًَ کړي‬
Ought + Subject + not + to + V1 + Object / Complement -? (?/-)‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
Ought you not to learn English - ? ‫ ؟‬- ‫آيا تَ تايؼ اًګليني فػٍ ًَ کړي‬
Oughtn‟t + Subject + V1 + Object/ Complement -? (?/-) ‫هٌفي مْالي صالت‬
Oughtn‟t you learn English -? ‫؟‬-‫آيا تَ تايؼ اًګليني فػٍ ًَ کړي‬
 “Ought to” express a weak necessity.

.‫“ يْ ّؼيف ّـّؿت تياًْي‬Ought to”
Ex: You ought to buy a car. .‫ تَ تايؼ يْ هْټـ ّاعلي‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Students ought to have a pen and notebook. .‫ فػٍ کًّْکي تايؼ للن اّ کتاتچَ ّلـي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He ought not to neglect in his duties. .‫ ُغَ تايؼ پَ عپلْ ّظايفْ کي غفلت ًَّ کړي‬:‫هخال‬
Note: “Should” is more commonly than “Ought to”.

.)‫“ ډيـامتؼواليږي‬Should”( . ٍ‫“ څغَ ډيـ هؼوْلي ػ‬Ought to” َ‫“ ل‬Should”
Semi modal auxiliary verbs

ًَْ‫ًيوَ ًوًَْ يي کْهکي فعـل‬
There are three semi modal auxiliary verbs in English language which
consist in: Need , Dare and Used to.
ّ‫ ا‬Dare ,Used to :َ‫ پَ اًګليني ژتَ کي ػؿي ًيوَ ًوًَْ يی کْهکي فؼلًَْ ػي چي ػثاؿت ػي ل‬:َ‫ػثاؿت ػي ل‬
.َ‫ څغ‬Need
Semi modal auxiliary verbs ًَْ‫ًيوَ ًوًَْ يي کْهکي فؼـل‬
Need Dare Used to
82
‫ضشّست لشل‪ ،‬احتياج لشل‪ ،‬احتياج ‪ “Need”:‬‬
‫‪“Need” is used to show a necessity ;it sometimes works as a ordinary verb‬‬

‫‪, sometimes as a modal auxiliary verb and sometimes as a noun.‬‬
‫‪ّ “Need‬ـّؿت اّصارت تياًْي؛ ُغَ ځيٌي ّعت ػ اٍلي فؼل پَ صيج کاؿکْي ؛ځيٌي ّعت‬
‫ػ کْهکي فؼل پَ صيج کاؿکْي ؛ اّ ځيٌي ّعت ػ يْ امن پَ صيج کاؿ کْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: He need not go there. (auxiliary).‬‬ ‫هخال‪ّ :‬ـّؿت ًيتَ چي ُغَ ُلتَ الړ ىي‪(.‬کْهکي)‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I need a pen. (ordinary).‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ يٍْ للن تَ ّـّؿت لـم‪(.‬اٍلي)‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: He is need of money.(noun).‬‬ ‫هخال‪ُ :‬غَ ػ پينْ هضتاد ػٍ‪(.‬امن)‪.‬‬
‫ًْټ‪ :‬کلَ چي ػ ”‪ “Need‬فؼـل پَ رولَ کي يْافي اّيا لَ هَؼؿ مـٍ يْځاي امتؼوال ىي اٍلي‬
‫فؼل ػٍ اّ کلَ چي پَ مْالي يا هٌفي ىکل امتؼوال ىي تيا کْهکي فؼـل ػٍ؛ کَ چيـي پَ هخثتَ رولَ‬
‫کي لَ تل فؼـل مـٍ ؿاىي ځيٌي ّعت ػ امــن پَ صيج کاؿ کْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I need a pen to write.(ordinary).‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ ػ ليکلْ لپاؿٍ يْ للن تَ ّـّؿت لـم‪(.‬اٍلي)‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Need he come? (auxiliary).‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬آيا ُغَ ؿاغي؟ (کْهکي)‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: She is need of dress.(noun).‬‬ ‫هخال‪ُ :‬غَ(هًْج) ػ لثاك هضتارَ ػٍ‪(.‬امن)‪.‬‬
‫جشئت لشل ‪ “Dare”:‬‬
‫‪“Dare” is used to show courage and bravery.‬‬

‫”‪ “Dare‬ػ رـئت اّ فړّؿتيا لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪ “Dare” is used both as ordinary and auxiliary verbs.‬‬

‫”‪ُ “Dare‬ن ػ اٍلي اّ ُن ػ کْهکي فؼلًْْ پَ صيج امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I dare till him the matter. (auxiliary).‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ پَ رـئت مـٍ ُغَ تَ هّْْع ّاين‪(.‬کْهکي)‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: He dare not / daren‟t come in front of us. (auxiliary).‬‬

‫هخال‪ُ :‬غَ رـئت ًَ کْي فهْږ هغتَ ؿاىي‪( .‬کْهکي)‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: She did not dare to talk me. (ordinary).‬‬ ‫هخال‪ُ :‬غي رـئت ًَّ کړ لَ هامـٍ عثـي ّکړي‪(.‬اٍلي)‪.‬‬
‫عاتق ‪ ،‬قثالً ‪ “ Used to”:‬‬
‫‪a) When (used to) is followed by the simple form of the verb , means‬‬
‫‪(before) or (ago).‬‬
‫کلَ چي )‪ (used to‬ػ فؼل لَ ماػٍ ىکل مـٍ امتؼوال ىي ػ )هغکي ( يا )پغْا ( هؼٌی ّؿکْي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Amran used to work in a bank.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ػوـاى پغْا پَ يٍْ تاًک کي کاؿ کاٍّ‪.‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
b) When (used to) used with to be verb, followed by the (ing) form means
Habit.
‫( ىکل ػالٍّ ىي‬ing)‫( فؼل مـٍ امتؼوال ىي اّ ّؿّمتَ لَ ُغَ ػ‬to be) ‫( ػ‬used to) ‫کلَ چي‬
.‫ػ ػاػت هؼٌي ّؿکْي‬
Ex: I am used to living in Kabul. .‫ فٍ پَ کاتل کي لَ ژًّؼ کْلْ مـٍ ػاػت ين‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He was used to playing cricket. .ٍّ ‫ ُغَ ػ کـکيټ لَ لْتي مـٍ ػاػت‬:‫هخال‬
c) { Get + used to} is also used to show habit.

.‫ { ُوؼاؿًګَ ػاػت تياًْي‬Get + used to}
Ex: You will soon get used to living in the city.
.‫ تَ تَ ژؿ پَ ښاؿ کي ػ ژًّؼ کْلْ مـٍ ػاػت ىي‬:‫هخال‬
Noun
‫اعــــن‬
Noun is a word which is used as the name some person , place , place or
animal or thing.
.‫ صيْاى اّيا ىي ػ ًْهْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬، ‫ هکاى‬، ٌ‫امــن ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي ػ ىغ‬
Ex: Obaid , Wardak ، Asad , cow…etc. .‫ اًّْؿ‬...‫ غـْا‬، ‫ امؼ‬، ‫ ّؿػک‬، ‫ ػثيؼ‬:‫هخال‬
 Nouns according to physical existence touchable and seen are divided in to

two parts:
:‫اعوًَْ د فضيکي ّ جْد د لوظ قاتليت اّ ليذّ پَ هطاتق پَ دّّ تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬ 
1) Concrete Nouns. ًَْ‫د رات اعــو‬
2) Abstract Nouns. ًَْ‫د هعـٌی اعــو‬
1) Concrete Nouns: ًَْ‫د رات اعو‬

Concrete noun is a noun which has foreign or physical existence and
we can usually touch it.
‫ػ ؽات امن ُغَ امن ػٍ چي عاؿري يا فقيکي ّرْػ ّلـي اّ هْږ ُغَ هؼوْالً ُغَ لول کْالي‬
.ْ‫ى‬
Ex: Stone , earth , house , boy …etc. .‫ اّػامي ًْؿ‬...‫ ُلک‬،‫ کْؿ‬، َ‫ ځوک‬، ٍ‫ ډتـ‬:‫هخال‬
84
Concrete nouns are divided into five parts:

:‫د رات اعوًَْ پَ پٌځْ تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
1. Proper noun. ‫عاً امـن‬
2. Common noun. ‫ػام امـن‬
3. Collective noun. ‫ػ روغ امـن‬
4. Material noun. ‫ػ رٌل امـن‬
5. Compound noun. ‫هـکة امـن‬
1. Proper Noun ‫خاؿ اعــن‬

Proper noun is the name of some proper person or place.
.)‫( پَ عاً ىغٌ يا عاً ځاي تاًؼي ػاللت کْی‬.ٍ‫عاً امـن ػ عاً ىغٌ يا ځاي ًْم ػ‬
Ex: Afghanistan , Kandahar , Ahmad Shah Ba Ba , mirwis Nika…etc.
.‫ اّػامي ًْؿ‬....َ‫ هيـّيل ًيک‬، ‫ اصوؼ ىاٍ تاتا‬، ‫ کٌؼُاؿ‬، ‫ افغاًنتاى‬:‫هخال‬
2. Common Noun ‫عـام اعـــن‬

Common noun is a name given in common to every person or thing in
the same class or kind.
َ‫ ( ػام امن ُغ‬.‫ػـام امـن ُغَ امـن ػٍ چي ُـ ىغٌ يا ىي تَ پغپلَ ًْع يا ټْلګي کي ػام ّي‬
.)‫امن ػٍ چي پَ ُوزٌل ىغٌ يا ىي تاًؼي ػاللت کْي‬
Ex: Child , school ,class ,book…etc. .‫ اًّْؿ‬...‫ کتاب‬، ‫ ټْلګۍ‬، ‫ ښًّْځۍ‬، ‫ هاىْم‬:‫هخال‬
3. Collective Noun ‫د جوع اعــــن‬
Collective noun is the name of a collection of persons ,things , or

animals.
.‫ ىياًْ يا صيْاًاتْ ػ ډلي پَ ًْم(ػاللت) کْي‬، ٍْ‫ػ روغ امـن ػ اىغا‬
Ex: Family , tribe , nation …etc. .‫اًّْؿ‬... ‫ هلت‬، َ‫ لثيل‬، ‫ کْؿًۍ‬:‫هخال‬
4. Material Noun ‫د جٌظ اعـــن‬

Material noun is a noun which shows what substance is a noun made
of.
.ٍ‫ػ رٌل امــن ُغَ امـن ػٍ چي ښيي چي يْ امــن لَ څَ ىي څغَ رْړىْي ػ‬
Ex: Wood , Milke ,Gold ,water…etc. .‫اًّْؿ‬...َ‫ اّت‬،‫ مـٍ فؿ‬،‫ىيؼي‬، ‫ لـګی‬:‫هخال‬
85
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
By adding article (the) before material nouns , they are turned to
common nouns.
ًْْ‫ ُغـْي پَ پَ ػـام امـوـ‬،ٍ‫( ػ تؼــيف تْؿي پَ فياتْلْ مــ‬the) ‫ػ رٌـل ػ امــن څغَ ػ هغَ ػ‬
.‫تـؼلـيـږي‬
Ex: We are need of food. ( material noun).
.)‫ (ػ رٌل ًْم‬.ّ‫ هْږ ػ غؾا تَ اړتيا لـ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The food of our country is delicious. (common noun).

.)‫ (ػام امــن‬.ٍ‫ فهْږ ػ ُيْاػ غؾا عًْؼّؿٍ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
5. Compound Noun ‫هشکة اعـــن‬

Compound noun is a noun which is formed by the combination of
two or mor than two nouns.
.‫هـکة امـن ُغَ امن ػٍ چي ػ ػّّ يا لَ ػّّ څغَ لَ فياتْ امــوًْْ رْړىْي ّي‬
Ex: Shopkeeper , Drug Store , Candy shop…etc.
Noun Noun Noun Noun Noun Noun
.‫اّػامي ًْؿ‬....‫ ػ ىيـًي فـّىي ػّکاى‬، ‫ ػؿهلتْى‬، ‫ ػّکاى ػاؿ‬:‫هخال‬
 Compound Nouns are divided in to three parts:

:‫هشکة اعوًَْ پَ دسي تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
a) Simple Compound Noun ‫عادٍ هشکة اعن‬

Simple compound noun is a noun which is written as one word.
.‫ماػٍ هـکة امن ُغَ امن ػٍ چي ػ يْي کلوي پَ څيـ ليکل کيږي‬
Ex: Shortcut.
b) Open Compound Noun ‫خالؿ هشکة اعن‬

Open compound noun is a noun which is written as two words.
.‫عالً هـکة امن ُغَ امن ػٍ چي ػ ػّّ کلوْ پَ څيـ ليکل کيږي‬
Ex Book keeper , House work ,…etc.
86
c) Hyphenated Compound Noun ‫فاصلَ لشًّکي هشکة اعن‬

Hyphenated Compound noun is a noun which is separated by hyphen.
.‫فاٍلَ لـًّکي هـکة امن ُغَ امن ػٍ چي ػ فاٍلي پَ ّامطَ رال ىْي ّي‬
Ex: Father – in – law , Commander – in – chief.
2) Abstract Noun ‫د هـعـٌـی اعـــن‬

Abstract noun is the noun which doesn‟t have any foreign or physical
existence and can not be touchable.
.‫ػ هؼٌی امــن ُغَ امــن ػٍ چي عاؿري يا فقيکي ّرْػ ًلـي اّ ػ لول لاتليت ُن ًلـي‬
Ex: Bravery , Darkness , Knowledge…etc. .‫اًّْؿ‬...َُْ‫ پ‬،‫تاؿيکي‬،‫ فړٍ ّؿتْب‬:‫هخال‬
Note: ‫ًـْټ‬
Abstract nouns are formed as follow: ‫د هعٌی اعوًَْ پَ الًذي ډّل تؾکيليږي‬
 From Adjectives َ‫لَ صفتًْْ څخ‬
Ex: Kind – Kindness. .‫ هِـتاى ــ هِـتاًي‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Brave – Bravery. .‫ فړٍ ّؿ ــ فړٍ ّؿتْب‬:‫هخال‬
 From verbs َ‫لَ فعـلًْْ څخ‬
Ex: Obey – Obedience. .ًَ ٍْ‫ لثلْل ــ لثل‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Grow – Groth. .ًَ‫ لْيؼل ــ لْيؼ‬:‫هخال‬
 From common nouns َ‫لَ عـام اعــوـًْْ څخ‬
Ex: Child – Childhood. .‫ هاىْم ــ هاىتْب‬:‫هخال‬
Note: The names arts and sciences are also abstract nouns.
.‫ ػ ٌُـًّْ اّ ػلْهْ ًْهًَْ ُن ػ هؼٌي اموًَْ ػي‬:‫ًْټ‬
Ex: Math , Chemistry , Grammar…etc. .‫اًّْؿ‬...‫ ګـاهـ‬، ‫ کيويا‬، ‫ ؿياّي‬:‫هخال‬
87
Noun Gender
)‫د اعن جٌغيت(ًْعيت‬
A noun is always considered according to being male , Femal or neuter.
.‫ هًْج ّالي اّيا عٌخی ّالي لَ لضاظَ مٌزْل کيږي‬، ‫امـن ُوييَ ػ هؾکـ ّالي‬
Or: The idea of gender is determining a noun according to male, female
or being neuter.
.‫هًْج ّالي اّيا عٌخی ّالي لَ لضاظَ تؼيٌْل ػي‬، ‫ لَ رٌل څغَ هٌظْؿ ػ امن ػ هؾکـّالي‬:‫اّيا‬
Ex: Man , womane , chair…etc. .‫ اًّْؿ‬... ‫ چْکۍ‬، َ‫ ښځ‬، ‫ مړي‬:‫هخال‬
1. Masculine Gender ‫هزکش جٌـغيـت‬

A noun which denotes a male human or animal is called masculine
gender.
.‫ُغَ امن چي پَ هؾکـ اًناى يا صيْاى تاًؼي ػاللت کْي ػ هؾکـ رٌنيت پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Ex: Father , boy , lion , king…etc. .‫ اًّْؿ‬... ٍ‫ پاػىا‬، ‫ فهـي‬، ‫ ُلک‬، ‫ پالؿ‬:‫هخال‬
2. Feminine Gender ‫هًْث جٌغيت‬

A noun which denotes a female himan or animal is called feminine
gender.
.‫ُغَ امن چي پَ هًْج(ښځيٌَ) اًناى يا صيْاى تاًؼي ػاللت کْي ػ هًْج رٌنيت پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Ex: Mother , sister , fox …etc. .‫ اًّْؿ‬... ٍ‫ ګيؼړ‬،‫ عْؿ‬،‫ هْؿ‬:‫هخال‬
3. Common Gender ‫عـام جـٌغـيت‬

A noun which denotes both male and female human and animal is
called common gender.
.‫ُغَ امن چي پَ هؾکـاّهًْج اًناى اّصيْاى ػّاړّ تاًؼی ػاللت ّکړي ػ ػام امن پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Ex: Child , student ,teacher , animal, …etc. .‫اًّْؿ‬...،‫صيْاى‬، ‫ ښًّْکۍ‬،‫فػٍ کًّْکي‬، ‫ هاىْم‬:‫هخال‬
4. Neuter Gender ‫خـٌثی جٌـغيت‬

A noun which denotes neither male nor female (a thing without life) is
called neuter gender.
‫ُغَ امن چي ًَ پَ هؾکـ اًَّ ُن پَ هًْج(ُغَ ىي چي تي ماٍ ّي) ػاللت ّکړي ػ عٌخی رٌنيت‬
.‫پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Ex: Stone , Glass , book, …etc. .‫ اًّْؿ‬...، ‫ کتاب‬، ‫ ګالك‬، ٍ‫ ډتـ‬:‫هخال‬
88
Pluralization of nouns
‫د اعـوـًْْ جوع تٌذي‬
The general way for pluralization of noun is adding (s) or (es) at the
end of the singular nouns.
َ‫( لَ ػالٍّ کْلْ څغ‬es) ‫( يا‬s) ‫ػ امن ػ روغ تٌؼي لپاؿٍ ػوْهي ٓـيمَ ػ هفـػ امـن پَ اعيـ کي ػ‬
.ٍ‫ػثاؿت ػ‬
Ex: :‫هثال‬
Book – Books. .ًَْ‫کتاب ــ کتات‬
Watch – Watches. .ًَْ‫ماػت ــ ماػت‬
Rules of addind (s) or (es)

‫( عالٍّ کْلْ قاعذي‬es) ‫( اّيا‬s) ‫د‬
1) Nouns ending in ( s ,ss ,ch ,sh ,x , z) take (es) in the plural form.
.‫( اعتياؿّي‬es) ‫ ( عتن ىْي ّي پَ روغ ىکل کي‬s ,ss ,ch ,sh ,x , z) َ‫ُغَ اموًَْ چي پ‬
Ex: :‫هثال‬
 Box – Boxes. .ًَْ‫تکل ــ تکن‬
 Church – Churches. .‫کلينا ــ کلينا ګاًي‬
 Class – Classes. .ًَْ‫ٌٍف ــ ٌٍفـ‬
 Fish – Fishes. ‫کة ــ کثاى‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
When (ch) give the sound of (k) at the end of the nouns, add only (s)
in the plural form.
.‫( اعتياؿّي‬s) ‫( غـږ ّؿکړي پَ روغ ىکل کي يْافي‬k) ‫( ػ امن پَ اعيـ کي ػ‬ch) ‫کلَ چي‬
Ex: Monarch – Monarchs. .‫ پاػىاٍ ــ پاػىاُاى‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Stomach – Stomachs. .‫ هؼؼٍ ــ هؼؼي‬:‫هخال‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
Nouns ending in a single (z), it is doubled before adding (es).
.‫() ډتليږي‬z)( َ‫( لَ اّافَ کْلْ هغکي ُغ‬es) ‫( عتويږي ػ‬z) ‫ پَ هفـػ‬″‫چي‬″ ًَْ‫ُغَ امو‬
Ex: Quiz – Quizzes.
89
‫‪2) Nouns ending in (y) following a consonant ,change (y) into (I) and‬‬
‫‪than add (es).‬‬
‫ُغَ اموًَْ چي پَ )‪ (y‬تاًؼي عتن ىْي اّ ػ يْتي غږٍ تْؿي پَ تؼـمية ؿاغلي ّي( ػ )‪ (y‬لَ‬
‫تْؿي هغکـي يْ تي غږٍ تْؿي ؿاغـلي ّي) ‪ً″‬ـْ‪ (y) ″‬پَ )‪ (I‬تاًؼي تؼليږي اّ ّؿّمـتَ )‪(es‬‬
‫ّؿػالٍّ کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Army – Armies.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬لښکـ ــ لښکـي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: City – Cities.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ښاؿ ــ ښاؿًَّ‪.‬‬
‫‪3) Nouns ending in (y) following a vowel take only (s) without any change.‬‬
‫ُغَ اموًَْ چي پَ )‪ (y‬عتن ىْي ّي ( اّلَ ُغَ څغَ هغکي يْ غږلـًّکي تْؿي ؿاغلي ّي)‬
‫تي لَ کْم تغيـ څغَ ػ )‪ (s‬تْؿي اعتياؿّي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Play – Plays.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬لْتَ ــ لْتي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Day – Days.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ّ :‬ؿځ ــ ّؿځي‪.‬‬
‫‪4) Nouns ending in (O) following a consonant take (es) in the plural form.‬‬
‫ُغَ اموًَْ چي پَ )‪ (O‬عتن ىْي ّي (اّ لَ ُغَ هغکي يْ تي غږٍ تْؿی ؿاغلي ّي) پَ روغ‬
‫صالت کي )‪ (es‬اعتياؿّي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Negro – Negroes.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬تْؿپْمت ــ تْؿپْمتي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Hero – Heroes.‬‬ ‫هخال‪:‬لِـهاى ــ لِـهاًاى‪.‬‬
‫اعـتـثـٌـاّي ‪ Exceptions‬‬
‫‪ Kilo – Kilos.‬‬
‫‪ Photo – Photos.‬‬
‫‪ Piano – Pianos.‬‬
‫‪5) Nouns ending in (O) following a vowel take (s) without any change.‬‬
‫ُغَ اموًَْ چي پَ )‪ (O‬عتن ىْي ّي (اّلَ )‪ (O‬څغَ هغکي غږلـًّکي تْؿي ؿاغلي ّي) تي‬
‫لَ کْم تغيـ څغَ )‪ (s‬اعتياؿّي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Radio – Radioes.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ؿاػيْ ــ ؿاػيْ ګاًي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Vedio – Vedioes.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ّ :‬ػيْ ــ ّػيْ ګاًی‪.‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
6) Nouns ending in (f) or (fe) change (f) or (fe) to (v) than add (es).
َ‫( تاًؼي تؼليږي ّؿّمت‬v) َ‫( پ‬fe) ‫( يا‬f) ، ‫( تاًؼي عتن ىْي ّي‬fe) ‫( اّيا‬f) َ‫ُغَ اموًَْ چي پ‬
.‫ اّافَ کيږي‬″‫ّؿ‬″ (es)
Ex: Wife – Wives. .‫ هيـهي ــ هيـهٌي‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Leaf – Leaves. .‫ ّؿلَ ــ ّؿلي‬:‫هخال‬
 Exceptions ‫اعـتـثـٌـاّي‬
 Proof – Proofs. .ًَْ‫حثْت ــ حثْت‬
 Chief – Chiefs. . ‫ؿيل ــ ؿيناى‬
 Roof – Roofs. .ًَْ‫تام ــ تاه‬
7) Nouns ending in (man) except of the proper nouns like German , we

change (man) in (men) in the plural form.
َ‫ ػ روؼي پ‬German َ‫( عتن ىْي ّي ػعاٍْ اموًْْ پَ امتـخـٌا لک‬man) َ‫ُغَ اموًَْ چی پ‬
.‫ تؼليږي‬″‫تاًؼي‬″ (men) َ‫( پ‬man) ‫ىکل کي‬
Ex: :‫هثال‬
 Man – Men. .‫مړی ــ مړي‬
 Fisherman – Fishermen. .‫کة ًيًْکی ــ کة ًيًّْکي‬
8) The compound nouns are usually pluralized in the last noun.

.‫هـکة اموًَْ هؼوْالً پَ اعيـي امـن کي روغ کيږی‬
Ex: Drug store – Drug stores. .ًًَْْ‫ ػؿهلتْى ــ ػؿهلت‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Forming land – forming lands. .‫ کـًيقٍ ځوکَ ــ کـًيقٍ ځوکي‬:‫هخال‬
9) Compound nouns separated by preposition, are usually pluralized in

the main noun.
‫ تـکيثي اموًَْ چي ػ اّافي تْؿی پَ ّامطَ رالىْي ّي هؼوْالً ػ ُغَ اٍلي امن روغ‬″َ‫ُغ‬″
.‫تٌؼي کيږي‬
Ex: Father in law – Fathers in law. .‫ عنـ ــ عنـاى‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Sister in law – Sisters in law. .‫ ّؿيٌؼاؿٍ ــ ّؿيٌؼاؿي‬:‫هخال‬
91
10) Eight nouns form their oplural by a vowel change.

.‫اتَ اموًَْ عپل ػ روؼي ىکل ػ يْ غږ لـًّکي تْؿي ػ تغيـ پَ ّامطَ تيکيلْي‬
Ex: :‫هثال‬
 Foot – Feet. .‫پښَ ــ پښي‬
 Tooth – Teeth. .ًَْ‫غاښ ــ غاښ‬
 Mouse – Mice. .‫هْږک ــ هْږکاى‬
 Goose – Geese. .‫لاف ــ لافاى‬
 Man – Men. .‫مړی ــ مړي‬
 Woman – Women. .‫ښځَ ــ ښځي‬
 Louse – Lice. .‫هږٍ – هږي‬
11) Some of the nouns always written in the plural form , because they
are paired.
.‫ځيٌی اموًَْ ُوييَ پَ روغ ىکل ليکل کيږي ځکَ ُغْي رْړٍ(رفت) ػی‬
Ex: Shoes , Gloves , …etc. .‫ اّػامي ًْؿ‬...، ًَْ‫ ػمتکي‬، ًَْ‫ تْټ‬:‫هخال‬
12) Some nouns are irregulary pluralized becsuse they are originally
Latin.
.‫ لـي‬″َ‫ؿيښ‬″‫ځيٌي اموًَْ پَ تي لاػؼٍ ډّل روغ تٌؼي کيږي ځکَ ُغْي پَ صميمت کي اليتيٌي‬
Ex: :‫هثال‬
Datum – Data ‫آالع ــ آالػات‬
Child – Children ‫هاىْم ــ هاىْهاى‬
Ox – Oxen ‫غْيی ــ غْاياى‬
Medium – Media ‫ؿماًَ ــ ؿماًي‬
13) The letters , numbers and other symbols are pluralized by adding („s).
.‫„( ػ ػالٍّ کْلْ پَ ّامطَ روغ کيږي‬s) ‫ ػؼػًَّ اّ ًْؿ موثْلًَْ ػ‬، ‫تْؿي‬
Ex: 8 – 8‟s.
Ex: M – M‟s.
14) Some nouns are plural in form but singular in meaning.

.)‫ځيٌي اموًَْ پَ ىکل کي روغ هګـ پَ هؼٌي کي هفـػ ػٍ(پَ هؼٌي کي پَ هفـػ امن ػاللت کْي‬
Ex: :‫هثال‬
Mathematics ‫ػ ؿياّي ػلن‬
Politics ‫ػ ميامت ػلن‬
Ethics ‫ػ اعالق ػلن‬
92
Sentence
َ‫جـوـلـ‬
A group of related words which has a subject and predicate and makes
a complete sense is called sentence.
َ‫يْ ګــّپ ػ کلوـْ چـي ػ هثتؼا اّعـثـ لــًّکي ّي اّ يـٍْ کاهلَ هؼـٌي تيکيل کړي ػ رـولي پ‬
.‫ًْم ياػيږي‬
Or: A group of words that gives complete sense is called sentence.
.‫ ػ کليوْ يْ ګـّپ چې کاهل هفِـْم ّؿکْي رولَ تلـل کيـږي‬:‫اّيا‬
Ex: Shafiq studies English every day. .‫ ىفيك ُـٍ ّؿځ اًګليني هطالؼَ کْي‬:‫هخال‬
 The sentences are divided into three parts in form:

:‫جولي د ؽکل لَ هخي پَ دسي تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
1. Simple sentences. ‫ماػٍ رولي‬
2. Complex sentences. ‫پيـچلي رولي‬
3. Compound sentences. ‫هـکثي رولي‬
1. Simple Sentences ‫عادٍ جولي‬

A sentence which has one subject and a predicate or has only a finite
verb is called simple sentence.
‫ يْ هضؼّػ فؼـل ّلـي ػ مـاػٍ رـولي پَ ًْم‬″‫ُـن‬″ ‫ُـغَ رولَ چـي يْ هثـتؼا اّ يْ عـثـ ّلــي اّيا‬
.‫ياػيږي‬
Ex: I play football every morning. .‫ فٍ ُـ مِاؿ ػ فْټثال لْتَ کْم‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Jalal went to Kandahar. .‫ رالل کٌؼُاؿ تَ ّالړ‬:‫هخال‬
2. Complex Sentences ‫پيـچـلي جولي‬

A sentence which has one principale and one or more than one sub-
ordinating clauses is called complex sentence .
.‫ُغَ رولَ چي يٍْ يا لَ يٍْ څغَ فياتَ فـػي لْيَ ّلـي ػ پيـچلي رولي پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Ex: This is Ahmad which studies every night.

.‫ ػغَ اصوؼ ػٍ چي ُـٍ ىپَ هطالؼَ کْي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Noor Ahmad is a teacher who teaches well.

.‫ ًْؿاصوؼ يْ ښًّْکي ػٍ چي ډيـ ښَ تؼؿيل کْي‬:‫هخال‬
93
3. Compound sentences ‫هشکثي جولي‬
When two simple sentences are joined by a conjunction , is called

compound sentence.
.‫کلَ چي ػٍّ ماػٍ رولي ػ يْ ؿتطي تْؿي پَ ّامطَ ٍّلي ىي ػ هـکثي رولي پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Ex: Samiullah is a teacher but Sifatullah is an engineer.

.ٍ‫ مويغ هللا يْ ښًّْکي ػٍ هګـ ٍفت هللا يْ اًزيٌـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I can speak English and Ahmad is too.
.)‫ فٍ پَ اًګليني ژتَ عثـي کْالي ىن اّ اصوؼ يی ُن (کْالي ىي‬:‫هخال‬
The sentences are divided into four parts in meaning:

:‫جولي د هعٌي (هفِْم) لَ هخي پَ څلْسّ تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
1) Declarative Sentence ‫خثشي جولي‬

A sentences which expresses a statement or assertion, is called declarat-
ive sentence.
.‫ُغَ رولَ چي تياًيَ يا عثـ تياى کړي ػ عثـي رولي پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Ex: I saw Karrim yesterday. .‫ ها تيـٍ ّؿځ کـين ّليؼ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: I can not speak Urdu. .‫ فٍ پَ اؿػّ عثـي ًين کْالي‬:‫هخال‬
2) Imperative Sentences ‫اهـشيَ جولي‬

A sentence which expresses a command ,request or suggestion, is called
imperative sentence.
.‫ غْښتـٌَ اّيا پـييـٌِـاػ تـياًـْي ػ اهــيـَ روـلي پـَ ًـْم يـاػيـږي‬،‫ُغَ رولَ چي اهــ‬
Ex: Please close the door. .ٍ‫ لطفا ً ػؿّافٍ تٌؼٍ کړ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: May I use your pen? ‫ متا للن امتؼوال کړم؟‬″‫چي‬″ ٍ‫ ػ‬″ٍ‫اراف‬″ :‫هخال‬
Ex: Don‟t go away. .‫ لطفا ً لـي هَ ځۍ‬:‫هخال‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
In the imperative sentences the subject is omitted because it is known.
.ٍ‫پَ اهـيَ رولْ کي هثتؼا لَ هٌځَ ّړل کيږي ځکَ ُغَ هؼلْم ػ‬
Ex: You come here please. .َ‫ هِـتاًي ّکړٍ ػلتَ ؿاى‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Come here please. .َ‫ هِـتاًي ّکړٍ ػلتَ ؿاى‬:‫هخال‬
94
Polite request ٌَ‫هاد تاًَ غْښت‬

The following combinations are used to express polite requests:
:‫ػ هاػتاًَ غْښتٌي ػ تياى لپاؿٍ الًؼي تـکيثًَْ امتؼواليږي‬
 Would you please? ‫آيا لطفا ً تَ؟‬

Ex: Would you please the room? ‫ آيا لطفا ً تَ آاق پاک کړي؟‬:‫هخال‬
 Would you mind? ‫آيا هوکٌَ دٍ تي صحوتَ؟‬

Ex: Would you mind ringing me? ‫ آيا هوکٌَ ػٍ تي فصوتَ ؿاتَ فًګ ُّّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
 Will you please? ‫آيا لطفا ً تَ؟‬

Ex: Will you please be quiet? ‫ آيا لطفا ً تَ عاهْىَ ّ اّمي؟‬:‫هخال‬
 Affirmative imperatives sentences ‫هثثتي اهشيَ جولي‬

Ex: Come here. .َ‫ ػلتَ ؿاى‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Please look me. .ٍ‫ لطفا ً هاتَ ّګْؿ‬:‫هخال‬
 Negative imperative sentences ‫هٌفي اهشيَ جولي‬

Ex: Don‟t sit down. .ٌَ‫ هَ کـښـي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Don‟t speak loud. .ٍْ‫ تيقي عثـي هَ ک‬:‫هخال‬
Analysis of a sentence structure َ‫د يْي جولي د جْړښت تجضي‬
 Subject )‫(هثتـذا‬
.ٍ‫(هثتؼا) هغکي ػ فاػلي ّويـًّْ پَ تضج کي هکول تيـيش ىْي ػ‬
 Predicate )‫(خـثـش‬
Predicate is a part of sentence which tells something about subject ,
including the verb up to end of the sentence forms predicate.
ٍ‫ ػ فؼل پَ ىوْل تـ اعيـ‬، ‫ ّؿکْي‬″‫هؼلْهات‬″ ‫عثـ ػ رولي ُغَ تـعَ ػٍ چي ػ هثتؼا پَ تاؿٍ کي‬
.‫ رولَ عثـ تيکيلْي‬″َ‫ټْل‬″
95
 The words which are used in predicate are as follow:

:‫ُغَ کلوي چي پَ خثش کي اعتعواليږی پَ الًذی ډّل دي‬
1. The essential word in the predicate is verb that can be either transitive
or intransitive.
.‫پَ عثـ کي هِوَ کلوَ فؼل ػٍ چي کيؼاي ىي الفهي ّي يا هتؼؼي ّي‬
Ex: Ahmad broke the chair. .ٍ‫ اصوؼ چْکۍ هاتَ کړ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The boby cries every night. .‫ هاىْم ُـٍ ىپَ ژاړي‬:‫هخال‬
2. Adverb or Adverb phrase which qualifies the verb.

.‫ليؼ يا ليؼي ػثاؿت چي فؼل هؼيٌْي‬
Ex: Shbeer spoke very clearly. .‫ ىثيـ ډيـ پَ ّا ّش ډّل عثـي کْي‬:‫هخال‬
3. Infinitives and Gerund. .‫هَؼؿ اّ هَؼؿي امن‬

Ex: I like swimming. .‫ فٍ الهثْ ٌَُّ عْښْم‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: They want to go. .‫ ّالړ ىي‬″‫چي‬″ ‫ ُغْي غْاړي‬:‫هخال‬
4. Object: which can be either a noun or pronoun.

.‫ چي کْالي ىي امن يا ّويـ ّي‬:‫هفعـْل‬
Ex: I like him. .‫ فٍ ُغَ عْښْم‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Baseer wrote a letter. .َ‫ تَيـ يْ عٔ ّليک‬:‫هخال‬
 Complement ‫تکويل کًّْکي‬

.ٍ‫تکويل کًّْکي هغکي هکول تيـيش ىْي ػ‬
3) Interrogative sentences ‫پْښتًّْکي (عْالي) جولي‬

A sentence which asks a question is called interrogative sentence.
.‫ُغَ رولَ چي مْال پْښتي ػ پْښتًّْکي رولي پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
An interrogative sentence is formed by three ways
:‫پَ پْښتًْکي جولَ پَ دسيْ طشيقْ تؾکيليږی‬
1. By using (Wh) questions at the beginning of the sentences. [Direct
question].
.]‫ [هنتمين مْال‬.ٍ‫( پَ امتؼوالْلْ مـ‬Wh) ‫ػ رولْ پَ مـکي ػ‬
Ex: What is your job? ‫ متامي ّظيفَ څَ ىي ػٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
96
2. By using auxiliary verbs at the beginning of the sentences.[indirect

question].
.]‫[غيـ هنتمين مْال‬.ٍ‫ػ رولْ پَ مـکي ػ کْهکي فؼلًْْ پَ امتؼوال مـ‬
Ex: Can you play chess? ‫ آيا تَ ػ مطـًذ لْتَ کْالي ىي؟‬:‫هخال‬
4) Exclamatory sentences ‫ًـذائـــي(غږي) جـوـلـي‬

A sentence which expresses a strong feeling or emotion is called
exclamatory.
.‫ُغَ رولي چي يْ لْي اصناك يا ُيزاى تياى کړي ػ ًؼايَ رولي پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Ex: What a beautiful car it is! !ٍ‫ څَ يْ ښکلي هْټـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: How awful he acted! !‫ څْهـٍ تؼ چلٌؼ يي ّکړ‬:‫هخال‬
Gerund
‫د هصذساعن‬
Gerund is the (ing) form of a verb which does the work of a noun.
.‫( ىکل ػٍ چي ػ يْ امــن کاؿ مـتَ ؿمْي‬ing) ‫ػ هَؼؿامن ػ فؼـل‬
Gerund has both the force of a noun and a verb.
.‫ لـي‬″َ‫ّظيف‬″ ‫ػ هَؼؿ امن ُن ػ امن اُّن ػ فؼـل‬
Ex: Speaking ,Reading ,teaching…etc. .‫اًّْؿ‬...‫ تؼؿينْل‬،‫ لْمتل‬، ‫ عثـي کْل‬:‫هخال‬
Uses of Gerund ‫د هصذس د اعن اعتعواالت‬

1. As the subject of the sentence. ‫ػ رولي ػ هثتؼا پَ صيج‬
Ex: Working is a good exercise. .ٍ‫ کاؿ کْل يْ ښَ توـيي ػ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Swimming is usefull for health. .ٍ‫ الهثْ ُّل ػ ؿّغتيا لپاؿٍ ګټْؿٍ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
2. As the object of a transitive verb. ‫ػ يْ هتؼؼي فؼل ػ هفؼْل پَ صيج‬
Ex: Please stop playing. .‫ لطفا ً لْتَ کْل پـيږػي‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: I like reading magazines. .‫ فٍ ػ هزلْ لْمتل عْښْم‬:‫هخال‬
97
3. As the complement of the sentence. ‫ػ رولي ػ تکويل کًّْکي پَ صيج‬
Ex: I like studying. .‫ فٍ هطالؼَ کْل عْښْم‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Saleem does not like swimming. .‫ ملين الهثْ ُّل ًَ عْښْي‬:‫هخال‬
4. As an adjective befor noun. .‫ػ ٍفت پَ صيج لَ امن څغَ هغکي‬
Ex: He prolongs a speaking class. .‫ ُغَ ػ هکالوي ټْلګۍ تَ اػاهَ ّؿکْي‬:‫هخال‬
5. As the complement of preposition. .‫ػ اّافي تْؿي ػ تکويل کًّْکي پَ صيج‬
Ex: We come here for learning. .ْ‫ هْږ ػلتَ ػ فػٍ کړي لپاؿٍ ؿاځ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He prevents me from going alone. .‫ ها ُغَ لَ يْافي تګ څغَ هٌغ کْي‬:‫هخال‬
6. Gerund is also used for prevented actions in the plaques and attention.
.‫ُوؼاؿًګَ ػ هَؼؿ امن ػ ػولًْْ ػ هغٌيْي اّ تْرَ لپاؿٍ پَ لْصْ کي امتؼواليږی‬
Ex: No smoking. .‫ ػي‬″‫هٌغ‬″ ‫ څکْل‬:‫هخال‬
Infinitive
‫هـصـذس‬
The base form of a verb which is often followed by (to) is called
infinitive
.‫( مـٍ يْځاي کيږي ػ هَؼؿ پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬to) َ‫ػ فؼل امامي ىکل چي اکخـاً ل‬
Infinitive is the base form of a verb which expresses an action or state

feerly.
.‫هَؼؿ ػ فؼل امامي ىکل ػٍ چي ػول يا صالت پَ افاػ ډّل تياًْي‬
Like: To study , To play , To go…etc .‫اًّْؿ‬...‫ تلل‬، ‫ لْتَ کْل‬، ‫ هطالؼَ کْل‬:َ‫لک‬
Ex: To study English is useful. .ٍ‫ ػ اًګلني هطالؼَ کْل ګټْؿٍ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Uses of infinitive ‫د هصذس اعتعواالت‬

1. As the subject of the sentence. (before the main verb ).
.)‫ (لَ اٍلي فؼل څغَ هغکي‬.‫ػ رولي ػ هثتؼا پَ صيج‬
Ex: To exercise sport is useful for health. .ٍ‫ ػ مپْؿت توـيي کْل ػ ؿّغتيا لپاؿٍ ګټْؿ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
98
2. As the object of a transitive verb. .‫ػ يْ هتؼؼي فؼـل پَ صيج‬

Ex: I wish to become a doctor. .‫ فٍ اؿفّ لـم پَ ؿاتلًّْکي کي ډاکتـ ىن‬:‫هخال‬
3. Infinitive can be used with (to be + about) to express an immediate

future.
.‫ ًږػي ؿاتلًّْکي تياى کړي‬″ْ‫تـڅ‬″ ، ‫( ىي‬to be + about) َ‫هَؼؿ کيؼاي ىي ل‬
Ex: The class is about to start. .ٍ‫ ټْلګۍ ىـّع کيؼلْ ًږػي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Ali is about to leave the Kabul. .ٍ‫ ػلي ػ کاتل تـک کْلْ تَ ًږػي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
4. Infinitive can be used alone. (at the end of the sentence).

.)‫ ( ػ رولي پَ اعيـ کي‬.‫هَؼؿ کيؼاي ىي يْافي امتؼوالي ىي‬
Ex: I like to read. .‫ فٍ لْمتل عْښْم‬:‫هخال‬
5. Infinitive can be used after adjectives in the sentences.

.‫هَؼؿ کيؼاي ىي پَ رولَ کي لَ ٍفتًْْ څغَ ّؿّمتَ امتؼوال ىي‬
Ex: I am pleased to meet you. .‫ متامْ لَ هاللات څغَ عْښ ىْم‬:‫هخال‬
6. Infinitive is used to express an intention.

.‫هَؼؿ ػ همَؼ ( هٌظْؿ) لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: I come to see you here. .‫ تامْ ّّيٌن‬″‫چي‬″ ‫ فٍ ػلتَ ؿاځن‬:‫هخال‬
Ex:We study to improve our knowledge. .ّ‫ عپل ػلن تَ اًکياف ّؿکړ‬″ْ‫تـڅ‬″ّْ‫ هْږ فػٍ ک‬:‫هخال‬
7. Infinitive is used to qualify and modify a noun.

.‫هَؼؿ ػ امن ػ هؼيٌْلْ اّ تِتـٍ کْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: This is not the time to play. . ٍ‫ ػا ػ لْتي کْلْ ّعت ًؼ‬:‫هخال‬
Tag questions
ًَْ‫ضويوَ يي عْال‬
Tag questions are short additions at the end of the sentences asking for
agreement or confirmation.
.‫ ػ تايؼ يا تَؼيك لپاؿٍ پْښتٌَ کْي‬، ‫ّويوَ يي مْالًَْ ػ رولْ پَ اعيـ کی ُغَ لٌډ ّواين ػي‬
Ex: Omer is a doctor, isn‟t he? ‫ آيا ًؼٍ؟‬، ٍ‫ ػوـ يْ ډاکټـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: You play chess, Do not you? ‫آيا ُوؼامي ًؼٍ؟‬، ‫ تامي ػ مطـًذ لْتَ کْي‬:‫هخال‬
99
Rules: ‫قاعذي‬
1) Affirmative sentences are followed by negative tags.
.)‫هخثتي رولي ػ هٌفي ّوايوْ پَ ّامطَ تؼـمـثيـږي(تـمـٍ کيږي‬
Ex: I go to school, Don‟t I? ‫ آيا ًَ ځن؟‬، ‫ فٍ ښًّْځۍ تَ ځن‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Ali speaks Arabic, Doesn‟t he? ‫آيا ًَ يي کْي؟‬، ‫ػلي پَ ػـتي عثـي کْي‬:‫هخال‬
2) Negative sentences are followed by affirmative tags.

.)‫ (تـمـٍ کيږي‬.‫هٌفي رولي ػ هخثتْ ّوايوْ پَ ّامطَ تؼـمـيثـيږي‬
Ex: He does not tell lie, Does he? ‫ ُغَ ػؿّاؽ ًَ ّايي؟ آيا ّايي يي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: You are not come here, Are you? ‫ آيا ؿاځي ؟‬،‫ تَ ػلتَ ًَ ؿاځي‬:‫هخال‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
If the sentence contains auxiliary verbs , the auxiliary verb itself is
repeated as subject of the tag, otherwise we use (to do) verbs.
‫ کْهکي فؼل پغپلَ ػ ّويوي پَ صيج تکـاؿيږي‬، ‫کَ چيـي پَ رولَ کي کْهکي فؼل هْرْػ ّي‬
.ّْ‫( فؼلًَْ امتؼوال‬to do) ‫ تغيـ لَ ُغَ هْږ ػ‬،
Ex: Ahman can speak Urdu, Can‟t he? ‫ آيا ًَ يي ىي کْالي؟‬،‫ اصوؼ پَ اؿػّ عثـي کْالي ىي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: We went to the party , Didn‟t we? ‫ آيا ًَ ّالړّ؟‬،ّ‫ هْږ هلوـنـتيا تَ ّالړ‬:‫هخال‬
3) The imperative sentences have the tag (will you) or (would you) .
.‫( ّويوَ لـي‬would you) ‫( يا‬will you) ‫اهـيَ رولَ ػ‬
Ex: Please close the door, will you? ‫ آيا تٌؼٍ تَ يي کړي؟‬،ٍ‫ لطفا ً ػؿّافٍ تٌؼٍ کړ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Please, be quite, would you? ‫ آيا عاهْه تَ مي؟‬،‫ لطفا ً عاهْىَ اّمي‬:‫هخال‬
4) The sentences which have request or demand form , have the tag
(will not you) or (won‟t you).
.‫( ّويوَ لـي‬won‟t you) ‫( يا‬will not you) ‫ُغَ رولي چي غْښتٌَ يا ػؿعْامت لـي ػ‬
Ex: Have a drink, Won‟t you? ‫ آيا ّتَ يي ًَ څښي؟‬،َ‫ څَ ىي ّڅښ‬″َ‫ؿاى‬″ :‫هخال‬
Ex: Have a seat, Will not you? ‫ آيا ًَ تَ کښيٌی؟‬، ٌَ‫ لطفا ً ؿاىَ کښي‬:‫هخال‬
100
ٍ‫ امتؼوال ىْي ّي تايؼ تْرَ ّىي چي آيا لَ ًږػي اهـ مـ‬please ‫ پَ ُغَ رولْ کي چي‬:‫ًْټ‬
َ‫( ل‬will you) ‫ پَ ُغَ ٍْؿت کي چي لَ ًږػي اهـ مـٍ ّي ًْػ‬، ٍ‫ػٍ اّيا لَ غْښتٌي مـ‬
‫ اّکَ چيـي لَ ًږػي غْښتـٌي مــٍ ّی پَ ُغَ ٍْؿت کي‬، ‫ّويـوي څغَ کاؿ اعينتل کيږي‬
.‫( لَ ّوـيوي څغَ کاؿ اعينتل کيږي‬will not you) ‫ػ‬
5) The sentences which are started by (Let‟s) have the tag (shall we).
.‫( ّويوَ لـي‬shall we) ‫( ىـّع ىْي ّي ػ‬Let‟s) َ‫ُغَ رولي چي پ‬
Ex: Let‟s chess, Shall we? ‫ آيا ّتَ يی کړّ؟‬،ّ‫ ځَ چي ػ مطـًذ لْتَ ّکړ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Let‟s go to the bazaar, Shall we? ‫ آيا ّالړ تَ ىْ؟‬،ْ‫ ځَ چي تافاؿتَ الړ ى‬:‫هخال‬
6) Sentences which contain words such as (Never, no, none ,scarcely, rarely
, hardly ever, seldom) ……etc are considered as negative and have the
positive tags.
‫اّػامی‬...(Never, no, none ,scarcely, rarely , hardly ever, seldom) ‫ُغَ رولي چي ػ‬
.‫ًْؿّ کلوْ لـًّکي ّي هٌفي رولي ىويـل کيږي اّ هخثتي ّويوي لـي‬
Ex: I never tell lie, Do I ? ‫ آيا ُوؼامي ًؼٍ؟‬، ‫ فٍ ُيڅکلَ ػؿّؽ ًَ ّاين‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Abdullah studied neither book , Did we?
‫ آيا ُوؼامي ًؼٍ؟‬،‫ ػثؼهللا ُيڅ کتاب ًؼٍ هطالؼَ کړي‬:‫هخال‬
7) When the subject of the sentence , are words like (nobady , anybody,
somebody…etc) the pronoun (they) is used as the subject of the tag.
‫( ّويـ ػ هثتؼا‬they) ‫ ( کلوي ّي ػ‬somebody, anybody, nobady ) ‫کلَ چي ػرولي هثتؼا ػ‬
.‫ػ ّويوي پَ صيج امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: Nobady came to the party, Did they? ‫آيا ؿاغلي ػي؟‬، ‫ ُيڅْک هلونتيا تَ ًؼي ؿاغلي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Somebody broke the glass, Didn‟t they? ‫ آيا ُوؼامي ًؼٍ؟‬،ٍ‫ کْم کل ىييَ هاتَ کړ‬:‫هخال‬
8) The tag of (I am) is (aren‟t I). .ٍ‫( ػ‬aren‟t I) َ‫( ّويو‬I am) ‫ػ‬
Ex: I am a tailor , aren‟t I ? ‫ آيا ًَ ين ؟‬، ‫ فٍ يْ عيآ ين‬:‫هخال‬
9) The tag of ( I am not) is (am I). .ٍ‫( ػ‬am I) َ‫ ( ّويو‬I am not) ‫ػ‬
Ex: I am not a doctor, am I? ‫ آيا ين؟‬، ‫ فٍ يْ ډاکتـ ًَ ين‬:‫هخال‬
.ٍ‫ ػغَ امـتـخـٌا يْافي پَ تـيتاًْي اًګليني کي ػ‬: ًَّ‫ياد‬
101
10) The sentences which have positive form but express a negative
meaning , have the positive tags.
.‫ هخثت ّواين لـي‬، ‫ُغَ رولي چي هخثت ىکل لـي هګـ هٌفي هفِْم تياًْي‬
Ex: Khalid is too fat to run fast, Is he?

‫ آيا ُواغني ًؼٍ؟‬، ‫ عالؼ لَ ُغَ څغَ چاؽ ػٍ چي هٌډي ُّي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Jamila is too small to get married , Is she?
‫ آيا ُواغني ًؼٍ؟‬، ‫ رويلَ لَ ُغَ څغَ کْچٌۍ ػٍ ّاػٍ ّکړي‬:‫هخال‬
Conditional sentences
‫ؽــشطـيـَ جــوـلـي‬
Conditional sentences are those which are formed by (If) or (whether)
and express a condition.
.‫( پَ ّامطَ تيکيليږي اّ يْ ىـٓ تياًْي‬whether) ‫( يا‬If) ‫ىـٓيَ رولي ُغَ ػي چي ػ‬
Ex: If I were the presedent , I would help the poor.

.َ‫ ها تَ لَ فـميـاًْ مـٍ هـمتَ کْل‬، ‫ کَ چيـي فٍ ؿيل روِْؿ ّاي‬:‫هخال‬
 Conditional sentences are divided into two parts:

:‫ؽشطيَ جولي پَ دّّ تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
1) Probable conditional sentences. ‫هوکٌَ ىـٓيَ رولي‬

2) Improbable conditional sentences. ‫ًا هوکٌَ ىـٓيَ رولي‬
1) Probable Conditional Sentences ‫هوکٌَ ؽشطيَ جولي‬

The probable conditions are those which indicate a possible action , that
is to say ,in these conditions it is possible to perform the action.
َ‫ پَ تل ػثاؿت پَ ػغَ ىـٓي‬، ‫هوکٌَ ىـٓيَ رولي ُغَ ػي چي پَ هوکي ػول تاًؼي ػاللت کْي‬
.ٍ‫ کي ػ ػول مـتَ ؿمْلْ اهکاى هْرْػ ػ‬″ْ‫رول‬″
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
The probable conditionl sentences are usually formed in the present and
future tenses.
.‫ىـٓيَ رولي هؼوْالً پَ صال اّ ؿاتلًّْکي فهاًْ کي تيکيليږي‬
102
Ex: If you drink dirty water, you will get sick.

.‫ ًاؿّؽ تَ ىي‬، ‫ کَ چيـي چټلي اّتَ ّڅښی‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Whether it is sunny, we will go to the pool for swimming.
.ْ‫ هْږ تَ الهثْ ُّلْ تَ الړ ى‬، ‫ کَ چيـي ُْا لوـيقٍ ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: If he comes here , we shall go to the bazaar.
.ْ‫ هْږ تَ تافاؿ تَ الړ ى‬، ‫ کَ چيـي ُغَ ؿاىي‬:‫هخال‬
2) Improbable Conditional sentences. ‫ًا هـوکٌَ ؽشطيَ جولي‬

The improbable conditional sentences are those which indicate an im-
probable action , that is to say , in these conditions there is no possibil-
ity to perform the action.
″‫ًْع‬″‫پَ ػي‬، ‫پَ تل ػثاؿت‬،‫ًاهوکٌَ ىـٓيَ رولي ُغَ ػي چي پَ ًاهوکي ػول تاًؼي ػاللت کْي‬
.ٍ‫ کي ػ ػول ػ مـتَ ؿميؼّ اهکاى هْرْػ ًَ ػ‬″ْ‫رول‬″ َ‫ىـٓي‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
The improbable conditional sentences are usually formed in the past
tenses.
.‫ًاهـوکٌَ ىـٓيَ رولي هؼوْالً پَ تيـّ فهاًْ کي امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: If I came on time, the teacher would let me in the class.

.َ‫ امتاػ تَ ټْلګۍ تَ ارافٍ ؿاکْل‬، ‫ کَ چيـي پَ ّعت ؿاغلي ّاي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Wheter we went to the party, we would have very happy time.
.‫ ډيـ عْىضالَ ّعت تَ هْ ػؿلْػ‬، ‫ کَ چيـي هلـونتيا تَ تللي ّاي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: If I studied hard , I would pass the exam.
.‫ کاهياتـيـؼلن‬″ًْ″ ،‫ کَ چيـي ها مغتَ هطالؼَ کړي ّاي‬:‫هخال‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
It is possible to use (were) instead of (was) for ( I , he, she ,it) in the
improbable conditions.
(were) ‫( پَ ځاي‬was) ‫ ( لپاؿٍ ػ‬I , he, she ,it) ‫ کي ػ‬″ْ‫رول‬″‫هوکٌَ ػٍ پَ ًاهوکٌَ ىـٓيی‬
.‫امتؼوال ىي‬
Ex: If I were , I would accept it. .‫ کَ چيـي ػ متا پَ ځاي ّاي لثْالٍّ هي‬:‫هخال‬
103
Past perfect tense

َ‫تـيـشٍ کاهـلـَ صهـاًـ‬
)‫(لـــشي هــاضــي‬
Helping verb of P.P tense ‫ػ تيـي کاهلي فهاًي کْهکي فؼـل‬
Had Had
Affirmative form
‫هثثت ؽکل‬ Sub + Had + V3 + Comp.
Ex: He had eaten food. .ٍّ ‫ ُغَ غؾا عْړلي‬:‫هخال‬
Question form
‫عْالي ؽکل‬ Had + Sub + V3 + Comp?
Ex: Had he eaten food? ‫ آيا ُغَ غؾا عْړلي ٍّ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form
‫هٌفي ؽکل‬ Sub + Had + Not + V3 + Comp .
Ex: He had not eaten food. .ٍّ ًَ ‫ ُغَ غؾا عْړلي‬:‫هخال‬
Had + Sub + Not + V3 + Comp -?
Negative interrogative Ex: Had he not eaten food ? ‫ آيا ُغَ غؾا عْړلي ًَ ٍّ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Hadn‟t + Sub + V3 + Comp -?
Ex: Hadn‟t he eaten food ? ‫ آيا ُغَ غؾا عْړلي ًَ ٍّ؟‬:‫هخال‬
1. Usege: The past perfect tense is used to express that an action com-
pleted in the past before other action.
َ‫ تيـٍ کاهلَ فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول ػ تياًْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي لَ يْ تل ػول څغَ پ‬:‫اعتعوال‬
.‫ کي تکويل ىْي ّي‬″‫ّعت‬″‫تيـ‬
Or: Past perfect tense is used to show an action which started before
the time of speaking in the past and was just finished.
َ‫ تـيـٍ کاهلَ فهاًَ ػ ُغـَ ػول ػ تياًْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼـوالـيږي چـي ػ عثـي کْلْ لَ ّعت څغ‬:‫اّيا‬
‫هغکي ىـّع ىْي اّ ليږ ّؿّمتَ عتن ىْي ّي‬
Diagram:
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
A (before) clause is usually used with past perfect tense to specify the
past action.
.‫ امتؼواليږي‬″ٍ‫لپاؿ‬″ ْ‫( لْيَ هؼوْالً لَ تيـي کاهلي فهاًي مـٍ ػ تيـ ػول ػ هؼيٌْل‬before) ‫ػ‬
104
Ex: She had cooked the lunch befor we arrived home.

.ٍّ ‫ هغکي لَ ػي چي هْږ کْؿتَ ّؿميږّ ُغي ػ غـهي ډّډۍ پغَ کړي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Shabeer had finished school befor he got twenty.
.ٍّ ‫ ؿميؼّ هغکي ښًّْځۍ عتوَ کړي‬″‫کلٌۍ‬″ ‫ ىثيـ تـىل‬:‫هخال‬
Note: In this usage, past perfect tense is used commonly with the simple
past tense.
.‫ پَ ػغَ امتؼوال کي تيـٍ کاهلَ فهاًَ ػوْها ً لَ ماػٍ تيـي فهاًي مـٍ امتؼواليږي‬:‫ًْټ‬
Note: The words (when , befor ,because , after , as soon as , till ,until…etc)
can be used in past perfect tense.
)‫اّػامي ًْؿي‬...until, till , as soon as , after , because , befor , when ) ‫ ػ‬:‫ًْټ‬
.‫کليوي کْالي پَ تيـٍ کاهلَ فهاًَ کي امتؼوال ىي‬
Ex: I had finished my homework, when I went home.
.ٍّ ‫ عپل کْؿًۍ کاؿ هي عالً کړي‬، ‫ کلَ چي کْؿتَ الړم‬:‫هخال‬
2. Usage: Past perfect tense is usually used in the indirect speech.

.‫ تيـٍ کاهلَ فهاًَ هؼوْالً پَ غيـهنتـين کالم کي امتؼواليږي‬:‫ اعتعوال‬.۱
Ex: Bilal said that Ahmad jan had came here.
.ٍّ ‫ تالل ّّيل چي اصوؼ چي اصوؼ راى ػلتَ ؿاغلي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Abrahim said that Rahim had gone to Kandahar.
.ٍّ ‫ اتـاُين ّّيل چي ؿصين کٌؼُاؿ تَ تللي‬:‫هخال‬
Past perfect continuous tense

ًَ‫تيشٍ کاهلَ جاسی صها‬
Helping verb of P.P.C tense ‫ػ تيـي کاهلي راؿی فهاًي کْهکي فؼـل‬
Had been Had been
Affirmative form
‫هثثت ؽکل‬ Sub + Had + been + V-ing + Comp.
Ex: Amran had been studying Pashto. .ٍّ ‫ػوـاى ػ پښتْپَ هطالؼَ هيغْل‬:‫هخال‬
Question form
‫عْالي ؽکل‬ Had + Sub + been + V-ing + Comp?
Ex: Had Amran been studying Pashto? ‫ آيا ػوـاى ػ پښتْ پَ هطالؼَ هيغْل ٍّ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form
‫هٌفي ؽکل‬ Sub + Had + Not + been +V-ing + Comp .
Ex: Amran had not been studying Pashto. .ٍّ ًَ ‫ ػوـاى ػ پښتْ پَ هطالؼَ هيغْل‬:‫هخال‬
Had + Sub + Not + been +V-ing + Comp -?
Negative interrogative Ex: Had Amran not been studying Pashto? ‫آيا ػوـاى ػ پښتْپَ هطالؼَ هيغْل ًَ ٍّ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Hadn‟t + Sub + been + V-ing + Comp -?
Ex: Hadn‟t Amran been studying Pashto? ‫ آيا ػوـاى ػپښتْ پَ هطالؼَ هيغْل ًَ ٍّ؟‬:‫هخال‬
105
1) Usage: Past perfect continuous is used to show the duration of an

action which was in progress before another action in the past.
‫ تيـٍ کاهلَ راؿي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول ػ هْػي تياًْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي پَ تيـ‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۱
.ٍّ ‫ کي‬″‫صالت‬″ َ‫ کي لَ تل ػول څغَ هغکي ػ رـياى پ‬″‫ّعت‬″
Diagram:
Ex: I had been learning English lessons before starting computer.

.‫ فٍ ػ کوپيْټـ لَ فػٍ کړي هغکي ػ اًګلـيني پَ فػٍ کړٍ تْعت ّم‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The police had been looking for the criminal for two years before
caught him.
.‫ پْليل ػٍّ کالَ پَ هزـم پني ګـځيؼٍ هغکي لَ ػي چي ُغَ ًّيني‬:‫هخال‬
2) Usage: Past perfect continuous tense is also used for the actions
with emphasis which were in progress before another actions or
another time in the past.
َ‫ ُوؼاؿًګَ تيـٍ کاهلَ فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػولًْْ چي لَ تاکيؼ مـٍ پَ تيـٍ فهاًَ کي ل‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۱
.‫ًْؿّ ػولًْْ اّيا تل ّعت څغَ هغکي پَ رـياى کي ّي‬
Ex: He had been teaching us until we become teachers.
.ٍْ‫ ُغَ هْږ تَ تؼؿيل کاٍّ تـڅْچي هْږ ښًّْکۍ ى‬:‫هخال‬
Phrase ‫عثاست‬
Phrase is a group of related words which acts as a word and does not
have subject and predicate , so it cannot work like a sentence .
ًَ ‫ػثاؿت يْ ګـّپ ػ تړلْ کلوْ ػٍ چي ػ يْ کليوي پَ صيج کاؿکْي اّ ػ هثتؼا اّعثـ لـًّکي‬
.‫ پل ًْ ُغَ ػ يْي رولي پَ څيـ کاؿ ًيي کْالي‬، ‫ّي‬
Or:Phrase is a group of words which does not make a complete sense.
.‫ ػثاؿت يْ ګـّپ ػ کلوْ ػٍ چي کاهل هفِْم ًَ افاػٍ کْي‬:‫اّيا‬
Exs: :ًَْ‫هثال‬
 As likely as not. ‫ ىايؼ‬، ً‫اصتواال‬
 By no means. .َ‫پَ ُيڅ ّر‬
 For all I know. .‫تـ کْهَ ځايَ چي فٍ پُْيږم‬
 In course of time. .ٍ‫ػ ّعت پَ تيـيؼّ مـ‬
 That is to say. .‫پَ تل ػثاؿت‬
 Well done. .‫آفــــيي‬
 Shame on you. .ٍ‫ىـم ّکړ‬
 As along as. .‫تـ ُغَ ّعت چي‬
 Run away. .‫فـاؿ کْل‬
106
 Phrasal verbs: ًَْ‫عثاستی فعـل‬

Phrasal verbs are the combination of prepositions or adverbs after the
verbs so as , to get several meaning , which are common in modern
English.
َ‫ هغتلفي هؼٌي ګاًي ّؿڅغ‬،‫ػثاؿتي فؼلًَّْ لَ اّافي تْؿي يا ليؼًّْ څغَ ّؿّمتَ تـکية ػي‬
.‫ ػام ػي‬″‫ډيـ‬″ ‫چي پَ ػَـي اًګلينی کي‬، ‫صاٍليږي‬
 Phrasal verbs are divided into two parts:
:‫عثاستي فعلًَْ پَ دّّ تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
1. Separable phrasal verbs. ًَْ‫جال کيذًّکي عثاستی فعـل‬
Separable phrasal verbs are those that we can use a noun or pronoun
between verb and preposition.
‫رال کـيؼًّکي ػثاؿتي فؼلًَْ ُغَ ػي چـي هـْږ کْالي ىـْ امن يا ّوـيـ ػ فؼـل اّاّافـي‬
.ّ‫تْؿي تـهٌځ امتؼوال کړ‬
Like: :‫هثال‬
- Throw away. .‫لـي غْؿځْل‬
- Wake up. .‫ تيؼاؿٍ کيؼل‬، ‫تيؼاؿّل‬
- Hand in. .‫ تنليويؼل‬، ‫ليږل‬
- Fill out. .‫ رْاب ّؿکْل‬، ‫تکيلْل‬
- Find out. .‫ کيفْل‬، ‫پيؼا کْل‬
Phrasal verb ‫ػثاؿتی فؼـل‬
Ex: Abrahim threw the ball away. .ٍّ‫ اتـاُين تْپ لـي ّغْؿځا‬:‫هخال‬
Noun ‫امـن‬
2. Inseparable Phrasal verbs. ًَْ‫ًَ جال کيذًّکي عثاستی فعل‬

Inseparable phrasal verbs are those that we can not use a noun or
pronoun between verb and preposition.
‫ًَ رال کيؼًّکي ػثاؿتي فؼلًَْ ُغَ ػي چي هْږ ًيْ کْالي امن يا ّويـ ػ فؼل اّ اّافي‬
.ّ‫تْؿي تـهٌځ امتؼوال کړ‬
Like: :َ‫لک‬
- Call on. .‫ پْښتل‬،‫ ػػْتْل‬، ‫تلـل‬
- Come across. .‫ ښکاؿٍ کيؼل‬، ‫پيؼا کيؼل‬
- Drop out. .‫ ػؿيؼل‬، ‫اينتَ کيؼل‬
- Look after. .‫ مـپـمتي کْل‬، َ‫تْرَ لـل پ‬
- Pass away. .‫ تنليويؼل‬، ‫هړکيؼل‬
107
Ex: I called on Sadiq. .‫ ها ٍاػيك ػػْت کړ‬:‫هخال‬

Phrasal verb. Noun
Adjective
‫صـفـت‬
Adjective is a word which modifies a noun or pronoun. It gives extra
information about a noun , and we usually use it before a noun.
‫ ُغَ ػ امن پَ تاؿٍ کي اّافي هؼلْهات ّؿکْي‬.‫ٍفت ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي يْامن يا ّويـ تٌظيوْي‬
.ّْ‫ اّ هْږ هؼوْالً ُغَ لَ امن څغَ هغکي امتؼوال‬،
Or: Adjective is a word which completes the meaning of a noun
qualifies a noun .
.‫ ٍفت ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي ػ امن هؼٌی تکويلْي اّ يا ػ يْ امـن متايٌَ کْي‬:‫اّيا‬
Ex: Wardak is a nice place. .ٍ‫ ّؿػک يْ ښکلي ځاي ػ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Ajmal is a clever boy. .ٍ‫ ارول يْ ځيـک ُلک ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
1) An adjective which is used along with a noun as an attribute is
called attributive or direct adjective.
‫ُـغـَ ٍفـت چي لَ امـن مــٍ يْځاي ػ متايٌي پَ صيج امتؼواليږي ػ تٍْيـفي يا هنتـمـين‬
.‫ٍفت پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Ex: This is a small class. .ٍ‫ ػغَ يٍْ کْچٌۍ ټْلګۍ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Ahmad is a talented student. .ٍ‫ اصوؼ يْ تا امتؼـؼاػٍ فػٍ کًّْکي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
2) An adjective which is used along with a verb and forms part of a

predicate is called predicative or indirect adjective.
‫ُغَ ٍفت چي لَ فؼل مـٍ يْځاي امتؼواليږي اّ ػ عثـ يٍْ تـعَ تيکيلَ کړي ػ عثـي يا‬
.‫غيـ هنتـمـين ٍفت پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Ex: The cat in the garden is fat. .ٍ‫ پَ تاؽ کي ػٍ چاغَ ػ‬″‫چي‬″‫ ُغَ پيي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Sediqullah seems happy. .‫ ٍؼيك هللا عْىضالَ هؼلْهيږي‬:‫هخال‬
108
 Adjectives are divided into eight parts:

:‫صـفـتـًَْ پَ اتـْ تشخْ ّيـؾـل ؽــْي دي‬
1. Adjctives of Quality. ًَْ‫د حالت (څشًګْالي) صفـتـ‬

Adjective of quality are those which show the kind or quality of
persons , places and things.
‫ هکـاًًْْ اّ ىـياًْ ډّل يا څــًګـْالي‬، ٍْ‫ػ صالت(څـًګـْالي) ٍفتًَْ ُغَ ػي چي پَ ػ اىغا‬
.‫تياًْي‬
Like: Tall , Small , Beautiful…ect. .‫اّػامي ًْؿ‬...َ‫ ښاينت‬، ‫کْچٌي‬، ‫ رګ‬:َ‫لک‬
Ex: This is a small class. .ٍ‫ ػغَ ټْلګۍ کْچٌۍ ػ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Ajmal is a tall boy. .ٍ‫ ارول يْ رګ ُلک ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
When article (The) is used before these adjectives ,they are changed to
nouns.
.‫ پَ امن تثؼيليږي‬، ‫( تؼـيف تْؿی لَ ٍفتًْْ څغَ هغکي امتؼوال ىی‬The) ‫کلَ چي ػ‬
.))‫((ػ اىغاٍْ پَ هؼـفي کْلْ ػاللت کْي‬
Ex: The poor are usually generous to teach other.
.‫ فـميـاى هؼوْالً لَ ًْؿّ څغَ مـغي ػي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: After the battle they buried the dead.
.‫ ّؿّمتَ لَ رګـی ُغْي هړي ښـظ کړل‬:‫هخال‬
2. Adjectives of Quantity. ًَْ‫د هـقـذاس يا کـوـيت صفـتـ‬

Adjectives of Quantity are those which show how much of a thing is
meant.
.‫ کي ػي‬″‫پَ ًظـ‬″ ‫ػ همؼاؿ ٍفتًَْ ُغَ ػي چي څْهـٍ يْ ىي‬
Some Adjectives of Quantity ًَْ‫ػ همؼاؿ ځيٌي ٍفت‬
Some ٍ‫يٍْ اًؼاف‬ Any ٍ‫يٍْ اًؼاف‬

Little ‫لـيـږ‬ Few ‫لـيـږ‬
Many ‫ډيـ‬ Much ‫ډيــ‬
All ‫ټْل‬ Whole ‫ توام‬، ‫ټْل‬
No ‫ُيڅ‬ Enough ‫کافـي‬
Ex: Afghans showed much courage in war.

.‫ افغاًاى پَ رٌګ کي ډيــٍ فړّړتيا ښکاؿٍ کْي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Azatullah found some money. .‫ ػقت هللا يٍْ اًؼافٍ پـيـني پيؼا کـړي‬:‫هخال‬
109
‫يادًَّ‪ “Some” :‬اّ ”‪ “Any‬ػّاړٍ لَ ىويـًّکي اّ غيـ ىويـًّکي اموًْْمـٍ امتؼواليږي‬

‫؛ ”‪ “ Some‬پَ هخثت تياًيَ اّ مْالي رولْ کي امتؼواليږي اّ ”‪“Any‬پَ هٌفي تياًيَ اّ مْالي‬
‫رولْ کي امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: We need some books.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬هْږ يٍْ اًؼافٍ کتاتًْْ تَ ّـّؿت لـّ‪.‬‬
‫?‪Ex: Do you have some water‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬آيا تامي يٍْ اًؼافٍ اّتَ لـي؟‬
‫‪Ex: He doesn‟t have any books.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ُ :‬غَ يٍْ اًؼافٍ کتاتًَْ ًَ لـي‪.‬‬
‫?‪Ex: Do you have any pens‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬آيا تَ يٍْ اًؼافٍ للوًَْ لـي؟‬
‫يادًَّ‪ “Many” :‬لَ روغ ىويـًّکي اموًْْ مـٍ پَ هخثتَ تياًيَ ‪ ،‬هٌفي تياًيَ اّ مْالي رولْ‬
‫کي امتؼواليږي ؛ اّ ”‪ “Much‬لَ غيـ ىويـًّکي اموًْْ مـٍ پَ هٌفي تياًيَ اّ مْالي رولْ‬
‫امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I do have many brothers.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ ډيـ ّؿّڼَ لـم‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: He dosen‟t need much water.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ُ :‬غَ ډيـّ اّتْ تَ ّـّؿت ًلـي‪.‬‬
‫يادًَّ‪ “Little” :‬لَ غـيـ ىـويـًّکي اموـًْْ مــٍ اّ ”‪ “Few‬لَ ىوـيـًّکـي اموـًْْ مــٍ‬
‫امتؼوالـيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I have little milk.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ لـيـږ ىيؼي لـم‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I have few friends.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ لـيـږ هلګـي لـم‪.‬‬
‫عـذدي صـفـتـًَْ ‪3. Numeral Adjectives‬‬

‫‪Numeral Adectives show how many persons or things are meant; or in‬‬
‫‪which position or degree a person or thing stands.‬‬
‫ػـؼػي ٍفـتًَْ ښـيي ‪″‬چي‪ ″‬څْهـٍ اىغاً يا ىياى پَ ‪ً″‬ظـ کي‪ ″‬ػي ؛ اّيا ‪″‬ػاچي‪ ″‬يْ ىغٌ‬
‫يا ىي پَ کْم همام يا ػؿرَ کي لـاؿ لـي‪.‬‬
‫ځيٌي ػؼػي ٍفتًَْ ‪Some Numeral Adjectives‬‬
‫‪One‬‬ ‫‪ Two‬يْ‬ ‫ػٍّ‬

‫‪First‬‬ ‫‪ Secound‬لْهړﺉ‬ ‫ػُّـن‬
‫‪Many‬‬ ‫‪ A lot‬ډيــ‬ ‫فيات‬
‫‪Several‬‬ ‫څـْ‬
‫‪Ex: The mouth has 32 teeth.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬عْلَ ‪ ۳۲‬غاښًَْ لـي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: I have two books.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ ػٍّ کتاتًَْ لـم‪.‬‬
‫‪110‬‬
 The Numeral Adjective are devided in to two parts:

:‫عـذدي صفـتًَْ پَ دّّ تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
1. Definite Numeral Adjective ًَْ‫هـعـيي عـذدي صفـت‬

Definit numeral adjectives are those which show an exact number.
.‫هؼيي ػؼػي ٍفتًَْ ُغَ ػي چي يْ هؼيي تؼؼاػ يا ىويـٍ ښيي‬
Like: One , Two, First , Secound…etc. .‫ اّػامي ًْؿ‬...‫ ػُّن‬، ‫ لْهړی‬، ٍّ‫ ػ‬،ْ‫ ي‬:َ‫لک‬
 Definite Numeral Adjective are of three parts:

:‫هعيي عذدي صفتًَْ پَ دسي ډّلَ دي‬
A. Cardinal Numbers. ًَّ‫اصلي عذد‬

Cardinal number show quantity or determine the numbers.
.‫اٍلي ػؼػًَّ همؼاؿ يا ػ اػؼاػّ تؼيٌْل ښيي‬
Like: One , Two ,Three ,Four…etc. .‫ اّػامي ًْؿ‬...‫څلْؿ‬، ‫ ػؿي‬، ٍّ‫ ػ‬، ْ‫ ي‬:َ‫لک‬
Ex: Shabeer has four brothers. .‫ ىثيـ څلْؿ ّؿّڼَ لـي‬:‫هخال‬
B. Ordinal Numbers. ًَّ‫ستثَ يي(تْصيفي) عذد‬
Ordinal Numbers show quality or the order of the things in a series.

.‫ؿتثَ يي ػؼػًَّ کيـيـفيـت اّيا پَ يٍْ ملنلَ کي ػ ىياًْ ؿتثَ ښکاؿٍ کْي‬
Like: First ,Secound ,Third , Fourth…etc. .‫اًّْؿ‬...‫ څلْؿم‬، ‫ ػؿين‬، ‫ ػُّن‬، ‫ لْهړي‬:َ‫لک‬
Ex: Najeeb is the first position in the class.
.‫ ًزية پَ ټْلګۍ کي لْهړي همام لـي‬:‫هخال‬
Note: The ordinals are formed by adding (th) at the end of cordinals ,
except first , second , third.
‫ پَ امتخٌا‬،‫( پَ فياتْلْ مـٍ تيکيليږي‬th) ‫ ػ اٍلي ػؼػًّْ پَ اعيـکي ػ‬″ًَْ‫فؼل‬″ ‫ ؿتثَ يي‬:‫ًْټ‬
.‫ ػؿين‬، ‫ ػُّن‬، ‫ػ لْهړي‬
Ex: Fourth , Fifth , sixth , tenth…etc. .‫اًّْؿ‬...‫ لنن‬، ‫ىپږم‬، ‫ پٌځن‬،‫ څلْؿم‬:‫هخال‬
 Sometimes these numbers are written in contractions.

.‫ځيٌي ّعت ػغَ ػؼػًَّ پَ هغتَـ ىکل ليکل کيږي‬
st nd
Ex: First = 1 )‫ (لْهړي‬Ex: Secound = 2 )‫(ػُّن‬ Ex: Third = 3rd )‫(ػؿين‬
st
Ex: Twenty first = 21 )‫(يْييتن‬
111
C. Multiplicative Numbers ًَّ‫د تکثيش عذد‬

Multiplicative Numbers are those which show multiplication.
.‫ػ تکخيـ ػؼػًَّ ُغَ ػي چي کخـت تياًْي‬
Ex: Double , Dozen , Two fold , Three fold , .....etc.
.‫ اّ ػامي ًْؿ‬.....، ‫ ػؿي ځلي‬، ‫ ػٍّ ځلي‬، ‫ ػؿري‬، ‫ ډتـل‬:‫هخال‬
2. Indefinite Nuumeral Adjectives ًَْ‫ًا هعيي عذدي صفت‬

Indefinite Numeral adjectives show inexact numbers.
.‫ًاهؼـيي ػـؼػي ٍفـتًَْ غـيـ ػلـيك تؼـؼاػ ښــي‬
Some Indefinite Numeral Adjectives ًَْ‫ځيٌي ًا هؼيي ػؼػي ٍفت‬
Some ٍ‫ يٍْ اًؼاف‬، ‫ ځيٌي‬Any ٍ‫ يٍْ اًؼاف‬، ‫ځيٌي‬

No ‫ ُيڅ‬Few ‫کـن‬
Many ‫ ډيــ‬Several ْ‫څـ‬
Ex: I bought several story books. .‫ ها ػ کينْ څْ کتاتًَْ ّاعينتل‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: I has many friends. .‫ فٍ ډيـ هلګـي لـم‬:‫هخال‬
4. Demonstrative Adjectives ًَْ‫اؽـاسی صـفـتـ‬

Demonstrative adjectives are those which are used before nouns and
point out to person , place , or thing.
ٍ‫ هکاى اّيا ىي تَ اىاؿ‬، ٌ‫اىاؿي ٍفتًَْ ُغَ ػي چي لَ امـن څغَ هغکي امتؼواليږي اّ ىغ‬
.‫کْي‬
Demonstrative Adjectives are consist in: َ‫اىاؿي ٍفتًَْ ػثاؿت ػي ل‬
This َ‫ ػغ‬That َ‫ُغ‬

These »‫ ػغَ «روغ‬Those »‫ُغَ «روغ‬
Such َ‫ ػاؿًګ‬، ‫ ػامي‬The same ‫ػـيـي ىـي‬
Ex: This class is small. .ٍ‫ ػغَ ټْلګۍ کْچٌۍ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Those books are mine. .‫ ُغَ کتاتًَْ فها ػي‬:‫هخال‬
 Demonstrative Adjectives are of two kinds:

:‫اؽـاسي صـفـتـًَْ پـَ دٍّ ډّلـَ دي‬
1) Definite Demonstrative Adjectives ًَْ‫هعيي اؽاسي صفت‬
Like: This , These , The.....etc.

.‫ اّ ػامي ًْؿ‬...... The ,These )»‫ (ػغَ«روغ‬,That )َ‫ (ُغ‬, This)َ‫ (ػغ‬:َ‫لک‬
112
2) Indefinite Demonstrative Adjectives ًَْ‫ًاهعيي اؽاسي صفـت‬
Like: A , An , That , Those ....etc.

.‫اّػامي ًْؿ‬..... Those)»‫ (ُغَ«روغ‬, That ) َ‫ (ُغ‬, An)ْ‫ (ي‬, A )ْ‫ (ي‬:َ‫لک‬
5. Possessive Adjective ًَْ‫هـلـکـي صـفـتـ‬

Possessive adjectives are those which are used before noun and show
possession and ownership.
.‫هلکي ٍفتًَْ ُغَ ػي چي لَ امـن څغَ هغکي امتؼواليږي اّ هلکيت اّ هالکيت ښکاؿٍ کْي‬
Possessive Adjectives are consist in: َ‫هـلکي ٍفتًَْ ػثاؿت ػي ل‬
My ‫ فها‬Your ‫ متامي‬، ‫ػ تامي‬

Our ‫ فهْږ‬Their )‫ػ ُغْي (ػ ػّي‬
His )‫ ػ ُغَ (هؾکـ‬Her ‫ػ ُغي‬
Its )‫ػ ُغَ (تيزاى‬
Ex: This is his car. .ٍ‫ ػغَ ػ ُغَ هْټـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: That is our class. .ٍ‫ ُغَ فهْږ ټْلګۍ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Muzamil is my brother. .ٍ‫ هقهل فها ّؿّؿ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
6. Interrogative Adjectives ًَْ‫پْښتـًْکـي(اعتفـِاهي) صفـت‬

Interrogative adjectives are used before nouns and ask a question.
.‫پْښتًْکي ٍفتًَْ لَ امـن څغَ هغکي امتؼواليږي اّ مْال پْښتي‬
Possessive Adjectives are consist in: َ‫هـلکي ٍفتًَْ ػثاؿت ػي ل‬
What ‫ څَ ىي‬، َ‫ څ‬Which ‫ کْم ىي‬، ‫کْم‬

Whose ‫ ػ چا‬Who ‫څْک‬
Ex: Which class are you in? ‫ تامي پَ کْم ټْلګۍ کي يامت؟‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: What is your favorite meal? ‫ ػ تامي ػ عْښي غؾا څَ ىي ػٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Who is your close friend? ‫ ػ تامي ًږػي هلګـي څْک ػٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Whose picture is this? ‫ ػغَ تَْيـ ػچا ػٍ؟‬:‫هخال‬
‫ تؼـيفًَْ ػ پْښتًْکي ّويـًّْ پَ تضج ىْي‬Which ّ‫ ا‬Whose , Who , Wha ‫ ػ‬:‫ًْټ‬

.‫ػي‬
113
7. Proper Adjectives ًَْ‫خـاؿ صـفـت‬

Proper adjectives are those which are derived or teken from a proper
noun .
.‫عاً ٍفتًَْ ُغَ ػي چي لَ عاً امن څغَ هيتك يا اعينتل ىْي ػي‬
Ex: Afghanistan , Pakistan , Kandahar , U. E. A....etc.

.‫ اّػامي ًْؿ‬....‫ اهاؿات هتضؼٍ ػـتي‬، ‫ کٌؼُاؿ‬، ‫ پاکنتاى‬، ‫ افغاًنتاى‬:‫هخال‬
 The forming of proper adjectives ‫د خاؿ صفتًْْ تـؾکيل‬

1) Adding (ish): Englind – English , Turkey – Turkish .....etc.
2) Adding (n): America – American , India – Indian ...... etc.
3) Adding (ese): China – Chinese , Japan – Japanese ..... etc.
4) Adding (ic) : Islam – Islamic , Arabia – Arabic ........etc.
5) Irregular forming : Greece – Greek , Egypt – Egyptian ...etc.
8. Distributive Adjectives ًَْ‫تـْصيعـي صـفـت‬

Distributive adjectives are used before nouns and indicate each person of
a number or group.
‫تْفيؼي ٍفـتًَْ لَ اموًْْ څغَ هغکي امتؼـوالـيږي اّ ػ يْ ګـّپ يا ډلی پَ ُـ ىغـٌ تاًؼي‬
.))‫((ػ يْ ګـّپ پَ فـػ فـػ تاًؼي ػاللت کْي‬.‫ػاللت کْي‬
Some Distributive Adjectives ًَْ‫ځيٌي تْفيؼي ٍفت‬
Each ْ‫ ُـي‬، ‫ ُـ‬Every ْ‫ ُــي‬، ‫ُــ‬

Either ٍ‫ ػّاړ‬Neither ْ‫ ُيڅ ي‬، ‫ُيڅ‬
1) Each : is used for small groups and when the number is limited and
definite.
.‫ ػ کْچٌي ګـّپًْْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي ُغَ ّعت چي تؼؼاػ يي هضؼّػ اّ هؼيي ّي‬:Eaich
Ex: Each man had a chance. .‫ ُـمړي يْ چاًل ػؿلْػ‬:‫هخال‬
2) Every : is used for large groups and when the number is not limited.
.‫ ػ غټْ ګـّپًْْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي ُغَ ّعت چي تؼؼاػ يی ًا هضؼّػ ّي‬:Every
Ex: I have studied every book in this library.

.ٍ‫ ُا پَ ػغَ کتاتتْى کي ُـ کتاب هطالؼَ کړي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
114
3) Either: shows the choice between two persons or things in positive

sentence.
.‫ پَ هخثتَ رولَ کي ػ ػّّ اىغاٍْ يا ىياًْ تـهٌځ اًتغاب ښيي‬:Either
Ex: I can read either book. .‫ فٍ کْالي ىن ػّاړٍ کتاتَ ّلْلـن‬:‫هخال‬
4) Neither : is used for two persons or things in the negative sentences

and agrees with singular verb.
ٍ‫ پَ هٌـفي روـلْ کي ػ ػّّ اىغاٍْ يا ىياًْ لپاؿٍ امتؼـوالـيږي اّ لَ هفـػ فؼـل مـ‬:Neither
.‫هطاتـمـت کْي‬
Ex: Neither book is mine. .ٍ‫ ُيڅ يْ کتاب فها ًؼ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Neither student is lazy. .ٍ‫ ُيڅ يْ ىاګـػ ټـٌثل ًؼ‬:‫هخال‬
Comparison of Adjectives
َ‫د صـفـتـًْْ هـقـايـغـ‬
The usual way for comprison of adjectives is using the positive com-
parative and superlative degree.
َ‫ تفْيلي ػؿري اّ ػالي ػؿري ل‬، ‫ػ ٍفتًْْ ػ همايني لپاؿٍ هؼوْلي ٓـيمَ ػ هطلمي ػؿري‬
.ٍ‫امتؼوال څغَ ػثاؿت ػ‬
1) Positive degree َ‫هـطـلـقـَ (عـادٍ) دسجـ‬

The positive degree of an adjective is the simple form of an adjec-
tive , it is used when no comparison is meant.
‫ "ػغَ" ػؿرَ ُغَ ّعت امتؼواليږي‬، ٍ‫ػ ٍفت هطلمَ ػؿرَ ػ ٍفت لَ ماػٍ ىکل څغَ ػثاؿت ػ‬
.‫چي ُيڅ هماينَ پَ ًظـ کي ًَ ّي ًيْل ىْي‬
Ex: Nice , Clever , small , tall , .....etc.

.‫ اّ ػامي ًْؿ‬...... ‫ اّږػ يا رګ‬، ‫ کْچٌي‬، ‫ ځيـک‬، ‫ ښکلي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Kandahar is a nice place. .ٍ‫ کٌؼُاؿ يْ ښکلي ځاي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Shabeer is a clever student. .ٍ‫ ىثيـ يْ ځيـک فػٍ کًّْکي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
115
Note:‫ًْټ‬
When the positive degree is used for comparison of two person or things
it is usually placed between (as.............. as); this form is called compar-
ison of equality.
ً‫کـلـَ چـي هطـلمـَ ػؿرـَ ػ ػّّ اىـغـاٍـْ يا ىـياًـْ هـمـايـني لـپـاؿٍ امـتـؼـوالـيـږي هـؼـوـْال‬
.‫( ځـاي ًـينـي ؛ ػغـَ ىـکل ػ تـنـاّي هـمـايـنـي پـَ ًـْم يـاػيـږي‬as ...........as)
Ex: Moheeb is as tall as his brother. .ٍ‫ هضية ػعپل ّؿّؿ پَ څيـ رګ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Note: But in the negative form the first (as) is changed to (so).
.‫( تاًؼي تؼليږي‬so) َ‫( پ‬as)‫ هګـ پَ هٌـفی ىکل کي لْهړی‬:‫ًْټ‬
Ex: Shafiqa is not so pretty as her sister. .ٍ‫ ىـفـيـمَ ػ عـپـلي عـْؿ پَ څـيـ ښـکلـي ًؼ‬:‫هخال‬
2) Comparative degree َ‫تفضيلي دسج‬

The comparative degree of an adjective indicates the higher degree of
quality than positive , it is used when we compare two persons , places
or things .
َ‫ "ػغَ" ػؿر‬، ‫ػ ٍفت تفْيلي ػؿرَ ًنثت هطلمي ػؿري تَ پَ ػالي تـٍ کيـفيـت ػاللت کْي‬
.ّْ‫ هکاًًَْ اّيا ىياى مـٍ هماينَ ک‬، ٍَ‫ُغَ ّعت امتؼواليږي چي فهْږ ػٍّ اىغا‬
Ex: Nicer , Cleverer ,Smaller , Taller .... etc.

.‫ اّ ػامي ًْؿ‬.... ‫ اّږػ تـ‬، ‫ کْچٌـي تـ‬، ‫ اليـمـتـ‬، ‫ ښاينتَ تـ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Jamil is cleverer than Naqib. .ٍ‫ رويل لَ ًـمية څغَ اليمـتـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
The preposition (than) is usually used in the comparative degree to
introduce the second part of comparison.
.‫( اّافي تْؿی پَ تفْيلي ػؿرَ کي امتؼواليږي تـڅْ ػ همايني ػُّوَ تـعَ هؼـفي کړي‬than) ‫ػ‬
Ex: Kabul is nicer than Ghazni. .ٍ‫ کاتل ًنثت غقًي تَ ښکلي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
Another way for comparison is using (less , more , most , like , alike...etc).
.ٍ‫ اّػامي ًْؿ( امتؼوالًَْ ػ‬.... alike , like ,most , more , less) ‫ػ همايني يٍْ تلَ الؿٍ ػ‬
Ex: Ahmad is less strong than Rahim. .ٍ‫ اصوؼ لَ ؿصين څغَ کوقّؿي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
116
Sometimes in the comparative degree , we do not actually name the
second part of comparison.
.ّْ‫ هْږ ػ همايني پَ ػُّوَ تـعَ ػوالً ًْم ًَ ؽکـ ک‬، ‫ځيٌي ّعت پَ تفْيلي ػؿرَ کي‬
Ex: Physics is more difficult than any other subject.

.ٍ‫ فقيک لَ تل ُــ هْوْى څغَ ډيـهـيکل ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Wahid is taller than any other boy. .ٍ‫ ّصيؼ لَ تل ُـ ُلک څغَ لْړ تـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Note:‫ًـْټ‬
Sometimes the qualities of two persons are clear , we use article (the)
before comparative degree.
‫( ػ تؼـيف‬the) ‫ هْږ ػ تفْيلي ػؿري هغکي‬، ‫ځيٌي ّعت ػ ػّّ اىغاٍْ هماينَ ّاّش ّي‬
.ّْ‫امتؼوال‬
Ex: Najeeb is the cleverer of the two brothers.
.ٍ‫ ًزية لَ ػّاړّ ّؿّڼْ څغَ اليـمـتـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
3) Superlative degree َ‫عـالـي دسجـ‬

The superlative degree of an adjective denotes the highest degree of
quality, It is used when more than two persons or things are compar-ed.
‫ ػغَ "هماينْي ػؿرَ" ُغَ ّعت‬،‫ػ ٍفت ػالي ػؿرَ ػ کيـفيـت پَ ػالي تـيٌَ ػؿرَ ػاللت کْي‬
.‫امتؼواليږي چي لَ ػّّ څغَ فيات اىغاً اّيا ىياى مـٍ هماينَ کيږي‬
Ex: Nicest , Cleverest , Smallest....etc.

.‫ اّػامي ًْؿ‬.... ‫ کْچٌي تـيي‬، ‫ اليـمـتـيي‬، ‫ ښاينتَ تـيي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Khalid is the cleverest student in the class.
.ٍ‫ عالؼ پَ ټْلګۍ کي اليـمـتـيـي فػٍ کًّْکي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Article (the) is usually used before the superlative degree of an adjective.

.‫( تؼـيف تْؿي هؼوْالً ػ ٍفت لَ ػالي ػؿري څغَ هغکي امتؼواليږی‬the) ‫ػ‬
117
Foramtion of comparative and Superlative degrees:

:َ‫د تـفـضـيلـي اّ عـالـي دسجـْ د تـؾـکيـليـذّ طـشيـق‬
The usual way to form the comparative and superlative degree adding
( er , est , more , most) with the positive degree.
‫ ( فياتْل ػي‬er , est , more , most) ‫ػ تفْيلي اّ ػالي ػؿرْ ػ تيکيليؼّ هؼوْلي ٓـيمَ ػ‬
.ٍ‫لَ هطلمي (ماػٍ) ػؿري مـ‬
Ex: Small – Smaller – Smallest. .‫ کْچٌي ــ کْچٌي تـ ــ کْچٌي تـيي‬:‫هخال‬
Rules: ‫قـاعـذي‬
1) One syllable adjectives take (er) in the comperative and (est) in the
superlative forms.
.‫( اعتياؿّي‬est) ‫( اّ پَ ػالي ىکل کي‬er) ‫يْ ُزايي ٍفت پَ تفْيلي ىکل کي‬
Positive degree Comparative degree Superlative degree

َ‫هطلمَ(ماػٍ) ػؿر‬ َ‫تـفـْيلي ػؿرـ‬ َ‫ػـالـي ػؿرـ‬
Short ‫لٌډ‬ Shorter ‫لٌډ تـ‬ Shortest ‫لٌډ تـيي‬
Tall ‫لْړ‬ Taller ‫لْړ تـ‬ Tallest ‫لْړ تـيي‬
Thick ‫پٌډ‬ Thicker ‫پٌډ تـ‬ Thickest ‫پٌډ تـيي‬
Sad ‫پـيياى‬ Sader ‫پـيياى تـ‬ Sadest ‫پـيياى تـيي‬
When adjectives end in (e) only take (r) in the comparative and (st) in
the superlative forms .
.‫( اعتياؿّي‬st) ‫( اّپَ ػالي ىکل کي‬r) ‫( عتـن ىي پَ تـفـْيلي ىکل يْافي‬e) َ‫کلَ چي ٍفتًَْ پ‬

Fine ‫ًـم‬ finer ‫ًـم تـ‬ Finest ‫ًـم تـيي‬
Brave ‫فړٍ ّؿ‬ Braver ‫فړٍ ّؿ تـ‬ Bravest ‫فړٍ ّؿ تـيي‬
Wise ‫هؼمْل‬ Wiser ‫هؼمْل تـ‬ Wisest ‫هؼمْل تـيي‬
118
2) Two syllable adjectives ending in ((er , ow , le , y)) take (er) in the

comparative and (est) in the superlative forms.
َ‫( اّ پ‬er) ‫(( عتن ىْي ّي پَ تفْيلي ىکل کي‬er , ow , le , y)) َ‫ػٍّ ُزايي ٍفتًَْ چي پ‬
.‫( اعتياؿّي‬est) ‫ػالي ىکل‬

Clever ‫اليك‬ Cleverer ‫اليـمـتـ‬ Cleverest ‫اليمـتـيي‬
Happy ‫عْىضال‬ Happier ‫عْىضال تـ‬ Happiest ‫عْىضال تـيي‬
Noble ‫ىـيف‬ Nobler ‫ىـيف تـ‬ Nobles ‫ىـيف تـيي‬
3) More than two syllable adjectives always form their comparative and
superlative by taking (more) and (most) before the positive degree.
َ‫( پ‬most) ّ‫( ا‬more) ‫لَ ػّّ څغَ فيات ُزايي ٍفتًَْ پغپلْ تـفـْيلي اّ ػالي ػؿرْ کي ػ‬
.‫فياتْلْ مـٍ ػ ماػٍ ىکل څغَ هغکي تيکيليږي‬

Intelligent ‫ُْښياؿ‬ More intelligent ‫ُْښياؿ تـ‬ Most intelligent ‫ُْښياؿ تـيي‬
Beutiful َ‫ښاينت‬ More beutiful ‫ښاينتَ تـ‬ Most beutiful ‫ښاينتَ تـيي‬
(Most + Simple form of adjective) without article (the) means very much.
.‫( تؼـيف تْؿي څغَ پـتَ ػ ډيـ هؼٌی ّؿکْی‬the) ‫ ػ ٍفت لَ ماػٍ ىکل مـٍ ػ‬Most
Ex: Noor Aamad is most intelligent boy. .ٍ‫ ًْؿاصوؼ ډيـ ُْښياؿ ُلک ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Memory: ‫ياداښت‬
The other ways for comparison of adjectives in English language is
using (Like , a lik) and (less ,least).
.ٍ‫( امتؼوالًَْ ػ‬least ,less ( ّ‫ ) ا‬a like ,like) ‫ػ ٍفتًْْ ػ همايني تلَ ٓـيمَ پَ اًګليني ژتَ کي ػ‬
Ex: Hayat runs like deer. .‫ صيات ػ ُْمۍ پَ څيـ هٌډي ُّي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Ahmad is less talented than Saleem. .ٍ‫ اصوؼ لَ ملين څغَ کوتـ امتؼؼاػٍ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
119
Note: Some of the adectives are compared irregularly.

.‫ ځيٌي ٍفـتًَْ پَ تي لاػؼٍ ډّل هماينَ کيږي‬:‫ًـْټ‬

Good َ‫ښ‬ Better ‫ تِتـ‬، ‫ښَ تـ‬ Best ‫ تِتـيي‬، ‫ښَ تـيي‬
Bad ‫تـؼ‬ Worse ‫تـؼ تـ‬ Worst ‫تـؼ تـيي‬
Little ‫کـن‬ Less ‫کـوتـ‬ Leas ‫کوتـيي‬
Much ‫فيات‬ More ‫فيات تـ‬ Most ‫فيات تـيي‬
Far ‫ليـي‬ Farther / Furthe ‫ليـي تـ‬ Farthest / Furthest ‫لـی تـيي‬
Old ‫تْډا‬ Older / elder ‫تْډا تـ‬ Oldest / eldest ‫تْډا تـيي‬
ٍ‫( ػ ډيــّ ځايًْْ لپاؿ‬Further) ‫( يْافي ػ فاٍلي لپاؿٍ امتؼـواليږی هګــ‬Farther) :‫ًـْټ‬
.‫امتؼوالـيـږي‬
‫( هضؼّػ تـ امتؼـوال لـي اّهؼوْالً ػ کْؿًۍ ػ‬elder) ‫( ډيـ امتؼوال لـي هګـ‬Older) :‫ًْټ‬
.‫( لَ اّافي تْؿي مَ ًَ امتؼواليږي‬than) ‫( ػ‬elder) َ‫لْي غړّ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږی اُّوؼاؿًګ‬
Adverbs
َ‫قـيـذًّـ‬
Adverb is a word which is used to add something to the meaning of a
verb , an adjective or another adverb.
.‫ ٍفت اّيا تل ليؼ پَ هؼٌی يْ ىي اّافَ کْي‬، ‫ليؼ ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي ػ فؼل‬
Or: Adverb is a word which modifies the meaning of a verb , an adjective

or another adverb.
.)‫ ٍفت اّيا تل لـيـؼ هؼٌی هؼيٌْي (تِتـٍ کْي‬، ‫ ليؼ ُغَ ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي ػ فؼل‬:‫اّيا‬
Ex: Ahmad runs fast. (verb). .)‫ (فؼل‬.‫ اصوؼ تيق ځغلي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex:He spoke quite correctly. (adverb). ً ‫ ُغَ کاه‬:‫هخال‬
.)‫(ليؼ‬.‫ال پَ ٍضيش ډّل عثـي ّکړي‬
Ex: The Afghans are very hospitable.(adjective). .)‫ (ٍفت‬.‫ افغاًاى ډيـ هيلوَ پال ػي‬:‫هخال‬
120
Kinds of Adverbs
َ‫د قـيـذ ډّلـًْـ‬
Adverbs are mainaly divided into three parts:
:‫قيذًَّ اعاعا ً پَ دسي تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
1. Simple adverbs ًَّ‫عادٍ قـيـذ‬

2. Interrogative adverbs ًَّ‫پْښتًْکي(اعتفِاهي) قيذ‬
3. Relative adverbs ًَّ‫ستـطـي قـيذ‬
1. Simple Adverbs ًَّ‫عـادٍ قـيذ‬

Simple adverbs are extensively used in the daily activities.
.‫ماػٍ ليؼًَّ پَ فياتَ تْګَ پَ ّؿځٌی فؼاليتًْْ کي امتؼواليږي‬
The simple adverbs are devided into eight parts:

:‫عـادٍ قـيـذًَّ پـَ اتـْ تـشخـْ ّيـؾـل ؽــْي دي‬
1) Adverbs of manner: ًَّ‫د حالت يا څشًګْالي قيذ‬

These adverbs show how an action is done.
.‫ػغَ ليؼًَّ ښيي چي يْ ػول څٌګَ مـتَ ؿميږي‬
Some adverbs of manner ًَّ‫ػ څـًګْالي ځيٌي ليؼ‬

Fast ‫تـيـق‬ Hard ‫مغت‬
Slowly َ‫آُـنتـ‬ Bravely َ‫پَ فړٍ ّؿٍ تْګ‬
Clearly ً
‫ پَ ّاّش ډّل‬،‫ّاّضا‬ Probably ‫ پَ اصتوالي ډّل‬،ً‫اصتواال‬
Ex: Asad speaks slowly. .‫ آمؼ آُنتَ عثـي کْي‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Ajmal lived happily. .‫ ارول پَ عْىضال ډّل ژًّؼ تيـّي‬:‫هخال‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
Adverbs of manner only modify verbs and are normally used after the
verbs, but they can have end position.
‫ هګـ کيؼای‬، ‫ػ څـًګْالي ليؼًَّ يْافي فؼلًَْ هؼيٌْي اّ ػوْها ً لَ فؼلًْْ څغَ ّؿّمتَ امتؼواليږي‬
.‫ىي پَ اعيـ کي ځاي ّلـي‬
Ex: Asif speaks politely. .‫ آٍف هاػتاًَ عثـي کْي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The doctor examined the patient carefully. .‫ ډاکتـ پَ ػلت مـٍ ًاؿّؽ هؼايٌَ کړ‬:‫هخال‬
121
2) Adverbs of time: ًَّ‫د ّخت قيذ‬

These adverbs show when an action happened.
.ٍ‫ػغَ ليؼًَّ ښيي چي يْػول څَ ّعت ّالغ ىْي ػ‬
Like: Now , yesterday , tomorrow ....etc.
.‫ اّ ػامي ًْؿ‬..... ‫ مثا‬، ‫ تيـٍ ّؿځ‬، ‫ اّك‬:َ‫لک‬
Ex: We will come here tomorrow. .ْ‫ هْږ تَ مثا ػلتَ ؿاى‬:‫هخال‬
 Adverbs of time are devided into two parts:

:‫د ّخت قيذًَّ پَ دّّ تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
A. Definite adverbs of time ًَّ‫د ّخت هعيي قيذ‬

These adverbs show exact time. .‫ػغَ ليؼًَّ هؼيي ّعت ښـيي‬
Ex: I wrote a letter at five o‟clock last night.
.َ‫ ها تيـٍ ىپَ پَ پٌځَ تزي يٍْ ؿمالَ ّليکل‬:‫هخال‬
B. Indefinite adverbs of time ًَّ‫د ّخت ًاهعيي قيذ‬
These adverbs show inexact time. .‫ػغَ ليؼًَّ ًاهؼيي ّعت ښيي‬
Like: Already , ago , early .....etc. .‫ اّ ػامي ًْؿ‬...... ‫ ّعتي‬، ‫ پغْا‬، ‫ هغکي‬:َ‫لک‬
Ex: I see him many times. .‫ فٍ ُغَ ډيـ ځلي ّيٌن‬:‫هخال‬
3) Adverbs of place: ًَّ‫د هکاى قيذ‬

These show where an action happened.
.ٍ‫ػغَ ليؼًَّ ښيي چي يْ ػول چيـي ّالـغ ىْي ػ‬
Like : Here, There , Up , down , inside , outside ...etc.
.‫ اّ ػامي ًْؿ‬.... ‫ ػتاًؼي‬، ‫ پَ ػاعل کي‬، َ‫ کښت‬، َ‫ پْؿت‬، َ‫ ُلت‬، َ‫ ػلت‬:َ‫لک‬
Ex: Jamal came here yesterday. .‫ روال تيـٍ ّؿځ ػلتَ ؿاغي‬:‫هخال‬
4) Adverbs of reason: ًَّ‫د علت يا ًـتيجي قيذ‬

These adverbs show why an action happened.
.ٍ‫ػغَ ليؼًَّ ښيي چي ّلي يْ ػول ّالغ ىْي ػ‬
Like: So , Therefore , Because ....etc. .‫ اّ ػامی ًْؿ‬.... َ‫ ځک‬، ٍ‫ ػػي لپاؿ‬، ًْ :َ‫لک‬
Ex: Sadiq succeeded in the exam because he studied hard.
.ٍ‫ ٍاػق پَ اهتضاى کي کاهياب ىْ ځکَ ُغَ مغتَ هطالؼَ ّکړ‬:‫هخال‬
122
5) Adverbs of Affirmation and negation: ًَّ‫د تايذ اّ اًکاس قيذ‬

These adverbs show agreement or disagreement with speaker.
.‫ػغَ ليؼًَّ لَ ّيًْکي مـٍ هْافـميت اّ يا هغالفت ښيي‬
Like: No )ًَ( , Of course )َ‫ (الثت‬, May be )‫ (هـوکي‬, Sure )ً‫ (يـميٌا‬, Yes )ُْ(
,Surely )َ‫ (تييک‬, Probably )‫ (ګًْؼي‬....etc.
Ex: Can you speak French? Yes I can.

.‫ آيا تَ پَ فـاًنْي عثـي کْالي ىي؟ ُْ فٍ يي کْالي ىن‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Do you know him? No, I do not. .‫ ًَ يي پيژًن‬، ًَ ‫ آيا تَ ُغَ پيژًي؟‬:‫هخال‬
6) Emphatic adverbs. ًَّ‫تاکيذي قيذ‬

These adverbs show emphasis on an action.
.‫ػغَ ليؼًَّ ػ يْ ػول پَ "مـتَ ؿمْلْ" تاکيؼ ښيي‬
Like: Just )ٔ‫ (فـم‬, Even )‫ ُن‬، ‫ (صتی‬, Too )‫ (ُـن‬....etc.
Ex: He even smokes cigarette now. .‫ ُغَ صتی اّك ُن مګـيټ څکْي‬:‫هخال‬
7) Nameral Adverbs ًَّ‫عذدي قيذ‬

Adverbs of number are used to show how often an action happened.
.ٍ‫ػؼػي ليؼًَّ ػ يْ ػول "مـتَ ؿمْل" ښيي چي څْ ّاؿٍ ّالغ ىْي ػ‬
Like: Once , Twice , Three times ....etc.
.‫ اّ ػامي ًْؿ‬.... ‫ ػؿي ځلي‬، ‫ ػٍّ ځلي‬، ‫ يْ ځلي‬: َ‫لک‬
Ex: I have seen Kandahar twice. .ٍ‫ ها ػٍّ ځلي کٌؼُاؿ ليؼلي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
 Numeral adverbs are divided into two parts:

:‫عـذدي قيذًَّ پَ دٍّ تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
a) Definit numeral adverbs: ًَّ‫هعيي عذدي قيذ‬

These adverbs show exact number. .‫ػغَ ليؼًَّ هؼيي تؼؼاػ ښيي‬
Like: Once )‫ (يْ ځلي‬, Twice )‫ (ػٍّ ځلي‬, Firistly )ً‫ (اّال‬, Secondly )‫ (ػُّـن ّاؿ‬....etc.
Ex: He tried twice. .‫ ُغَ ػٍّ ځلي کْښـښ ّکړ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: I have gone to Mazar once. .‫ فٍ يْ ځل هقاؿ تَ تللي ين‬:‫هخال‬
123
b) Indefinite numeral adverbs: ًَّ‫ًاهعيي عذدي قيذ‬

These adverbs show inexact number. .‫ػغَ ليؼًَّ ًاهؼيي تؼؼاػ ښيي‬
Like : Sometimes )َ‫ (ځـيـٌي ّعـتــًْـ‬, Often )‫ (اکـخــاً ّعـت‬, Usually )ً‫ (هـؼــوـْال‬,
Always )َ‫ (ُويي‬, Several times )‫ (څْ ځلي‬, Seldom)َ‫(کلَ کل‬, Rarely)َ‫(کلَ کل‬...etc.
Ex: Dervish often goes to Kandahar. .‫ ػؿّيو اکخـاً ّعت کٌؼُاؿ تَ ځي‬:‫هخال‬
8) Adverbs of Degree and Quantity: ًَّ‫د دسجي اّ هقذاس قيذ‬

These adverbs show in what degree an action is done.
.‫ػغَ ليؼًَّ ښيي چي يْ ػول پَ کْهَ ػؿرَ مـتَ ؿميږي‬
Like: Very )‫ (ډيـ‬, Quite )ً‫ (کاهال‬, Too )‫ (فيات‬, Enough )‫(کافي‬, Much )‫(ډيـ‬...etc.
Ex: Ahmad runs very fast. .‫ اصوؼ ډيـ تيق ځغلي‬:‫هخال‬
2. Interrogative Adverbs: ًَّ‫پـْښـتـًْکـي (اعتـفـِاهـي) قـيذ‬

The interrogative adverbs are used to ask question.
.‫پْښتًْکي ليؼًَّ ػ مْال ػ تپْمٌي لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬
Interrogative Adverbs ًَّ‫پْښتًْکي ليؼ‬

Why ‫ّلي‬ Where َ‫ چيـت‬، ‫چيـي‬
When ‫ څَ ّعت‬، َ‫کل‬ How long ‫څْهـٍ ّعت‬
How often ٍ‫اکخـاً څْهـ‬
Ex: Where are you living? ‫ تامي چيـي ژًّؼ کْي؟‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: How often does he play chess? ‫ ُغَ اکخـاً څْهـٍ ػ مطـًذ لْتَ کْي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: How long will you continue this class? ‫ تامي تَ څْهـٍ ّعت ػغَ ټْلګۍ تَ اػاهَ ّؿکړي؟‬:‫هخال‬
3. Relative Adverbs ًَّ‫ستـطـي قـيذ‬

The relative adverbs are used to join two sentences.
.‫ؿتطي ليؼًَّ ػ ػّّ رولْ ػ ًښلْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬
Relative Adverbs ًَّ‫ؿتطي ليؼ‬

Why ‫ّلي‬ Where َ‫ چيـت‬، ‫چيـي‬
When ‫ څَ ّعت‬، َ‫کل‬ How ٍ‫څْهـ‬
How often ٍ‫اکخـاً څْهـ‬ If ‫کَ چيـﺉ‬
124
Formation of Adverbs
ًَّ‫د قيذًّْ جْړ‬
Most of the advebs are formed by (ly) at the end of adjectives.
.‫( پَ ّامطَ رْړيږي‬ly) ‫ډيـ ليؼًَّ ػ ٍفت پَ اعيـ کی ػ‬
Like: Perfect – Perfectly )ً‫ (کاهل ـــ کاهال‬, Quick – Quickly )ٍ‫(تيقــ پَ تيقي مـ‬
Rules: ‫قاعـذي‬
1) Adjectives ending in (y) change (y) into (I) and add (ly).
.‫( ػالٍّ کيږي‬ly)ّ‫( تؼليږي ا‬I) َ‫( پ‬y) ‫( عتن ىْي ّي‬y) َ‫ُغَ ٍفتًَْ چي پ‬
Ex: Happy – Happily. .ٍ‫ عْىضال ـــ پَ عْىضالي مـ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Heavy – Heavily. .ٍ‫ مغت ـــ پَ مغتي مـ‬:‫هخال‬
2) Adjectives ending in (ible) and (able) drop (e) and add (y).
.‫( ػالٍّ کيږي‬y) ّ‫( لَ هٌځَ ځي ا‬e) ‫( عتـن ّي‬able) ّ‫( ا‬ible) َ‫ُغَ ٍفتًَْ چي پ‬
Ex: Capable – Capably. .ٍ‫ ځْاکوي ـــ پَ ځْاکوٌتْب مـ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Possible – Possibly. .ً‫ هوکـي ـــ اصتواال‬:‫هخال‬
3) Adjectives ending in (e) take (ly) without any change.

.‫( اعتياؿّي‬ly) َ‫( عتن ّي تي لَ کْم تغيـڅغ‬e) َ‫ُغَ ٍفتًَْ چي پ‬
Ex: Polite – Poliely. .ًَ‫ هاػب ــ هاػتا‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Mere – Merely. .ً‫ ٍـف ـــ ٍـفا‬:‫هخال‬
Exceptions: ‫اعـتـثـٌاّي‬
Like: Due – Duly. )‫ (ًتيزَ ــ پَ ًتيزَ کي‬, Whole – Wholly. )ً‫(کاهل ــ کاهال‬
True – Truly. )ً‫(صميمت ــ صمـيمتا‬
4) Adjectives ending in a single (l) take (ly) but adjectives ending in (ll)
take only (y).
(y) ‫( عتن ّي يْافي‬ll) َ‫( اعتياؿّي هګـ ُغَ ٍفتًَْ چي پ‬ly) ‫( عتن ّي‬l) ‫ُغَ ٍفتًَْ چي‬
.‫اعتياؿّي‬
Ex: Careful – Carfully. .ٍ‫ ػلـت ـــ پَ ػلـت مـــ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Dull – Dully. .ٍ‫ عنتَ ــ پَ عنتګی مـ‬:‫هخال‬
125
Some adjectives and adverbs have the same form,
.‫ځيٌي ٍفتًَْ اّ ليؼًَّ ػيي ىکل لـي‬
Like:Early )ٍ‫ پَ ّعت مـ‬، ‫ (ّعتي‬,Deep )ٍ‫ پَ ژّؿّالي مـ‬،‫(ژّؿ‬, Fast )ٍ‫ پَ تيقي مـ‬،‫(تيق‬
Low ) ٍ‫ پَ کښتَ ّالي مـ‬،َ‫ (کښت‬, Far )ٍ‫ پَ لـي ّالي مـ‬، ‫(لـي‬, high)ٍ‫ پَ لْړّالي مـ‬،‫(لْړ‬
Hard )ٍ‫ پَ مغتی مـ‬، ‫ (مغت‬..... etc.
Ex: Corolla is a fast car.(adjective). .)‫ (ٍفت‬.ٍ‫ کْؿّال يْ تيق هْټـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Asad runs fast. (adverb). .)‫ (لـيؼ‬.‫ آمـؼ پَ تيقي مـٍ ځغلي‬:‫هخال‬
5) Some adjectives are combined with (a) , (be) and (to) and form adverb.
.‫( پَ هغتاړي مـٍ تـکيثـيـږي‬to) ّ‫( ا‬be) ، (a) ‫ځيٌی ٍفتًَْ ػ‬
Ex: Broad – Abroad . ٍ‫ پلي ــ پَ پلٌْالي مـ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Live – Alive. .ٍ‫ ژًّؼي ــ پَ ژًّؼي تْب مـ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Head – Ahead. .ٍ‫ اتتؼاء ــ پَ اتتؼاء مـ‬:‫هخال‬
Comparision of Adverbs
َ‫د قـيـذًّـْ هـقـايـغـ‬
Many of the adverbs are compared as adjectives and have three degrees
of comparison.
.‫ػيـ ليؼًَّ ػيٌا ً ػ ٍفتًْْ پَ څيـ هماينَ کيږي اّ ػ همايني ػؿي ػؿري لـي‬
1) One syllable adverbs form their comparative by adding (er) and the
superlative by (est).
ْ‫( پَ اّافَ کْل‬est) ‫( اّ پَ ػالي "ىکل" کي ػ‬er) ‫يْ ُزايي ليؼًَّ پغپل تفْيلي ىکل کي ػ‬
.‫تيکيليـږي‬
Positive degree َ‫ماػٍ ػؿر‬ Comparative degree َ‫تفْيلي ػؿر‬ Superlative degree ‫ػالي‬
َ‫ػؿر‬
Fast ٍ‫پَ تيقي مـ‬ Faster ٍ‫پَ ډيـ تيقي مـ‬ Fastest ٍ‫پَ ډيـفيات تيقي مـ‬
Hard ٍ‫پَ مغتي مـ‬ Harder ٍ‫پَ ډيـ مغتي مـ‬ Hard ٍ‫پَ ډيـ فيات مغتي مـ‬
Soon ‫ژؿ‬ Sooner ‫ډيـ ژؿ‬ Soonest ‫ډيـ فيات ژؿ‬
126
2) Two or more than two syllable adverbs take (more) in the comparative
and (most) in the superlative forms.
‫( اّپَ ػالي ىکل‬more) ‫ػٍّ يا لَ ػّّ څغَ فيات ُزاء "لـًّکي" ليؼًَّ پَ تفـْيلي ىکل کي‬
.‫( اعتياؿّي‬most) ‫کي‬
Positive degree َ‫ ماػٍ ػؿر‬Comparative degree َ‫ تفْيلي ػؿر‬Superlative degree َ‫ػالي ػؿر‬
Quickly ٍ‫پَ چاتکي مـ‬ More quickly ٍ‫پَ ډيـ چاتکي مـ‬ Most quickly ٍ‫پَ ډيـ فيات چاتکي مـ‬
Bavely ٍ‫پَ فړٍ ّؿتْب مـ‬ More bravely ٍ‫پَ ډيـ فړٍ ّؿتْب مـ‬ Most bravely ٍ‫پَ ډيـ فيات فړٍ ّؿتْ ب مـ‬
3) Some of the adverbs are formed irregularly.

.‫ځيٌي ليؼًَّ پَ تي لاػؼٍ ډّل تيکيليـږي‬
Positive degree َ‫ماػٍ ػؿر‬ Comparative degree َ‫تفْيلي ػؿر‬ Superlative degree َ‫ػالي ػؿر‬
Well ٍ‫ پَ ښَ ّالي مـ‬Better ٍ‫پَ ډيـ ښَ ّالي مـ‬ Best ٍ‫پَ ډيـ فيات ښَ ّالي مـ‬
Little ٍ‫ پَ ليږّالي مـ‬Less ٍ‫پَ ډيـ ليږّالي مـ‬ Least ٍ‫پَ ډيـفيات ليږّالي مـ‬
The correct uses of some adverbs: ‫د ځيٌي قيذًّْ دقيق اعتعواالت‬
1. “Good”: َ‫ښــ‬
“Good” is an adjective which shows condition and modifies nouns.
.‫“ ُغَ ٍفت ػٍ چي ػ کيفيت يا صالت اّ ػ اموًْْ متايٌَ تياًْي‬Good”
Ex: Muneer is a good student. .ٍ‫ هٌيـ يْ ښَ فػٍ کًّْکي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
2. “Well”: َ‫ښـ‬
“Well” is an adverb which expresses good health and modifies verbs.
.‫“ ُغَ ليؼٍ ػٍ چي ښَ ٍضت اّ ػ فؼلًْْ متايٌَ تياًْي‬Well”
Ex: Ahmad always feels well. .‫ اصوؼ ُـ ّعت ښَ اصناك کْي‬:‫هخال‬
3. “Enough”: ‫ تـظ‬، ‫کـافـي‬

“Enough” is an adverb which is used after adjective or adverb , and is
sometimes as adjective , is used before nouns.
َ‫ اّ ځيٌي ّعت ػ ٍفت پ‬،‫“ ُغَ ليؼ ػٍ چي لَ ٍفت يا ليؼ څغَ ّؿّمتَ امتؼواليږي‬Enough”
.‫صيج لَ اموًْْ څغَ هغکي امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: I have enough time to stay here. .‫ فٍ ػلتَ ػ پاتي کيؼّ لپاؿٍ کافي ّعت لـم‬:‫هخال‬
127
4. “Very”: ‫ډيـش‬
“Very” is an adverb which is used before adjectives and other adverbs
to show degree.
.‫“ ُغَ ليؼ ػٍ چي لَ ٍفتًْْ اّ ًْؿّ ليؼًّْ څغَ هغکي امتؼواليږي اّ ػؿرَ ښيی‬Very”
Ex: This hous is very large. .ٍ‫ ػغَ کْؿ ډيـ غټ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
5. “Much”: ‫ صيات‬،‫ډيـش‬
“Much” is both adverb and adjective which shows amount or quantity , it
can be also used before comparative degree.
‫ اّ ُوؼاؿًګَ کيؼاي ىي لَ تفْيلي‬، ‫“ ُـن ليؼ ػٍ ُـن ٍفت چي همؼاؿ اّ اًؼافٍ تياًْي‬Much”
.‫څغَ هغکي امتؼوال ىي‬
Ex: This hous is much large than that hous.
.ٍ‫ ػغَ کْؿ لَ ُغَ کْؿڅغَ ډيـ لْي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
6. “Still”: َ‫ تشاّعـ‬، َ‫ال تشاّعـ‬
“Still” is used for a period of time that continued from the past to pres-
ent , and it is used in declarative (affirmative , negative and question)
sentences.
ّ‫ ا‬، ‫“ ػ ّعت ػ ػّؿاى لپاؿٍ پکاؿ ّړل کـيږي چـي لَ هاّي څغَ تـاّمَ اػاهَ لـي‬Still”
.‫ هٌفي اّ مْالي) رولْ کي امتؼواليږي‬، ‫ػغَ "ليؼ" پَ عثـي (هخثت‬
Ex: Are you still working now? ‫ آيا تَ تـاّمَ پْؿي پَ کاؿ هَـّف يي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: It is still raining. ‫ تـاّمَ پْؿي تاؿاى ّؿيږي‬:‫هخال‬
7. “Yet”: َ‫ تـشاّعـ‬، َ‫التـشاّعـ‬

“Yet” is used to show duration from present to future. It is used in que-
stion and negative statement sentences.
‫ ػغَ ليؼ مْالي اّ هٌفي‬.‫“ ػ رـياى لپاؿٍ لَ صال څغَ تـ ؿاتلًّْکي پْؿي امتؼواليږي‬Yet”
.‫تياًيَ رولْ کي امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: Abdul Hadi has not yet completed the work.
.‫ ػثؼالِاػي تـاّمَ کاؿ ًؼٍ تکويل کړي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Is the lunch ready yet ? ‫ آيا تـ اّمَ ػ غـهي ډّډۍ اهاػٍ ػٍ ؟‬:‫هخال‬
8. “Already”: ‫ پـخـْا‬، ‫هـخـکـي‬

“Already” is used to say that something is in the present or past but not
the future.
‫“ ػ يْ ىي ػ هْرْػيت لپاؿٍ پَ صال يا هاّي کي امتؼواليږي هګـ پَ ؿاتلًّْکي‬Already”
."‫ًَ "امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: I have already gone to Pakistan. .‫ فٍ پغْا پاکنتاى تَ تللی يـن‬:‫هخال‬
128
9. “Either”: ‫ ُــن‬، َ‫ُـذاسًګـ‬

“Either” means (too or also) it is used in negative sentences the adverbs
like (as well ) , (also) , (too) are change to (either).
، (as well ) َ‫ ُـوـؼاؿًګَ) هؼـٌی ّؿکْي پَ هٌـفي رولْ کی ليؼًَّ لک‬، ‫“ ػ (ُـن‬Either”
.‫( تاًؼي تؼليږي‬either) َ‫( پ‬too) , (also)
Ex: He is not a teacher either. .ٍ‫ ُغَ ُـن هـؼـلـن ًؼ‬:‫هخال‬
10. “Too”: َ‫ ُـوذاسًګ‬، ‫ُـن‬

“Too” is used at the end of the sentences.
.‫“ ػ رولْ پَ اعيـ کي امتؼواليږی‬Too”
Ex: He will fail in exam too. .‫ ُغَ تَ ُـن پَ اهتضاى کي ًاکام ىي‬:‫هخال‬
11. “Also”: َ‫ ُـوـذاسًګ‬، ‫ُـن‬

“Also” is usually used at the middle and at the end of the sentences.
.‫“ هؼوْالً ػ رولْ پَ هٌځ اّ اعيـ کي امتؼواليږي‬Also”
Ex: Shabeer is a doctor also. .ٍ‫ ىثيـ ُـن يْ ډاکتـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Shabeer is also a doctor. .ٍ‫ ىثيـ ُـن يْ ډاکتـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
12. “Fairly”: ‫ پَ هتْعظ ډّل‬، َ‫ پَ هٌاعثَ تْګ‬، ً ‫ًغثتا‬

“Fairly” is used to express a positive meaning.
.‫“ ػ هخثت هفِْم ػ تياًْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Fairly”
Ex: This water is fairly hot. .‫ ػغَ اّتَ ًنثتا ً ګـهي ػي‬:‫هخال‬
13. “Rather”: ٍ‫ تش يٍْ اًذاص‬، ً ‫ ًغثتا‬، ‫لَ حذٍ صيات‬

“Rather” is used to express a negative idea and discofort.
.‫“ ػ هٌفي هفکْؿي اّ ًا اؿاهتيا لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬Rather”
Ex: This water is rather hot. .‫ ػغَ اّتَ لَ صؼٍ فياتي ګـهي ػي‬:‫هخال‬
14. “Only”: ‫ يـْاصي‬، ‫فـقـظ‬

“Only” is used before the words and it modifies.
.‫“ لَ کلوْ څغَ هغکي امتؼواليږي اّ ُغَ هؼيٌْي‬Only”
Ex: He only fixed the car. .‫ ُغَ فمٔ هْټـ تـهين کړ‬:‫هخال‬
129
Future perfect tense

ًَ‫ساتلًّْکي کاهلَ صها‬
Helping verbs of F. P tense ًَْ‫ػ صال کاهلي فهاى کْهکي فؼل‬
Will have / Shall have Will have / Shall have
Affirmative form
‫هثثت ؽکل‬ Sub + Will /Shall + Have + V3 + Comp.
Ex: I will have finished the work. .‫ ها تَ کاؿ عتن کړي ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Question form
‫عْالي ؽکل‬ Will /Shall + Sub + Have + V3 + Comp?
Ex: Will I have finished the work? ‫ آيا هاتَ کاؿ عتن کړي ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form
‫هٌفي ؽکل‬ Sub + Will /Shall + Not + Have + V3 + Comp .
Ex: I will not have finished the work. .‫ هاتَ کاؿ عتن کړي ًَ ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Will /Shall +Sub + Not + Have + V3 + Comp -?
Negative interrogative Ex: Will I not have finished the work? ‫ آيا هاتَ کاؿ عتن کړي ًَ ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Won‟t/Shan‟t + Sub + Have + V3 + Comp -?
Ex: Won‟t I have finished the work? ‫ آيا هاتَ کاؿ عتن کړي ًَ ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
1) Usage: Future prefect tense is used to show an action which will

have been completed before some specified time or before another
action in the future.
‫ ؿاتلًّْکي کاهلَ فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػـول ػ تياًْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼوالـيږي چي پَ ؿاتلًّْکي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۱
.‫کي تَ لَ هؼيي ّعت څغَ هغکي اّيا لَ تل ػول څغَ هغکي تکويل ىي‬
Ex: They will have eaten food before we arrive home.
.‫ فهْږ لَ ؿاؿميؼّ هغکي تَ ػّي ډّډۍ عْړلی ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I will have prepared every thing when you arrive home.
.‫ تـُغَ ّعت چي تيـتَ کْؿتَ ؿاګـځي ها تَ ټْل ىياى چوتْ کړي ّي‬:‫هخال‬
2) Usage: Future perfect tense is used to show an action that will be

completed at some unspecified time in the future.
‫ ؿاتلًّْکي کاهلَ فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول ػ تياى لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي پَ ؿاتلًّْکي کي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۱
.‫تَ پَ يْ ًا هؼيي ّعت کي تکويل ىْي ّي‬
Ex: We will have completed the homework 7:00 in the morning.

.‫ تزْ پْؿي کْؿًی کاؿ عتن کړي ّي‬۷:۱۱ ‫ هْږ تَ تـ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Ahmad will have started the work by next April.
.‫ اصوؼ تَ تـ ؿاتلًّْکي آپـيل پْؿي کاؿ عتن کړي ّي‬:‫هخال‬
130
Future perfect continuous tense

ًَ‫ساتلًّْکي کاهلَ جاسی صها‬
Helping verbs of F. P tense ًَْ‫ػ صال کاهلي فهاى کْهکي فؼل‬
Will have been / Shall have been Will have been / Shall have been
Affirmative form
‫هثثت ؽکل‬ Sub + Will /Shall + Have + been + V - ing + Comp.
Ex: Ali will have been playing chess. .‫ ػلي تَ ػ مطـًذ پَ لْتَ تْعت ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Question form
‫عْالي ؽکل‬ Will /Shall + Sub + Have + been + V - ing + Comp?
Ex: Will Ali have been playing chess? ‫ آيا ػلي تَ ػ مطـًذ پَ لْتَ تْعت ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form
‫هٌفي ؽکل‬ Sub + Will /Shall + Not + Have + been + V - ing + Comp .
Ex: Ali will not have been playing chess. .‫ ػلي تَ ػمطـًذ پَ لْتَ تْعت ًَ ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Will /Shall +Sub + Not + Have + been + V - ing + Comp -?
Negative interrogative Ex: Will Ali not have been playing chess? ‫ آيا ػلي تَ ػ مطـًذ پَ لْتَ تْعت ًَ ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Won‟t/Shan‟t + Sub + Have + been + V - ing + Comp -?
Ex: Won‟t Ali have been playing chess? ‫ آيا ػلي تَ ػ مطـًذ پَ لْتَ تْعت ًَ ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
1) Usage: The future perfect continuous tense is used to show the dura-
tion of an action which will be continuing before some specified time
or before another action in the future.
‫ ؿاتلًّْکي کاهلَ راؿی فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول ػ رـياى ػ ښْػلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۱
‫پَ ؿاتلـًّْکي کي تَ لَ هؼـيي ّعت څغَ هغکي اّيا لَ تل ػول څغَ هغکـي ػ ػّام پَ صالت کی‬
.‫ّی‬
Diagram:
Ex: They will have been reading since night.

.‫ ُغْي تَ لَ ىپي ؿاپؼي عْا پَ لْمتلْ هيغْل ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I will have been sleeping for two hours by the time he gets home.
.‫ څْ چي ُغَ کْؿتَ ؿاځي ها تَ ػ ػّّ ماػتْ لپاؿٍ عْب کړی ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex:You will have been playing volleyball with us for two hours tomorrow.
.‫ تامي تَ مثا لَ هْږ مـٍ ػ ػّّ ماػتْ لپاؿٍ ػ ّاليثال پَ لْتَ هيغْل يامت‬:‫هخال‬
131
Clause
‫ فشض‬، ‫ ؽشط‬، َ‫قضي‬
A group of words which has subject and predicate and forms part of a
sentence is called clause.
‫ُغَ ګـّپ ػ کلوْ چـي ػ هثتؼا اّ عثـ لـًّکـي ّي اّ ػ رولي يٍْ تـعـَ رْړٍ کـړي ػ لـْي پَ ًْم‬
.‫ياػيږي‬
Ex: That he was fine. .ٍّ َ‫ چي ُغَ ښ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Why I came here. .‫ فٍ ّلي ػلتَ ؿاغلن‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Which I bought last year. .‫ چي ها تيـ کال ّاعينت‬:‫هخال‬
But if we add another sentence with each of them, then they can make
a complete sense.
‫ پَ ُغـَ ّعت کـي تَ تيا کاهل هفِـْم‬،ّ‫هګــ کَ چيـي يٍْ تلَ رولَ لَ ُغـْي ُـ يْ مـٍ اّافَ کـړ‬
.‫افاػٍ کړی‬
Ex: Ahmad said that he was fine. .ٍّ َ‫ اصوؼ ّّيل چي ُغَ ښ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: This is the car which I bought last year. .‫ ػغَ هْټـ ػٍ چي ها تيـ کال ّاعينت‬:‫هخال‬
The sentences which support them are called principal and the others are
subordinating clauses.
.‫ُغَ رولي چي ػ لْيي صوايت کْي ػ اٍلي لْي اّ ًْؿي ػ فـػي لْيْ پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
1) Principle (Independent) clause: َ‫اصـلي (هـغتقـلَ) قـضـي‬

The part sentence which makes complete meaning is called principal
clause.
.‫ػ رولي ُغَ تـعَ چي کاهلَ هؼٌی افاػٍ کړي ػػ اٍلي لْي پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Ex: This is a student. . ٍ‫ ػغَ يْ فػٍ کًّْکی ػ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: That is a play. .ٍ‫ ُغَ يٍْ لْتَ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
2) Subordinating (Dependent) clause: َ‫فـشعـي( غيشهغـتقلَ) قضي‬

The part of the sentence which does not express a complete meaning and
can not stand alone is called subordinating clause.
‫ػ رولي ُغَ تـعَ چي هؼٌی تياى ًکړي اّ پَ تٌِايي مـٍ "هفِْم" ّؿًکړي ػ فـػي لْيي پَ ًْم‬
.‫ياػيږي‬
Ex: That he likes very much. .‫ چي ُغَ ډيـ فيات عْښْي‬:‫هخال‬
132
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
The Sprincipal and subordinating clause are connected by conjunction
such as ; who , whom , whose , which , that , what , when , where .... etc.
what ,that ,which ,whose ,whom ,who ‫اٍلي اّ فــػي لْيي ػ ؿتطی پَ ّامطَ لکـَ؛‬
.‫ اّ ػامي ًْؿ ٍّليږي‬.... when ,
The clauses are divided into three parts:

:‫قضـي پَ دسي تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
1) Noun Clause. َ‫امــوــي لــْـي‬
2) Adjective Clause. َ‫ٍفــتي لـْـي‬
3) Adverb Clause. َ‫لـيـؼي لـْـي‬
1) Noun Clause َ‫اعــوــي قــضــيـ‬

A group of words which has subject and predicate of its own and does
the work of a noun is called noun clause.
َ‫ُغَ ګـّپ ػ کلوْ چي ػ هثتؼا اّ عثـ لـًّکي ّي اّ ػ امـن کاؿ تـمـٍ کړي ػ اموي لْيي پ‬
Ex: Naim said that he would buy a new car.
.‫ ًؼـيـن ّّيـل چـي ُـغـَ يْ ًـْي هـْټــ اعـيـنـت‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: What he says is not logical.
.ٍ‫ څــَ ىــي چــي ُــغــَ ّايـــي هـٌـطـمــي ًـؼ‬:‫هخـال‬
Ex: Ali mentioned that he passed the exam successfully.
.‫ ػلي ؽکـ کړٍ چي اهتضاى يي پَ کاهياتَ ډّل تـمـٍ کړ‬:‫هخال‬
2) Adjective Clause: َ‫ّصـــفــي قـضــيـ‬

A group of words which has subject and predicate of its and does the
work of an adjective is called adjective clause.
َ‫ُغـَ ګـّپ ػ کلـوْ چـي ػ هثتؼا اّ عثـ لـًّکي ّي اّ ػ ٍفت کاؿ تـمــٍ کړي ػ ٍّفي لْي پ‬
Ex: Karrim is a boy who can speak Pashto well.
.‫ کـين ُغَ ُلک ػٍ چي پَ کْالي ىي پَ پښتْ ښَ عثـي ّکړي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He is the student who won the race.
.ْ‫ ُغَ فػٍ کـًّْکي ػٍ چي ػ هناتـمي ّړًّـکي ىـ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: This is the book which I want to present it to you.
.‫ ػغـَ کتاب ػٍ چـي غْاړم ُغـَ تاتَ ډالـۍ کـړم‬:‫هخال‬
133
Some times especially conversion the relative pronoun are omitted when
the sentence has object case.
‫ځيٌي ّعتًَْ هؼوْالً کلَ چي پَ عثـّ اتـّ يا هکالوَ کي رولَ هفؼـْلي صالت ّلـي هٍْْلي‬
.‫(ؿتطي) ّويـ لَ هٌځَ ّړل کيږي‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- This is the chair which he sits on. .‫ػغَ چْکۍ ػٍ چي ُغَ پـي کښيٌي‬
- This is the chair he sits on. .‫ػغَ چْکۍ ػٍ "چي" ُغَ پـي کښيٌي‬
Note:‫ًْټ‬
Some times the principal clause is divided into two parts by subordinat-
ing adjective clause.
.‫ځيٌي ّعتًَْ اٍلي لْيَ ػ فـػي ٍّفي لْي پَ ّامطَ پَ ػّّ تـعْ ّييل کيږي‬
Ex: The man whom I met yesterday is one of my old friends.
َ‫د اصلي قضي لْهړۍ تشخ‬ َ‫فــشعــي قــضـيـ‬ َ‫د اصلي قضيي دُّوَ تشخ‬
.ٍّ َ‫ چامـٍ چي ها تيـٍ ّؿځ هاللات ّکړ يْ فها لَ هلګـّ څغ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The house which he lives in is very beutiful.
َ‫د اصلي قضي لْهړۍ تشخ‬ َ‫فــشعــي قــضـيـ‬ َ‫د اصلي قضيي دُّوَ تشخ‬
.‫ کْؿ چي ُغَ پکي ډيـ ښکلي ژًّؼ تيـّي‬:‫هخال‬
3) Adverb Clause: َ‫قـيـذي قــضــيــ‬

A group of words which has subject and predicate of the own and does
the work of an adverb is called adverb clause.
َ‫ُغَ ګـّپ ػ کلوْ چي ػ هثتؼا اّ عثـ لـًّکي ّي اّ ػ "لـيـؼ" کاؿ تـمـٍ کړي ػ ليؼ ي لْي پ‬
Ex: He did not study so he failed in the exam.
.ْ‫ ُغَ ػؿك ًَّ ّايَ ًْ پَ اهتضاى کي ًاکام ى‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The thief escapted when he saw the police.
.‫ کلَ چـي يي پْليل ّليؼ غل ّتـښـتيـؼ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: If you study your lessons, you will succeed in the exam.
.‫ پَ اهتضاى کي تَ کاهياب ىي‬، ‫ کَ چيـي تَ عپل ػؿمًَْ ّّايي‬:‫هخال‬
134
Additions to remarks
)ّّ‫ضوايـن پَ ًظشياتْ(هلتيا‬
Additions to remarks show coordination or discoordination between two
persons or things.
.‫ّواين پَ ًظـياتْ ػ ػّّ اىغاٍْ يا ػّّ ىياًْ تـهٌځ کي تـاتـي اّ ًا تـاتـي ښکاؿٍ کْي‬
Ex: He is an engineer and I am too. .‫ ُغَ يْ اًزيٌـ ػٍ اّ فٍ ُـن‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: He is a student but Ajmal is not. .ٍ‫ ُغَ يْ فػٍ کًّْکی ػٍ هګـ ارول ًؼ‬:‫هخال‬
Remark is the first longer sentence which expresses the first idea.
.‫ػ لْهړي ػؿافتـي رولی ًظـيَ ػٍ چي لْهړي هفکْؿٍ تياًْي‬
Ex: Najeeb is a clever student. .ٍ‫ ًزية يْ اليك فػٍ کًّْکي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Note:‫ًْټ‬
Addition is the second shorter sentence which is added at the end of the
remark and expresses the second idea.
.‫ػ ػُّوي لٌډ تـي رولي ّويوَ ػٍ چي ػ ًظـيي پَ اعيـ کي اّافَ کيږي اّ ػُّوی هفکْؿٍ تياًْي‬
Ex: Hikmat is too. .‫ صکوت ُـن‬:‫هخال‬
1) Affirmative additions to affirmative remarks are formed by:
(Subject + auxiliary + too) or (So + auxiliary + Subject).
(So + auxiliary + Subject) ّ‫( ا‬Subject + auxiliary + too) ‫هخثت ّوايـن پَ هخثتًْظـياتْ ػ‬
.‫پَ ّامطَ تيکيليږي‬
Ex: He comes to school and I do too. .‫ ُغَ ښّْځۍ تَ ؿاځي اّ فٍ ُـن‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: He could play football well so could his friends.
.‫ ُغَ ّکْالي ىْاي ػ فْټثال ښَ لْتَ ّکړي اّ هلګـي يي ُـن‬:‫هخال‬
2) Negative additions to affirmative remarks are formed by:

(But + Subject + negative auxiliary).
.‫( پَ ّامطَ تيکيليږي‬But + Subject + negative auxiliary) ‫هٌفي ّواين پـًظـياتْ ػ‬
Ex: He is a teacher but I am not. .‫ ُغَ يْ ښًّْکي ػٍ هګـ فٍ ًَ ين‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: I saw him yesterday but he didn‟t . .‫ ها ُغَ تيـٍ ّؿځ ُغَ ّليؼ هګـ ُغَ ًَّ ليؼم‬:‫هخال‬
135
3) Affirmative additions to negative remarks are formed by:

(But + Subject + auxiliary).
.‫( پَ ّامطَ تيکيليږي‬But + Subject + auxiliary) ‫هخثت ّواين پَ هٌفي ًظـياتْ ػ‬
Ex: He can‟t speak Pashto but I can. .‫ ُغَ پَ پښتْ عثـي ًيي کْال هګـ فٍ يي کْالي ىن‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Muhammad has failed but I haven‟t. .‫ هضوؼ ًاکام ىْي ػٍ هګـ فٍ ًَ ين ىْي‬:‫هخال‬
4) Negative additions to negative remarks are formed by:

(Sub + auxiliary + neither) and (Sub + negative auxiliary + either).
(Sub + negative auxiliary + either) ّ‫( ا‬Sub + auxiliary + neither) ‫هٌفي ّواين پَ هٌفي ًظـياتْ ػ‬
.‫پَ ّامطَ تيکيليږي‬
Ex: I can not speak Urdu and he can neither.

.‫ فٍ پَ اؿػّ عثـي ًين کْالي اّ ُغَ ُن ًيي کْالي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I will not fail in the exam and he will not either.
.‫ فٍ تَ پَ اهتضاى کي ًاکام ًيـن اّ ُغَ تَ ُـن ًـيي‬:‫هخال‬
Simple Future in the past tense

ًَ‫پَ تيشٍ کي ساتلًّْکي عادٍ صها‬
Helping verbs ًَْ‫کـْهکـي فـؼـلـ‬
Would / Should Would / Should
Structure: ‫جْړښټ‬
Affirmative form
‫ هثثت ؽکل‬Sub + Would / Should + V1 + Comp.
Ex: I would visit him in the park. .‫ فٍ تَ لَ ُغَ مـٍ پَ پاؿک کي ګْؿم‬:‫هخال‬
Question form
‫عْالي ؽکل‬ Would / Should + Sub + V1 + Comp?
Ex: Would I visit him in the park? ‫ آيا فٍ تَ لَ ُغَ مـٍ پَ پاؿک کي ّګْؿم؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form
‫هٌفي ؽکل‬ Sub + Would / Should + Not + V1 + Comp .
Ex: I would not visit him in the park. .‫ فٍ تَ لَ ُغَ مـٍ پَ پاؿک کي ًَّ ګْؿم‬:‫هخال‬
Would / Should +Sub + Not + V1 + Comp -?
Negative interrogative Ex: Would I not visit him in the park?‫ آيا فٍ تَ لَ ُغَ مـٍ پَ پاؿک کي ًَّ ګْؿم؟‬:‫هخال‬
Wouldn‟t / Shouldn‟t + Sub + V1 + Comp -?
Ex: Wouldn‟t I visit him in the park? ‫ آيا فٍ تَ لَ ُغَ مـٍ پَ پاؿک کي ًَّ ګْؿم؟‬:‫هخال‬
136
1) Usage: Simple future in the past is used to show an action which

would take place at some specified time in the future of the past
(a future that was considered future in the past time) but the action
did not take place.
َ‫ پَ تيـٍ کي ؿاتلًّْکي ماػٍ فهاًَ کي ػ ُغَ ػول ػ تياى لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي پ‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۱
‫تيـ ؿاتلًّْکـي ( ُغَ ؿاتلًّْکي چي پَ هاّي کي ؿاتلًّْکي ّي) کي تَ مــتَ ؿميؼٍ هګــ‬
.ٍ‫ػول ّالغ ىْي ًؼ‬
Note: Future in the past tenses are usually followed by the improbable
conditional sentences.
.‫ ؿتلًّْکي فهاًی پَ هاّي کي هؼوْالً ػ ًاهـوکٌَ ىـٓيَ رولْ پَ ّامطَ تؼمـيثـيږي‬:‫ًْټ‬
Ex: I would do as you said if I had time.

.ٍّ‫ کَ چيـي ها ّعت ػؿلْػای څٌګَ چي هي ػؿتَ ّيلي مـتَ هي ؿما‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I should happy, if I had money as you have.

.‫ عْىضالَ تَ ّم‬، ‫ کَ هي ػ متا پَ څيـ پيني ػؿلْػاي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: You would not live such a small house, if you were a millinair.
.ٍّ‫ تا تَ پَ ػّهـٍ کْچٌي کْؿکي ژًّؼ ًَ کا‬، ‫ کَ چيـي تَ هيلًْـ ّاي‬:‫هخال‬
Future in the past continuous tense

ًَ‫پـَ تـيـشٍ جـاسی کـي ساتلًّْکي صها‬
Helping verbs ًَْ‫کـْهکـي فـؼـلـ‬
Would be / Should be Would be / Should be
Structure: ‫جْړښټ‬
Affirmative form
‫ هثثت ؽکل‬Sub + Would / Should + Be + V1 - ing + Comp.
Ex: He would be playing chess. .‫ ُغَ تَ ػ مطـًذ پَ لْتَ هَـّف ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Question form
‫عْالي ؽکل‬ Would / Should + Sub + Be + V1 - ing +Comp?
Ex: Would he be playing chess? ‫ آيا ُغَ تَ ػ مطـًذ پَ لْتَ هَـّف ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form
‫هٌفي ؽکل‬ Sub + Would / Should + Not + Be + V1 - ing + Comp .
Ex: He would not be playing chess. .‫ ُغَ تَ ػ مطـًذ پَ لْتَ هَـّف ًَ ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Would / Should +Sub + Not + Be + V1 - ing + Comp -?
Negative interrogative Ex: Would he not be playing chess? ‫ آيا ُغَ تَ ػ مطـًذ پَ لْتَ هَـّف ًَ ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Wouldn‟t / Shouldn‟t + Sub + Be + V1 - ing + Comp -?
Ex: Wouldn‟t he be playing chess? ‫ آيا ُغَ تَ ػ مطـًذ پَ لْتَ هَـّف ًَ ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
137
1) Usage: Future in the past continuous tense is used to show the dura-
tion of an action that would be in progress at some specified time in
the future of the past but the action did not happen.
‫ پَ تيـٍ راؿی کي ؿاتلًّْکي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ کاؿ ػ رـياى لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي‬:‫) اعتعـوـال‬۱
ٍ‫پَ هؼـيي ّعت کي تَ پَ ؿاتلًّْکي تيـٍ فهاًَ کي ػ رــياى پَ صالت کي ّي هګــ ػول ًؼ‬
.‫ّالـغ ىْي‬
Ex: The kids would be going to the pool if the parents admitted them.
.‫ کَ چيـي هْؿ اّپالؿ هاىْهاًْ تَ ارافٍ ّؿکړي ٍّ ُغْي تَ صُْ تَ تلل‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I would not be calling him if I didn‟t have a necessity.

.ٍّ‫ کَ هي ّـّؿت ًَ ػؿلْػاي ټْل هي ّؿتَ ًَ کا‬:‫هخال‬
.‫ ػغَ فهاًَ ػ ؿاتلًّْکي راؿي فهاًي پَ ځاي پَ غيـ هنتمين عثـّ کښي امتؼواليږي‬:‫ًْټ‬
Conjunctions
‫د ّصل (ستظ) تْسي‬
Conjunction is a word which is used to join two words ,two sentences ,

two phrasws and two clauses.
ٍ‫ ػّّ ىـياًْ اّ ػّّ لـْي ػ ٍّلْلـْ لپاؿ‬، ْ‫ ػّّ روـل‬، ْ‫ػ ؿتـٔ تْؿي ُغـَ کلوَ ػٍ چي ػ ػّّ کلـوـ‬
.‫امتؼوالـيږي‬
Ex: Arfan and Muzamil are brothers. .‫ ػــفاى اّ هقهل ّؿّڼَ ػي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I was present but he was absent. .ٍّ ‫ فٍ صاّـ ّم هګـ ُغَ غيـ صاّـ‬:‫هخال‬
 Conjunction are divided into four parts:

:‫د ستظ تْسي پَ څلْسّ تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
1) Coordinating Conjunctions: ‫ ُوپايَ تْؿي‬، ٍْ‫ ُوم‬، ‫ػ ٍّل تـاتـ‬

2) Correlative Conjunctions: ‫ػ ٍّل رْړٍ يي تْؿي‬
3) Compound Conjunctions: ‫ػ ٍّل هـکة تْؿي‬
4) Suberdinating Conjunctions: ‫ػ ٍّل فـػي تْؿي‬
138
1) Coordinating Conjunctions: ‫ ُوپايَ تْسي‬، ٍْ‫ ُوقـ‬، ‫د ّصل تشاتش‬

The coordinating conjunctions are used to join coordinating sentences.
. ‫ػ ٍّل تـاتـ يا ُوپايَ تْؿي ػ ػّّ رولْ ػ ٍّلْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬
Ex: I am a doctor and he is a student. .ٍ‫ فٍ يْ ډاکتـين اّ ُغَ يْ فػٍ کًّْکي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
 The coordinating conjunction are divided into five parts:

:‫د ّصل تشاتش يا ُوقٍْ تْسي پَ پٌځْ تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
A. Cumulative Conjunctions: ‫د ّصل صياتًْکی (هتشاکن) تْسي‬
The cumulative conjunctions are used to one idea to another idea or one
action to another action.
ٍ‫ػ ٍّل فياتًْکي تْؿي يٍْ هفکْؿٍ لَ تلي هفکْؿي مـٍ يا يْ ػول لَ تل ػول مـٍ ػ ٍّلْلْ لپاؿ‬
Some cumulative conjunctions ‫ځيٌي هتـاکن ػ ٍّل تْؿي‬
And ّ‫ا‬ Both .......... and ‫ُـن‬............ ‫ُـن‬
Too َ‫ ُوؼاؿًګ‬، ‫ُـن‬ Neither ......... nor ًَ ......... ًَ
Also َ‫ُـوؼاؿًګ‬ Not only ..... but also َ‫ تلک‬...... ‫ًَ يْافي‬
So ‫ ُوؼامي‬، ًْ As well as ٍّ‫ تـػال‬، َ‫ اګـچ‬، َ‫ُوؼاؿًګ‬
Ex: Not only he comes late but also complains.

.‫ ُغَ ًَ يْافي ًاّعتَ ؿاغي تلکَ ىکايت ُـن کْي‬:‫هخال‬
B. Alternative Conjunctions: ‫د ّصل اختياسي تْسي‬

These conjunction express a choice between two actions or ideas.
.‫ػ ٍّل ػغَ تْؿي ػ ػّّ ػولًْْ يا هفکْؿّ تـهٌځ اًتغاب ښيي‬
Some alternative conjunctions ‫ځـيٌي اعتياؿي ػ ػ ٍّل تْؿي‬

Or else ًَ َ‫ک‬ Or ‫ اّيا‬، ‫يا‬
Othewise ًَ َ‫ اّ ک‬، ًَ َ‫ک‬ Either ........ or ‫ يا‬........ ‫يا‬
Ex: Do not be naughty or else he will punish you.

.‫ ىْعی هکٍْ کَ ًَ رـقايي تَ ىي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Come on time otherwise I don‟t let you.
.‫ پَ ّعت ؿاځَ اّکَ ًَ پـي تَ ػي ًـږػم‬:‫هخال‬
139
C. Explanatory Conjunction: ‫د ّصل تْضيحي(څشګٌذًّکي) تْسي‬

These conjunctions usually add details to the words or sentences.
.‫ػ ٍّل ػغَ تْؿي هؼوْالً پَ رولَ کي رقيات فياتْي‬
Some explanatory conjunctions ‫ځيٌي تّْيضي ػ ٍّل تْؿي‬

For ‫ ػػي لپاؿ چي‬، ٍ‫لپاؿ‬ That is to say ‫پَ تل ػثاؿت‬
Such as َ‫لک‬ For instance ‫ػ ًوًْي پَ ډّل‬
As ‫ څٌګَ چي‬، َ‫پَ تْګ‬ For example ‫ػ هخال پَ ډّل‬
That is ‫يؼٌي‬
Ex: The teacher punished him for he was lazy.

.ٍّ ‫ ښًّْکي ُغَ ػػي لپاؿٍ رقايي کړ "چي" ټٌـثل‬:‫هخال‬
D. Adversative Conjunctions: ‫هتضاد د ّصل تْسي‬

The adversative conjunctions are used to joins the contradictory sentences.
.‫هتْاػ ػ ٍّل تْؿي ػ هتْاػّ رولْ ػ ٍّلْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬
Some adversative conjunctions ‫ځيٌي هتْاػ ػ ٍّل تْؿي‬
But ‫هګــ‬ But on the contrary ‫ هګـ تـعالف‬، ‫هګـ پَ عالف‬
Neverthless ‫مـٍ لَ ػي‬ On the other hand ‫لَ تلي عْا‬
However ‫ عْ تيا ُن‬، ‫پَ ُـ صال‬ But yet َ‫هګـ تـ اّم‬
While ‫ مـٍ لَ ػي چي‬،‫ ُغَ ّعت چي‬، ‫تـڅْ چي‬ Where as ‫ پَ صميمت کي‬، ‫ پَ ػامي صال کي چي‬، ‫لَ ػي کثلَ چي‬
Ex: My friend is lazy where-as I am clever.

.‫ فها هلګـی ټٌثل ػٍ پَ ػامي صال کي چي فٍ ځيـک ين‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Ahmad is generous but poor. .ٍ‫ اصوؼ مغي ػٍ هګـ غـية ػ‬:‫هخال‬
E. Illative Conjunctions: ‫د علت اّ ًتيجي د ّصل تْسي‬

The illatttive conjunctions are placed between two sentences and show the
conclusion of the first one the second one.
.‫ػ ػلت اّ ًتيزي ػ ٍّل تْؿي ػ ػّّ رولْ تـهٌځ ؿاّړل کيږي اّ ػ يٍْ ًتيزَ تل يٍْ تَ ښيي‬
Some Illative conjunctions ‫ځـيٌي ػ ػلت اّ ًتيزي ػ ٍّل تْؿي‬

Therefore َ‫ لَ ُغَ کثل‬، َ‫ لَ ُغَ مثث‬On that account ٍ‫لَ ُغَ عآـ‬
So ًْ ، ‫ُوؼامي‬
Ex: I was sick so I went to sleep earlier. .‫ فٍ ًاؿّؽ ّم ًْ ډيـ ّعتي ّيؼٍ ىْم‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: She is lazy therefore I dislike her. .‫ ُغَ ټٌثلَ ػٍ لَ ُغَ مثثَ فٍ ُغَ ًَ عْښْم‬:‫هخال‬
140
2) Correlative Conjunctions: ‫د ّصل جْړٍ يي تْسي‬

These conjunctions are used in pairs and join words and sentences.
.‫ػ ٍّل ػغَ تْؿي پَ رْړٍ يی (ػٍّ ګًْی) ىکل امتؼواليږي اّ کلوْ اّ رولْ تَ ؿتٔ ّؿکْي‬
Some correlative conjunctions ‫ځـيٌي رْړٍ يي ػ ٍّل تْؿي‬

Either ........ or ‫ يا‬........ ‫ يا‬Neither ....... nor ًَ ........ ًَ
So ........ that ‫ پَ ػي ډّل چي‬، ‫ ػػي لپاؿٍ چي‬Both ........ and ‫ ُـن‬........ ‫ُـن‬
Not only ..... but also َ‫ تلک‬..... ‫ًَ يْافي‬
Ex: He can speak neither Dari nor Urdu.

.ّ‫ ُغـَ ًَ پَ ػؿی عـثــي کـْالي ىـي ًَ پَ اؿػ‬:‫هخال‬
3) Compound Conjunctions: ‫هـشکة د ّصـل تْسي‬

A group of words which are used as conjunctions to join words and se-
ntences are called compound conjunctions.
َ‫ُغَ ګـّپ ػ کلوْ چي ػ ٍّل ػ تْؿّ پَ څيـ کلوْ اّ رولْ تَ ؿتٔ ّؿکْي ػ هـکثْ ؿتطي تْؿّ پ‬
Some compound conjunctions ‫ځيٌي هـکة ػ ٍّل تْؿي‬

In orther that ‫پَ ُغَ هٌظْؿ چي‬ So that ‫ ػػي لپاؿٍ چي‬، ‫ًْ ػاچي‬
Even if ‫ کَ چيـي ُـن‬، َ‫ّلْک‬ As soon as ‫اّك چي‬
As long as ‫ لَ ُغَ ّعتَ چي‬، ‫تـُغَ ّعتَ چي‬ As well as ‫ اُّـن‬، َ‫ ُوؼاؿًګ‬، ٍّ‫تـ ػال‬
As if ‫ کَ چيـي ُـن‬، ‫لکَ ػاچي‬ So as to ٍ‫لپاؿ‬
4) Subordinating Conjunctions: ‫فـشعـي د ّصـل تـْسي‬

Subordinating conjunctions are those which jion the subordinating senten-
ces with main sentences.
.‫فـػي ػٍّل تْؿي ُغَ ػي چي فـػی رولی لَ اٍلي رولْ مـٍ ٍّلْي‬
Some subordinating conjunctions ‫ځيٌي فـػي ػ ٍّل تْؿي‬

Who ‫څْک‬ Because ‫ ػػي لپاؿٍ چي‬، ‫ ځکَ چي‬، ‫څٌګَ چي‬
Whom )‫ څْک(هفؼْل‬، ‫ لَ چا څغَ چي‬، ‫چاتَ چي‬ As long as ‫ لَ ُغَ ّعتَ چي‬، ‫تـُغَ ّعتَ چي‬
Which ‫ُغَ چي‬ When ‫ ُغَ ّعت چي‬، ‫کلَ چي‬
What ‫چي‬ Where ‫چيـي چي‬
If ‫کَ چيـي‬ Than ًْ ، ‫ مـتيـٍ پـي‬، ‫پَ ُغَ ٍْؿت کي چي‬
As if ‫ ګْيا چي‬، ‫لکَ ػا چي‬ As soon as ‫اّك چي‬
Whether ‫ مـٍ لَ ػي چي‬، ‫تـميـٍ پـ ػي چي‬ While ‫ پَ ُغَ ٍْؿت کي چي‬، ‫ُغَ ّعت چي‬
Unless ‫ هګـ ػاچي‬، ‫پـتَ لَ ػي چي‬
141
Preposition
‫اضافي تْسي‬
Preposition is a word which is used to show the relationship between
two persons or things.
.‫اّافی تْؿی ُغَ کولَ ػٍ چي ػ ػّّ اىغاٍْ يا ىياًْ تـهٌځ ؿاتطَ ښيي‬
Ex: I am in the garden. .‫ فٍ پَ تاؽ کي يـن‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The book is near the table. .ٍ‫ کتاب هيق تَ ًږػي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
 A preposition can show the relationship of a noun or pronoun with

the following words:
:‫يْ اّافي تْؿي کْالي ىي ػ امن اّيا ّويـ مـٍ ػ الًؼي کلوْ مـٍ ؿاتطَ ّښيي‬
1) Between two nouns: :‫ػ ػّّ اموًْْ تـهٌځ‬

Ex: A cup of tea is on the table. .ٍ‫ يٍْ پيالَ چاي ػ هيق پَ مـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
2) Between two pronoun: :‫ػ ػّّ ّويـًّْ تـهٌځ‬

Ex: He is near me. .ٍ‫ ُغَ هاتَ ًږػي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
3) Between noun and preposition: :‫ػ امـن اّ اّافي تْؿي تـهٌځ‬

Ex: Ahmad with his brother will come to our party.
.‫ اصوؼ تَ لَ عپل ّؿّؿ مـٍ فهْږ هلـونـتيا تَ ؿاىي‬:‫هخال‬
4) Between a noun and a verb: :‫ػ يْ امـن اّ يْ فؼـل تـهٌځ‬
Ex: Ahmad prevented Shafiqa from going.

.‫ اصوـؼ ىـفـيـمَ لَ تلـلْ څـغـَ هـٌـغ کــْي‬:‫هخال‬
5) Between a noun and an adverb: :‫ػ يْ امن اّ يْ ليؼ تـهٌځ‬
Ex: He behaves badly with his wife.

.‫ ُـغـَ ػ عپلي ښځي مـٍ پَ تـؼ ډّل چلٌؼ کـْي‬:‫هخال‬
6) Between a noun and an adjective: :‫ػ يْ امن اّ يْ ٍفت تـهٌځ‬

Ex: She is good at Math. .ٍ‫ ػا پَ ؿياّي کي ښَ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
142
7) Between a pronoun and a verb: :‫ػ يْ ّويـ اّ يْ فؼـل تـهٌځ‬

Ex: Come to me and tell the fact. .َ‫ هاتَ ؿاىَ اّ صميمت ّّاي‬:‫هخال‬
 The prepositions are divided into two parts:

:‫اضـافـي تـْسي پـَ دّّ تـشخـْ ّيـؾـل ؽـْي دي‬
1. Simple prepositions: ‫ماػٍ اّافي تْؿي‬

2. Compound prepositions: ‫تـکيثي اّافي تْؿي‬
1. Simple prepositions: ‫عادٍ اضافي تْسي‬

The simple prepositions are those which are used in the ordinary or sta-
ndard form and show the relationship between two persons or things.
ًْ‫مـاػٍ اّافـي تْؿي ُغـَ ػي چي پَ هؼـوـْلي اّيا حاتت ىکل امتؼـوـاليږي اّ ػػّ اىغاٍـْ يا ىيا‬
.‫تـهٌځ ؿاتطَ ښيي‬
Simple prepositions ‫ماػٍ اّافي تْؿي‬
In )‫پَ ( پَ هٌځ کي‬ With ٍ‫ مـ‬، َ‫ل‬
On َ‫ پ‬، ‫پَ مـ‬ From َ‫څغ‬... َ‫ ل‬، ‫ ػ‬، َ‫ل‬
At )‫پَ (ػاعل کي‬ Up َ‫ پْؿت‬، ‫پَ مـ‬
By َ‫پَ ّامط‬ Out َ‫ عاؿد ل‬، ‫عاؿد‬
To َ‫ت‬ After َ‫ ّؿّمت‬، َ‫ّؿّمتَ لَ ُغ‬
For ٍ‫لپاؿ‬ Since ‫ لَ ُغَ ّعتَ چي‬، ‫ؿاپؼي عْا‬
Of ‫ ػ‬، َ‫ل‬ Via ‫لَ الؿی‬
Off ‫ عاهْه‬، ‫ لطغ‬، ‫رال‬ Than ‫ پَ ًنثت‬، َ‫ل‬
Till ‫ تـ‬، ‫ تـُغَ ّعتَ چي‬، ‫تـػي چي‬ Down ‫ پَ الًؼي ٓـف‬، َ‫کښت‬
Over ‫ مـتيـٍ پـ‬، ٍ‫تـميـ‬ Under ‫ لَ الًؼی‬، ‫الًؼي‬
Near ‫ًږػي‬ Among ‫تـهٌځ‬
Between ‫تـهٌځ‬ Along ‫پَ اّږػّ کي‬
With in ‫پَ ػاعل کي‬ With out َ‫تي ل‬
Below ‫الًؼي‬ Despite ٍ‫ تـميـ‬، ‫تاّرْػ‬
A) By = Near = Next to = Beside َ‫ څٌګ ت‬، ‫ًږدي‬

Ex: Sediq sat by me. .ٍ‫ ٍؼيك لَ هامـٍ ًږػي ًامت ػ‬:‫هخال‬
B) By = Via = Rout َ‫ لَ څخ‬، ‫ لَ السي‬، ‫پَ الس‬

Ex: We went to Mazar by road. .ْ‫ هْږ ػ مړک لَ الؿي هقاؿ تَ ځ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: She went to Saudi by Airplain. .ٍ‫ ُغَ ػ ُْايي راف لَ الؿي مؼْػي تَ ّالړ‬:‫هخال‬
143
C) By = Before ‫هخکي‬
Ex: I will complete this work by june. .‫ فٍ تَ لَ رْى څغَ هغکي ػغَ کاؿ عتن کړ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I will go to Kandahar by April. .‫ فٍ تَ لَ آپـيل څغَ هغکي کٌؼُاؿ تَ ّالړ ىـن‬:‫هخال‬
D) By = Trough َ‫ پَ ّاعط‬، َ‫پ‬

To show the method which somthing is done.
.‫ُغَ ٓـيمَ تياًْي چي يْ ىي پکښي مـتَ ؿميږي‬
Ex: You can help us by the police. .‫ تَ کْالي ىي ػ پْليل پَ ّامطَ لَ هْږ مـٍ هـمتَ ّکړي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: We sent the money by check. .‫ هْږ ػ چيک پَ ّامطَ پيـني ّامتْلي‬:‫هخال‬
E) Multiplied by: َ‫ضشتيذل ل‬
Ex: 5 x 3 = 15 → 5 multiplied by 3 equal 15.

.ٍ‫ مـ‬۱۵ َ‫ هناّي کيږي ل‬۳ َ‫ ّـتيږي ل‬۵ ←۱۵ = ۳ X ۵ :‫هخال‬
F) By myself / By herself / By himself = Alone ‫يـْاصي‬
Ex: She went to Ghazni by herself = She went to Ghazni alone.

.ٍ‫ ُغَ (هيـهي) يْافي غـقًي تَ ّالړ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I did this work by myself = I did this work alone.

.ٍّ‫ ها ػغَ کاؿ يْافي مـتَ ّؿما‬:‫هخال‬
G) By = During ‫ پَ تشڅ کي‬، ‫ پَ ّخت کي‬، ‫پَ جشياى کي‬

Ex: He drives carefully by night. .‫ ُغَ ػ ىپي پَ تـڅ کي پَ اصتيآ مـٍ ډؿيْؿی کْي‬:‫هخال‬
)‫(ج‬
H) By God = To swear of God. ‫قـغـن پَ خذاي‬
Ex: By God , I didn‟t do it. .‫ کَ ها ُغَ مـتَ ؿمْلي ّي‬، )‫ لنن پَ عؼای (د‬:‫هخال‬
I) By mistake. ً ‫ اؽتثاُا‬، ٍ‫پَ اؽتثاٍ عش‬

Ex: He ate fast by mistake. .ٍ‫ ُغَ پَ اىتثاٍ مـٍ ؿّژٍ ّعْړ‬:‫هخال‬
Note: “By” is used with all means of traveling like: airplain , car , train ,
bicycle , ship ..... etc.
، ‫ تاينيکل‬، ‫ اّؿګاډی‬،‫ هْټـ‬، ٍ‫ ٓياؿ‬: َ‫“ ػ مفــ لَ ټْلْ ّمايلْ مـٍ امتؼواليږي لک‬By” :‫ًْټ‬
.‫ اّ ػامي ًْؿ‬...... ‫کښتۍ‬
144
‫پَ ‪(،‬پَ داخل کي) ‪In :‬‬

‫‪ In‬ػ لْيْ ځايًْْ لپاؿٍ اّ ُوؼاؿًګَ ػ ځايًْْ ػاعلي تـعي لکَ ػ کْټي هٌځ ‪ ،‬ػ کْؿهٌځ اّػامي‬
‫ًْؿّ کي امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I am in the bazar.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ پَ تافاؿ کي ين‪.‬‬
‫پـَ‪( ،‬پَ داخـل کي) ‪At :‬‬

‫‪ At‬ػ کْچٌي ځايًْْ لپاؿٍ ‪ ،‬ػ اىغاٍْ اّ ّعت لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I come here at nine o‟clock.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ پَ ًَ تزْ ػلتَ ؿاځـن‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: The teacher is at the office.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ښًّْکي پَ ػفتـ کي ػٍ‪.‬‬
‫پَ عـش ‪On :‬‬

‫‪ُ On‬غَ ّعت امتؼواليږي چي يْ ىي ػ تل ىي مـٍ پَ تواك کي ّي اّ ػ ىغٌ اّ فهاى لپاؿٍ‬
‫ُـن امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: The book is on the table.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬کتاب ػ هيق پَ مـ ػٍ‪.‬‬
‫پْستَ ‪ ،‬لْړ ‪ ،‬پَ عـش ‪Above:‬‬

‫‪ُ Above‬غَ ّعت امتؼواليږي چي يْىي تي لَ تواك څغَ هؼوْالً پَ ػوْػي ىکل ّالغ ّي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: The sky is above our.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬امواى فهْږ پَ مـ ػٍ‪.‬‬
‫لَ ‪ ،‬د ‪Of :‬‬

‫‪ Of‬ډيـ ّعت ػ ىياًْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي اّ پَ کن ډّل ػ اىغاٍْ لپاؿٍ ُـن امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Kabul is the capital of Afghanistan.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬کاتل ػ افغاًنتاى پايتغت ػٍ‪.‬‬
‫تـَ ‪To :‬‬

‫‪ To‬يْافي ػ اىغاٍْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي اّ پَ ډيـٍ هضؼّػٍ تْګَ امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Ahmad went to Herat.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬اصوؼ ُــات تَ ّالړ‪.‬‬
‫لپاسٍ ‪For :‬‬

‫‪ For‬ػ ىياًْ ‪ ،‬اىغاٍْ اّ ّعت لپاؿٍ امتؼاليږي اّ پَ پـاعَ تْګَ تـيٌَ ګټَ اعينتل کيږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: The play football is useful for health.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ػ فْټثال لْتَ ػ ؿّغتيا لپاؿٍ ګټْؿٍ ػٍ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I study for three hours every day.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ ُـٍ ّؿځ ػ ػؿيْ ماػتْ لپاؿٍ هطالؼَ کْم‪.‬‬
‫‪145‬‬
‫پَ ‪ ،‬پَ ّاعطَ ‪By :‬‬

‫‪ By‬ػ ىياًْ اّ اىغاٍْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I go to bazar by bicycle.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬فٍ تافاؿ تَ ػ تاينيکل پَ ّامطَ ځـن‪.‬‬
‫پْستَ ‪ ،‬لْړ ‪Up :‬‬

‫‪ Up‬هؼوْالً ػ ځايًْْ اّ اىغاٍْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: It is not up to you.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ُ :‬غَ لَ تا څغَ لْړ ًؼٍ‪.‬‬
‫لشي لَ ‪ ،‬جال ‪ ،‬خاهْػ ‪Off:‬‬

‫‪ Off‬پَ فياتَ تْګَ ػ ځايًْْ لپاؿٍ اّ ُوـن ػىياًْ امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: The switch is off.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬مْيچ عاهْه ػٍ‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: The dog jump off the stream.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬مپی لَ لښتي څغَ لـي ټْپ ُّي‪.‬‬
‫پَ هاتيي کي ‪ ،‬تشهٌځ ‪Between :‬‬

‫‪ Between‬ػ ػّّ اىغاٍْ يا ػّّ ىياًْ پَ هٌځ کي امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Ghazni is located between Kabul and Zabul.‬‬

‫هخال‪ :‬غـقًي ػ کاتل اّ فاتل تـهٌځ هْلؼيت لـي‪.‬‬
‫پَ هاتيي کي ‪ ،‬تشهٌځ ‪Among :‬‬

‫‪ Among‬ػ ػّّ څغَ فياتْ ػ اىغاٍْ يا ىياًْ پَ هٌځ کي امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Afghanistan is located among six contries.‬‬

‫هخال‪ :‬افغاًنتاى ػ ىپږّ ُيْاػًّْ پَ هاتيي کي هْلؼيت لـي‪.‬‬
‫لَ ‪ ،‬د ‪From :‬‬

‫‪ From‬ػ ځاي ‪ ،‬علکْ اّ ىياًْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: I borrowed a little money from him.‬‬

‫هخال‪ :‬ها لَ ُغَ څغَ يٍْ اًؼافٍ پـيني لــُ کړي‪.‬‬
‫‪Ex: Shabeer Ahmad is from Kandahar.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬ىثيـاصوؼ ػ کٌؼُاؿ ػٍ‪.‬‬
‫‪146‬‬
2. Compound prepositions: ‫هشکة اضافي تْسي‬

The compound prepositions usually contain more than one syllable and
show the relationship between two persons or things.
ًْ‫هـکة اّافـي تْؿي هؼـوـْالً لَ يـٍْ څغَ ػ فياتْ ُزا لـًّکـي ّي اّ ػ ػّّ اىغاٍْ يا ىـيا‬
.‫تـهٌـځ ؿاتـطَ ښکاؿٍ کـْي‬
Some compound prepositions ‫ځيٌي هـکة ػ ٍّل تْؿي‬
In order to ‫ پَ ػي هٌظْؿ چي‬Because of ‫پَ ػي عآـ چي‬

In front of َ‫ هغت‬In spite of ٍ‫ تـميـ‬، ‫تاّرْػ‬
For the sake of ‫ پَ عآـ‬Due to ‫پَ ًتيزَ کي‬
Future in the past perfect tense

ًَ‫پَ تيشٍ کاهلَ کي ساتلًّْکي صها‬
Helping verbs ًَْ‫کْهکي فؼل‬
Would have / Should have Would have / Should have
Affirmative form
‫هثثت ؽکل‬ Sub + Would / Should + Have + V3 + Comp.
Ex: I would have carried out every thing. .‫ ها تَ ټْل ىياى تـمـٍ کړي ّي‬:‫هخال‬
Question form
‫عْالي ؽکل‬ Would / Should + Sub + Have + V3 + Comp?
Ex: Would I have carried out every thing? ‫ آيا ها تَ ټْل ىياى تـمـٍ کړي ّي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form
‫هٌفي ؽکل‬ Sub + Would / Should + Not + Have + V3 + Comp .
Ex: I would not have carried out every thing. .‫ ها تَ ټْل ىياى ًَ ّي تـمـٍ کړي‬:‫هخال‬
Would / Should +Sub + Not + Have + V3 + Comp -?
Negative interrogative Ex: Would I not have carried out every thing? ‫ آيا ها تَ ټْل ىياى ًَ ّي تـمـٍ کړي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Wouldn‟t / Shouldn‟t + Sub + Have + V3 + Comp -?
Ex: Wouldn‟t I have carried out every thing? ‫ آيا ها تَ ټْل ىياى ًَ ّي تـمـٍ کړي؟‬:‫هخال‬
1) Usage: Future in the past perfect tense is used to show an action

which would have been complete as some unspecified time in the
future of the past , but the action did not take place.
َ‫ پَ تيـٍ کاهلَ کـي ؿاتلـًّْکي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول ػ تياى لپاؿٍ امتؼـواليږي چـي پ‬:‫) اعـتعـوال‬۱
.‫ هګـ ػول ًؼٍ ّالغ ىْي‬، ٍّ ‫تيـ ؿاتلًّْکي کي تَ تکويل ىْي‬
Ex: The people would not have faced any problems if the incharges had more
attention.
.‫ علک تَ لَ هيکالتْ مـٍ ًَ ٍّ هغاهظ ىْي‬، ٍّ ‫ کَ چيـي هنـْليٌْ ډيـٍ تْرَ کړي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Ahmad and Ali would have completed the work whether they had started
earlier.
.ٍّ ‫ کاؿ تَ عتن ىْي‬، ٍّ ‫ کَ چيـي اصوؼ اّ ػلي ّعت تـ ىـّع کړي‬:‫هخال‬
147
Future in the past perfect continuous tense

ًَ‫پَ تـيـشٍ کاهـلَ جاسی کـي ساتلـًّْکـي صهـا‬
Helping verbs ًَْ‫کْهکي فؼل‬
Would have been / Should have been Would have been / Should have been
Affirmative form
‫هثثت ؽکل‬ Sub + Would / Should + Have + been + V - ing + Comp.
Ex: I would have been playing cricket. .‫ فٍ تَ ػ کـکيټ پَ لْتَ هَـّف ّم‬:‫هخال‬
Question form Would / Should + Sub + Have + been + V - ing + Comp?
Ex: Would I have been playing cricket? ‫ آيا فٍ تَ ػ کـکيټ پَ لْتَ هَـّف ّم؟‬:‫هخال‬
Negative form Sub + Would / Should + Not + Have + been + V - ing + Comp .
Ex: I would not have been playing cricket. ‫ فٍ تَ ػ کـکيټ پَ لْتَ هَـّف ًَ ّم؟‬:‫هخال‬
Would / Should + Sub + Not + Have + been + V - ing + Comp -?
Negative interrogative Ex: Would I not have been playing cricket? ‫ آيا فٍ تَ ػ کـکيټ پَ لْتَ هَـّف ًَ ّم؟‬:‫هخال‬
form ‫هٌفي عْالي ؽکل‬ Wouldn‟t / Shouldn‟t + Sub + Have + been + V - ing + Comp -?
Ex: Wouldn‟t I have been playing cricket? ‫ آيا فٍ تَ ػ کـکيټ پَ لْتَ هَـّف ًَ ّم؟‬:‫هخال‬
1) Usage: Future in the past perfect continuous tense is used to show

the duration of an action which would have been continuing at some
unspecified time in the future of the past ,but the action did not take
place.
‫ پَ تيـٍ کاهلَ راؿی کي ؿاتلًّْکي فهاًَ ػ ُغَ ػول ػ تياى لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي چي‬:‫) اعتعوال‬۱
.‫ هګـ ػول ػول ًؼٍ ّالغ ىْي‬، ٍّ ‫پَ تيـٍ ؿاتلًّْکي کي تَ ػ ػّام پَ صالت کي‬
Ex: She would have been working at the bank if she had not gotten married.
.ٍّ َ‫ کَ چيـي ُغي ّاػٍ ًَ ٍّ کړي پَ تاًک کي تَ پَ کاؿ هَـّف‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: They would have meeting their counterparts if they did not cancel the meeting.
.ٍّ ‫ کَ چيـي هاللات ًَ لغٍْ کيؼٍ ُغْي تَ لَ عپلْ ُوکاؿاًْ مـٍ پَ هاللات هيغْل‬:‫هخال‬
Mood
‫د فعـل ّجَ يا حالت‬
Mood is the mode or manner in which the action denoted by the verb
is presented.
.‫ّرَ ػثاؿت لَ ُغَ صالت څغَ ػٍ چي ػول يا "ػفؼل صالت" پکښي تياًيږي‬
Or: ‫اّيا‬
Mood is the manner of the verb which shows how the action occurred.
.ْ‫ّرَ ػ فؼل صالت ػٍ ښيي چي ػول څٌګَ ّالغ ى‬
148
 Every verb has five moods in the English language:

:‫پَ اًګليغي ژتَ کي ُش فعل پٌجَ ّجي يا حالتًَْ لشي‬
1) Indicative mood. َ‫اعثاؿی ّر‬

2) Infinitive mood. َ‫هَؼؿي ّر‬
3) Descriptive mood. َ‫تٍْيفي ّر‬
4) Imperative mood. َ‫اهـي ّر‬
5) Subjunctive mood. َ‫التقاهي ّر‬
1) Indicative mood: َ‫اخثاسی ّج‬

The state of the verb which expresses an action in statement or question
in positive or negative form is called indicative mood.
.‫ػ فؼـل صالت چي تياًيَ يا مْاليَ پَ هخثت يا هٌفي ٍْؿت تياى کړي ػ اعثاؿي ّری پَ ًاهَ ياػيږي‬
Ex: I saw him twice. .‫ ها ُغَ ػٍّ ځلي ّليؼ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Did you really leave it? ‫ آيا ّالؼيا ً تـک ػي کړ؟‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: I could not find any thing there. .‫ ُلتَ هي ُيڅ ىي پيؼا ًکړل‬:‫هخال‬
2) Infinitive mood : َ‫هـصـذسی ّجـ‬

Infinitive mood is the form of the verb which expresses an action freely
without any subject.
.‫هَؼؿی ّرَ ػ فؼل ُغَ ىکل ػٍ چي ػول پَ افاػ ډّل تي لَ فاػل څغَ تياًْي‬
Ex: To come on time is very necessary. .ٍ‫ پَ ّعت ؿاتلل ډيـ ّـّؿي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: To play football is interesting for him. .ٍ‫ ػ فْټثال لْتَ کْل ػ ُغَ لپاؿٍ رالثَ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
3) Descriptive mood: َ‫تْصيفي ّج‬

The state of the verb which has verbal and attributive form is called
descriptive mood.
.‫ػ فؼل "ُغَ" صالت چي ػ فؼلي اّ ٍّفي ىکل ػؿلْػًّکي ّي ػ تٍْيفي ّري پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
Ex: He is speaking. (verbal). .)‫ (فؼلي‬.‫ ُغَ عثـي کْي‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: I have speaking class. (attributive). .)‫ ( ٍّفي‬.‫ فٍ ػ هکالوي ټْلګۍ لـم‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He has completed the work.(verbal). .)‫ ( فؼلی‬.ٍ‫ ُغَ کاؿ عتن کړی ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: It is complete work.(attributive). .)‫( ٍّفي‬. ٍ‫ ػغَ کاؿ عتن ػ‬:‫هخال‬
149
4) Imperative mood: َ‫اهـشی ّجـ‬

The state of the verb which expresses an action in request , demand , ad-
vice , entreaty , prayer or direct command is called imperative mood.
‫ ػػا اّيا هنتمين اهـ پَ ډّل تياى کړي‬، ‫ ػؾؿ‬، ‫ پٌؼ‬، ‫ تماّا‬،‫ػ فؼل "ُغَ" ىکل چي ػول ػ غْښتٌی‬
.‫ػ اهـی ّري پَ ًاهَ ياػيږي‬
Ex: Get out from here. .َ‫ لَ ػغَ ځاي ّّځ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Come on time please. .َ‫ لطفا ً پَ ّعت ؿاځ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Try to be honest. .‫ کْښښ کْي ٍاػق ّ اّمي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Come here. .َ‫ ػلتَ ؿاى‬:‫هخال‬
5) Subjunctive mood: َ‫التضاهي ّج‬

The subjunctive mood is used to express ambition , intention , hesitation
or condition.
.‫ اّيا ىـٓ ػ تياى لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬، ‫ ىک‬، ‫ لَؼ‬، ّ‫التقاهي ّرَ ػ اؿف‬
Ex: Suppose he fails , what will he do? ‫ څَ تَ ّکړي؟‬، ٍ‫ فـُ کړي ُغَ ًاکام ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: May Allah )‫ (د‬bless all. .‫ هللا (د) ػي ټْل ّماتي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: If we do honestly we will not face any problem.

.ْ‫ کَ هْږ ٍاػق ّ اّمْ لَ هيکالتْ مـٍ تَ هغاهظ ًَ ى‬:‫هخال‬
Ordinary(main) verbs
ًَْ‫هعـوـْلـي(اصـلـي) فعـلـ‬
Ordinary verbs are those which express a complete meaning and can
stand alone.
.‫هؼوْلي(اٍلي) فؼلًَْ ُغَ ػي چي کاهلَ هؼٌی تياًْي اّ پَ تٌِايي مـٍ ػ هفِْم لـًّکي ّي‬
 Ordinary verbs are divided into three parts: ‫هعوْلي فعلًَْ پَ دسي تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
Ordinary verbs ًَْ‫هؼوْلي فؼل‬

Transitive verbs Intransitive verbs Linking verbs
ًَْ‫هتعذي فعل‬ ًَْ‫الصهي فعل‬ ًَْ‫استثاطي فعل‬
150
1) Transitive verbs:ًَْ‫هتعذي(غيشالصهي) فعل‬

Transitive verb is poor of object , without object it doesn‟t give clear
an complete meaning.
.‫هتؼؼي فؼلًَْ هفؼْل تَ هضتاد ّي ػغَ (فؼل)تي لَ هفؼْل څغَ ّاّش اّ پْؿٍ هؼٌي ًَ ّؿکْي‬
Like: ً‫هثال‬
See)‫( ليذل‬ Break )‫(هاتْل‬ Make )‫(جْړّل‬ Eat)‫(خْړل‬
Ex: He is eating (…………….) (in complete).

Transitive verb .)‫ (ًا تکويل‬.‫) عْؿي‬.....................( َ‫ ُغ‬:‫هخال‬
‫هتؼؼي فؼـ ل‬
Ex: He is eating an apple. (complete). .)‫ (تکويل‬.‫ ُغَ هڼَ عْؿي‬:‫هخال‬
Transitive verb ‫هتؼؼي فؼـل‬
2) Intransitive verbs:ًَْ‫الصهـي فعـل‬

Intransitive verb is not poor of object ,it gives clear and complete
meaning without object.
‫ ػغـَ (فؼـل) تي لَ هفؼـْل څغـَ ُـن ّاّش اّ کاهـلَ هؼـٌی‬، ٍ‫الفهـي فؼـل هفؼـْل تَ هضتاد ًَ ػ‬
.‫ّؿکْي‬
Like: ً‫هثال‬
Shine)‫(ځليذل‬ Cry )‫(ژړل‬ Smile)‫(هْعکا کْل‬ Laugh)‫(خٌذيذل‬
Ex: The sun is shining. .‫ لوـ ځليږي‬:‫هخال‬
Intransitive verb ‫الفهي فؼـل‬
Ex: The child is crying. .‫ هاىْم ژاړي‬:‫هخال‬
Intransitive verb ‫الفهي فؼـل‬
Note:‫ًْټ‬
151
Transitive and intransitive verbsًَْ‫هتعذي اّ الصهي فعـل‬

Transitive and intransitive verbs is sometimes poor of object and sometimes not
poor of object , it means sometimes it gives clear and complete meaning without
object and sometimes it does not give clear and complete meaning without object.
‫ ُغَ پَ ػي هؼٌی‬،‫هتؼؼي اّ الفهي فؼلًَْ ځيٌي ّعت هفؼْل تَ هضتاد ّي اّ ځيٌي ّعت هفؼْل تَ هضتاد ًَ ّي‬
َ‫چي کلَ تي لَ هفؼْل څغَ ُن ّاّش اّ ؿّښاًَ هؼٌي ّؿکْي اّځيٌي ّعت تي لَ هفؼْل څغَ ّاّش اّ کاهل‬
.‫هؼٌی ًَ ّؿکْي‬
Ex: The birds are flying.(complement). .)‫(تکويل‬.‫ هـغۍ الْفي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: It is flying (……..). (in complete). .)‫(ًا تکويل‬.‫) الْفي‬...........(َ‫ ُغ‬:‫هخال‬
3) Linking verbs ًَْ‫استثاطي فعـل‬

Linkin verbs are those which link the complement to the subject .
.‫اؿتثآي فؼلًَْ ُغَ ػي چي تکويل کًّْکي لَ فاػل مـٍ ًښلْي‬
Some of Linkin verbs ًَْ‫ځيٌي اؿتثآي فؼـل‬
Is are am was were
Become have has had
Ex: He is a teacher. .ٍ‫ ُغَ يْ ښًّْکي ػ‬:‫هخال‬

Subject ‫فاػـل‬
Linking verb ‫اؿتثآي فؼـ ل‬
 Out of control (stative ) verbs :ًَْ‫غيش اسادي(حالتي) فعـل‬

Out of control verbs are those which don‟t show action and if they
show action ,that is non progressive or out of control.
(‫ُغَ غيـراؿي‬،‫غيـاؿاػي فؼلًَْ ُغَ (فؼلًَْ) ػي چي ػول ًَ تياًْي کَ چيـي ػول تياى کړي‬
.ٍ‫غيـ اؿاػي) ػ‬
Some of (Out of control verbs) ًَْ‫ځيٌي غيش اسادي فعل‬
Know )‫ پيژًؼل‬،‫(پُْيؼل‬ Understand )‫(پُْيؼل‬
Believe )‫ ايواى ؿاّړل‬،‫(تاّؿ لـل‬ Feel )‫(اصناك کْل‬
Forger )‫(ُيـّل‬ Hear )‫غْږ ًيْل‬، ‫(اّؿيؼل‬
See )‫(ليؼل‬ Apear )‫ښکاؿٍ کيؼل‬، ‫(صاّـيؼل‬
Smell )‫(تْيْل‬ Want )‫(غْښتل‬
Seem )‫(هؼلْهيؼل‬ Wish )‫ ُيلَ لـل‬،‫(ُيلَ کْل‬
Like )‫(عْښْل‬ Love )‫(هيٌَ لـل‬
Cost )‫(تيَ لـل‬ Become )‫ګـځيؼل‬، ‫(کيؼل‬
Have )»‫(لـل«روغ‬ Has )‫(لـل‬
Had )‫(ػؿلْػل‬ Are )ْ‫ي‬، ‫(ػي‬
Was )‫ ّم‬،ٍّ( Were )»‫(ٍّ«روغ‬
152
Ex: I understand the lesson now. .‫ فٍ اّك پَ ػؿك ّپُْيؼم‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: These flowers smell good. .‫ ػغَ ګالى ښَ تْي لـي‬:‫هخال‬
Causative verbs
ًَْ‫علتي يا عثثي فعـل‬
“Causative verbs” are those verbs which we don‟t perform an action dir-
ectly , we get it done indirectly by some one else.
َ‫ ػول ػ تل ىغٌ پَ ّامط‬،ّْ‫ػلتي فؼلًَْ ُغَ فؼلًَْ ػي چي هْږػول هنتميوا ً پغپلَ مـتَ ًَ ؿم‬
.‫پَ غيـ هنتمين ډّل ٍْؿت ًيني‬
Causative verbs consist in: َ‫علتي فعـلًَْ عثاست دي ل‬

Get Have Has Make
Help Cause Let
The Causative form can be formed by the following formulas:

‫عـثثي ؽـکل پَ الًذي فـْسهـْلـًْْ تؾکيـليـذاي ؽـي‬
1) Subject + Verb + Object + Verb + Complement.

This formula is used when we want to compel the other do something
or in this formula we compel some one else do something for us.
‫ػغَ فْؿهْل ُغَ ّعت امتؼواليږي چي هْږ غْاړّ ًْؿ ػ کاؿ تـمـٍ کْلْ تَ چوتْ کړّ يا ػا‬
.‫چي پَ ػي فْؿهْل کي تل ىغٌ ػي تَ چوتْ کّْ چي هْږ تَ کْم کاؿ تـمـٍ کړي‬
 The verbs which can be used in this formula consist in:
: َ‫ُغَ فـعـلًَْ چي پَ دي فـْسهْل کي اعتعوالـيږي عـثاست دي ل‬
Make )‫(هزثْؿّل‬ Compel )‫(هزثْؿّل‬ Have )‫(تاػج کيؼل‬

Constrain )‫(هزثْؿّل‬ etc…. ....‫اًّْؿ‬
Ex: I made him fix the picture on the wall. .‫ ها ُغَ هزثْؿ کړ "چي" پَ ػيْال تَْيـ ّلګْي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: We compel him fix our car. .‫ هْږ ُغَ هزثْؿٍ کړ چي فهْږ هْټـ تـهيــن کړي‬:‫هخال‬
2) Sub + Get + obj + to + V + comp.

This formula we try to convince or persuade the others do something
that is to say in this formula someone is encouraged do something.
‫پَ ػغَ فْؿهْل کي هْږُڅَ کّْ چي ػ کاؿ تـمـٍ کْلْ لپاؿٍ ًْؿڅْک چوتْ کړّ پَ ػي هؼٌی‬
:ّْ‫چي يْ څْک ػ کاؿ تـمـٍ کْلْ لپاؿٍ تيْيم‬
153
 The verbs wich can be used in this formula consist in:

:َ‫ُغَ فعلًَْ چي پَ دي فْسهْل کي اعتعواليږي عثاست دي ل‬
Persuade )‫(تيْيمْل‬ Get)‫(مثة کيؼل‬ Encourage)‫(تيْيمْل‬
Convince )‫(ؿّا کْل‬ etc… ....‫اّػامي ًْؿ‬
Ex: Karrim persuaded me to learn Arabic. .‫ کـين فٍ ػ ػـتي فػٍ کړي تَ تيْيك کړم‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Shfiq will get his brother to study his lesson.
.‫ ىفـيـك تَ ػػي مثة ىي چي ّؿّؿ يي ػؿك ّّايي‬:‫هخال‬
3) The other formula which is usually used in the causative form is:
(Sub + Have / Get + Obj + V3).
(Sub + Have/Get + Obj +V) :َ‫تل فْؿهْل چي هؼوْالً پَ مثثي ىکل کي امتؼواليږي ػثاؿت ػٍ ل‬
.َ‫څغ‬
In this formula the subject of the sentence either accepts the result of
the action or causes the action.
.‫پَ ػي فْؿهْل کي ػ رولي فاػل اّ يا ػا چي ػػول ًتيزَ لثْلْي اّيا ُن عپلَ ػ کاؿمثة کيږي‬
Ex: Abdullah got his car stolen. .ْ‫ ػ ػثؼهللا هْټـ غال ى‬:‫هخال‬
Sub c. verb Obj V3
Ex: Asmatullah gets his room cleaned by him every day.

.‫ ػَوت هللا ُـٍ ّؿځ ػ ُغْ پَ ّامطَ عپل آاق پاکْي‬:‫هخال‬
Active and Passive voice

"‫هعلْم اّ هجِْل د فعـل "ؽکل‬
1) Active Voice: "‫د فعـل هعـلْم "ؽکل‬
Active voice is a form of the verb which shows the doer of an action
is the subject of the sentence.
ٍ‫ػ فؼل هؼلْم ىکل ػ فؼل ُغَ ىکل ػٍ ښيي چي ػ ػول کًّْکي(مـتَ ؿمًْکي) ػرولي هثتؼاء ػ‬
Or: Active voice is a form of the verb in which the doer of an action
(subject) is the subject of the sentence.
.‫ ػ فؼل هؼلْم ىکل ػ فؼل ُغَ ىکل ػٍ چي ػػول کًّْکي(فاػـل) پکي ػ رولي هثتؼاء ّي‬:‫يا‬
Ex: He fixed the car. .‫ ُغَ هْټـ تـهين کړ‬:‫هخال‬
154
2) Passive Voice: ‫د فعـل هجِـْل ؽکل‬

Passive voice is a form of the verb which shows the recever of an
action (object) is the subject of the sentence.
.ٍ‫ػ فؼـل هزِْل ىکل ػ فؼـل ُغَ ىکل ػٍ ښيي چي ػ ػول اعينتًْکي(هفؼْل) ػ رولي هثتؼاء ػ‬
Ex: The car was fixed. .ْ‫ هْټـ تـهين ى‬:‫هخال‬
Basic rules of changing active into passive

‫د هعـلْم تثذيلْل پَ هجِْل تاًذي اعاعي قاعذي‬
 The following points must be observed in the passive sentences.
:‫الًذي ًقطي تايذ پَ هجِـْلْ جولـْ کي هشاعات ؽي‬
1. Study the active sentence and determine its tense.

.‫هؼـلْهَ رولَ هطالؼَ کړي اّ ػ ُغي فهاًَ تؼـيي کړي‬
2. Subject is changed into object. .‫فاػـل پَ هفؼـْل تاًؼي تثؼيليږي‬
3. Object is changed onto subject. .‫هفؼـْل پَ فاػل تاًؼي تثؼيليږي‬
4. The first and second form of the verb is changed into third form of
the verb.
.‫ػ فؼل لْهړي اّ ػُّن ىکل پَ ػؿين ىکل تاًؼي تؼليږي‬
5. Use (to be) verb according to the tense of the active sentence.
.‫( فؼـلًَْ امتؼوال کړي‬to be) ‫ػ هؼلْهي رولي ػ فهاًي پَ هطاتك ػ‬
6. Use the third form of the verb after (to be).
.‫( څغَ ّؿّمتَ ػ فؼل ػؿين ىکل امتؼوال کړي‬to be) َ‫ل‬
7. The subject pronouns are changed to object pronouns and the object
pronouns changed to subject pronouns.
.‫فاػـلي ّويـًَّ پَ هفؼـْلي تثؼيليږي اّ هفؼـْل ّويـًَّ پَ فاػـلي ّويـًّْ تثؼليږي‬
8. In the continuous tenses , an extra (being) is added after the (to be)
verb.
.‫ ػالٍّ کيږي‬، (being) ‫( څغَ ّؿّمتَ يْ اّافي‬to be) َ‫پَ راؿي فهاًّْ کي ل‬
9. It is possible to mention the doer of the action at the end of the
sentence after preposition (by).
َ‫( لَ اّافي تْؿي ّؿّمت‬by) ‫هوکٌَ ػٍ چي ػػول مـتَ ؿمًْکي(فاػـل) ػ رولي پَ اعيـ کي ػ‬
.‫ؽکـ ىي‬
10.After the third form of the verb , we use (by).
.ّْ‫( امتؼوال‬by)َ‫هْږ ػ فؼـل لَ ػؿين ىکل څغَ ّؿّمت‬
155
Ueses of passive
"ًَْ‫د هجِـْل د اعتعوال "ځاي‬
The passive form is mostly used in the following ways:
:‫هزِـْل ىکل ػوؼتا ً پَ الًؼي ځايًْْ امتؼواليږي‬
1) When the doer of the action is not known or clear.
.‫ُغَ ّعت چي ػ ػول "مـتَ ؿمًْکي" (فاػـل) هؼـلْم ّي‬
Ex: The money was stolen. .‫ پيني غال ىْي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: He was murdered. .ْ‫ ُغَ ّّژل ى‬:‫هخال‬
2) When it is not important to mention the doar of an action , as it is
clear who he or she is.
‫ لکَ چي ّاّش ّي چي څْک ػ‬، ‫ُغَ ّعت چي ػ ػول ػ مـتَ ؿمًْکي(فاػـل) ؽکـ هِن ًَ ّي‬
.ٍ‫" ػول مـتَ ؿمًّْکي" ػ‬
Ex: The president was elected. .ْ‫ ؿيل روِـْؿ اًتغاب ى‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: The streets are swept. .‫ کْڅي پيچـلي ػي‬:‫هخال‬
The Simple present tense

ًَ‫عادٍ حال صها‬
Difference between Active & Passive ‫ػ هؼـلْم اّ هزِـْل تـهٌځ فـق‬
Active ‫هعلْم‬ Passive ‫هجِـْل‬
Verb = V1 Verb = V3
Helping verbs = Do , Does Helping verbs = Is , am , are

She helps me. .‫ػا لَ هامـٍ کْهک کْي‬ I am helped by her. .‫فٍ ػ ُغي پَ ّامطَ کْهک کيږم‬
Sub v1 obj. Sub h.v v3 prep obj.
They invite us. .‫ ُغْي هْږ ػػْت کْي‬We are invited by them. .ّ‫هْږ ػ ُغْي پَ ّامطَ ػػْت کيږ‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
Active ‫هعـلْم‬ Passive ‫هجِـْل‬
He asks her. She is asked by him.
.‫ُـغـَ لَ ُـغـي څغـَ پْښـتي‬ .‫ُغـَ (هًْج) ػ ُغـَ پَ ّامـطَ پْښتـل کـيږي‬
Does he ask her? Is she asked by him?
‫آيا ُغَ ُغَ (هًْج) پْښتي؟‬ ‫آيا ُغَ (هًْج) ػ ُغَ پَ ّامطَ پْښتل کيږي؟‬
He doesn‟t ask her. She is not asked by him.
.‫ُغَ ُغَ (هًْج) ًَ پْښتي‬ .‫ُغَ (هًْج) ػ ُغَ پَ ّامطَ ًَ پْښتل کيږي‬
Does he not ask her ? Is she not asked by him?
‫آيا ُغَ ُغَ(هًْج) ًَ پْښتي؟‬ ‫آيا ُغَ (هًْج) ػ ُغَ پَ ّامطَ ًَ پْښتل کيږي؟‬
Doesn‟t he ask her? Isn‟t she asked by him?
‫آيا ُغَ ُغَ (هًْج) ًَ پْښتي؟‬ ‫آيا ُغَ (هًْج) ػ ُغَ پَ ّامطَ ًَ پْښتل کيږي؟‬

The persent continuous tense

ًَ‫حـال جـاسی صهـا‬
Verb = V + ing Verb = V3
Helping verbs = Is , am , are Helping verbs = Is being , am being , are being

She is cooking the food. The food is being cooked by her.
Sub h.v v1 + ing obj. Sub h.v v3 prep obj.
.‫ُغَ (هًْج) ډّډۍ پغْي‬ .‫ډّډۍ ػ ُغي پَ ّامطَ پغيږي‬
They are washing dishes. Dishes are being washed by them.
Sub h.v v1 + ing obj. Sub h.v v3 prep obj.
.‫ُـغـْي لْښي پـيوٌځي‬ .‫لْښي ػ ُـغـْي پَ ّامطَ پـيوٌځل کيږي‬
Ex: :‫هثال‬
They are electing him. He is being elected by them.
.‫ػّي ُغـَ اًـتغاتـْي‬ .‫ُغَ ػ ػّي پَ ّامطَ اًتغاتـيږي‬
Are they electing him? Is he being elected by them?
‫آيا ػّي ُغـَ اًتغـاتْي؟‬ ‫آيا ُغَ ػ ػّي پَ ّامطَ اًتغاتـيږي؟‬
They are not electing him. He is not being elected by them.
.‫ػّي ُغـَ ًَ اًتغاتْي‬ .‫ُغَ ػ ػّي پَ ّامطَ ًَ اًتغاتيږي‬
Are they not electing him? Is he not being elected by them?
‫آيا ػّي ُغَ ًَ اًتغاتْي؟‬ ‫آيا ُغَ ػ ػّي پَ ّامطَ ًَ اًـتغاتـيږي؟‬
Aren‟t they electing him? Isn‟t he being elected by them?
‫آيآ ػّي ُغَ ًَ اًتغاتْي؟‬ ‫آيا ُغَ ػ ػّي پَ ّامطَ ًَ اًتغاتـيږي؟‬
The present perfect tense

ًَ‫حال کاهلَ صها‬
)‫(ًږػي هاّي‬

Verb = V3 Verb = V3
Helping verb = Have , Has Helping verb = Have been , Has been

He has written a book. A book has been written by
him.
Sub h.v v3 obj. Sub h.v v3 obj.
prep
.ٍ‫ُغَ يْ کتاب ليکلي ػ‬ .ٍ‫يْکتاب ػ ُغَ پَ ّامطَ ليکل ىْي ػ‬
They have invited us. We have been invited by them.
Sub h.v v3 obj. Sub h.v v3 prep obj.
.ْ‫ُغْي هْږ ػػْت کړي ي‬ .ْ‫هْږ ػ ُغْي پَ ّامطَ ػ ػْت ىْي ي‬

Ex: :‫هخال‬

He has recited the holy Quran. The holy Quran has been recited by him.
.ٍ‫ُغَ لـآى پاک لــائت کړي ػ‬ .ٍ‫لـآى پاک ػ ُغَ پَ ّامطَ لــائت ىْي ػ‬
Has he recited the holy Quran? Has the holy Quran been recited by him?
‫آيا ُغَ لـآى پاک لـائت کړي ػٍ؟‬ ‫آيا لـآى پاک ػ ُغَ پَ ّامطَ لـائت ىْي ػٍ؟‬
He has not recited the holy Quran . The holy Quran has not been recited by him.
.‫ُغَ لـآى پاک ًؼٍ لـائت کړي‬ .‫لـآى پاک ػ ُغَ پَ ّامطَ ًؼٍ لـائت ىْي‬
Has he not recited the holy Quran? Has the holy Quran not been recited by him?
‫آيا ُغَ لـآى پاک ًؼٍ لـائت کړي؟‬ ‫آيا لـآى پاک ػ ُغَ پَ ّامطَ ًؼٍ لـائت ىْي؟‬
Hasn‟t he recited the holy Quran? Hasn‟t the holy Quran been recited by him?
‫آيا ُغَ لـآى پاک ًؼٍ لـائت کړي؟‬ ‫آيا لـآى پاک ػ ُغَ پَ ّامطَ ًؼٍ لـائت ىْي؟‬
The present perfect continuous tense

ًَ‫حال کاهلَ جاسی صها‬
The present perfect continuous tense doesn‟t change from active into
passive.
.‫صال کاهلَ راؿي فهاًَ لَ هؼـلْم څغَ هزِـْل تَ ًَ تثؼيليږي‬
The simple past tense

ًَ‫عـادٍ تـيشٍ صها‬
V = V2 V = V3
H.V = did H.V = was , were

She wrote a story. A story was written by her.
.َ‫ُغي يٍْ کينَ ّليکل‬ .ٍْ‫يٍْ کينَ ػ ُغي پَ ّامطَ ّليکل ى‬
I defeated them. They were defeated by me.
.ٍ‫ها ُغـْي تَ هاتي ّؿکړ‬ .ٍ‫ُغْي فها پَ ّامطَ هاتي ّعْړ‬

Ex: :‫هخال‬
We defeated them. They were defeated by us.
.ٍ‫هْږ ُغـْي تَ هاتي ّؿکړ‬ .ٍ‫ُغْي فهْږ پَ ّامطَ هاتي ّعْړ‬
Did we defeat them ? Were they defeated by us?
‫آيا هْږ ُغْي تَ هاتي ّؿکړٍ؟‬ ‫آيا ُغْي فهْږ پَ ّامطَ هاتي ّعْړٍ؟‬
We didn‟t defeat them . They were not defeated by us.
.ٍ‫هْږ ُغـْي تَ هاتي ّؿًکړ‬ .ٍ‫ُغْي فهْږ پَ ّامطَ هاتي ًَّ عْړ‬
Did we not defeat them? Were they not defeated by us?
‫آيا هْږ ُغـْي تَ هاتي ّؿًکړٍ؟‬ ‫آيا ُغـْي فهْږ پَ ّامطَ هاتي ًَّ عْړٍ ؟‬
Didn‟t we defeat them? Weren‟t they defeated by us ?
‫آيا هْږ ُغْي تَ هات ّؿًکړٍ؟‬ ‫آيا ُغـْي فهْږ پَ ّامطَ هاتي ًَّ عْړٍ؟‬
The past continuous tense

َ‫تـيـشٍ جـاسی صهـاًـ‬
V = V1 + ing V = V3
H.V = was , were H.V = was being , were being

They were playing football. Football was being played by them.
Sub h.v v1+ ing obj. Sub h.v v3 prep obj.
.َ‫ُغـْي ػ فْټثال لْتَ کْل‬ .َ‫ػ فْټثال لْتَ ػ ُغـْي پَ ّامطَ کيؼل‬
He was advising me. I was being advised by him.
.ٍّ‫ُغَ هاتَ ًَيضت کا‬ .‫فٍ ػ ُغَ پَ ّامطَ ًَيضت کيؼم‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
I was doing the homework. The homework was being done by me.
.ٍّ‫ها کْؿًي کاؿ مـتَ ؿما‬ .ٍ‫کْؿًي کاؿ فها پَ ّامطَ مـتَ ؿميؼ‬
Was I doing the homework ? Was the homework being done by me?
‫آيا ها کْؿًی کاؿ مـتَ ؿماٍّ؟‬ ‫آيا کْؿًی کاؿ فها پَ ّامطَ مـتَ ؿميؼٍ؟‬
I was not doing the homework . The homework was not being done by me.
.ٍّ‫ها کْؿًی کاؿ مـتَ ًَ ؿما‬ .ٍ‫کْؿًی کاؿ فها پَ ّامطَ مـتَ ًَ ؿميؼ‬
Was I not doing the homework? Was the homework not being done by me?
‫آيا ها کْؿًی کاؿ مـتَ ًَ ؿماٍّ؟‬ ‫آيا کْؿًي کاؿ فها پَ ّامطَ مـتَ ًَ ؿميؼٍ ؟‬
Wasn‟t I doing the homework? Wasn‟t the homework being done by me ?
‫آيا ها کْؿًی کاؿ مـتَ ًَ ؿماٍّ؟‬ ‫آيا کْؿًي کاؿ فهاى پَ ّامطَ مـتَ ًَ ؿميؼٍ؟‬

The past perfect tense

)ًَ‫تيشٍ کاهلَ صهاًَ(لـی هاّي فها‬

V = V3 V = V3
H.V = Had H.V = Had been

We had helped him. He had been helped by us.
.ٍّ ‫هْږ لَ ُغَ مـٍ هـمتَ کړي‬ .ٍّ ‫ُغَ فهْږ پَ ّامطَ کْهک ىْي‬
He had invited us. We had been invited by him.
.ٍّ ‫ُغـْي هْږ ػػـْت کړي‬ .ٍّ ‫هْږ ػ ُغَ پَ ّامطَ ػػْت ىْي‬
Ex: :ًَْ‫هخال‬

They had elected him. Ha had been elected by them.
.ٍّ ‫ػّي ُغَ اًتغاب کړي‬ .ٍّ ‫ُغَ ػ ػّي پَ ّامطَ اًتغاب ىْي‬
Had they elected him ? Had he been elected by them?
‫آيا ػّي ُغَ اًتغاب کړي ٍّ؟‬ ‫آيا ُغَ ػ ػّي پَ ّامطَ اًتغاب ىْي ٍّ؟‬
They hadn‟t elected him . He hadn‟t been elected by them.
.ٍّ ًَ ‫ػّي ُغَ اًتغاب کړي‬ .ٍّ ًَ ‫ُغَ ػ ػّي پَ ّامطَ اًتغاب ىْي‬
Had they not elected him? Had he not been elected by them ?
‫آيا ػّي ُغَ اًتغاب کړي ًَ ٍّ؟‬ ‫آيا ُغَ ػ ػّي پَ ّامطَ اًتغاب ىْي ًَ ٍّ؟‬
Hadn‟t they elected him? Hadn‟t he been elected by him ?
‫آيا ػّي ُغَ اًتغاب کړي ًَ ٍّ؟‬ ‫آيا ُغَ ػ ػّي پَ ّامطَ اًتغاب ىْي ًَ ٍّ؟‬
The past perfect continuous tense

ًَ‫تيشٍ کاهلَ جاسي صها‬
)ًَ‫(ليـي راؿی فها‬
The past perfect continuous tense doesn‟t change from active into passive.
.‫تيـٍ راؿي فهاًَ لَ هؼـلْم څغَ هزِـْل تَ ًَ تثؼيليږي‬

The simple future tense

ًَ‫ساتلًّْکي عادٍ صها‬
V = V3 V = V3
H.V = will , shall H.V = will be , shall be

He will write a letter. A letter will be written by him.
. ‫ُغَ تَ يٍْ ؿمالَ ّليکي‬ .‫يٍْ ؿمالَ تَ ػ ُغَ پَ ّامطَ ّليکل ىي‬
They shall call me. I shall be called by them.
.‫ُغْي تَ هاتَ فًګ ُّّـي‬ .‫هاتَ تَ ػ ُغـْي پَ ّامطَ فًګ ُّّل ىي‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
I will encourage them. They will be encouraged by me.
.‫فٍ تَ ُغْي تيْيك کړم‬ .‫ُغْي تَ فها پَ ّامطَ تيْيك ىـي‬
Will I encourage them ? Will they be encouraged by me?
‫آيا فٍ تَ ُغْي تيْيك کړم؟‬ ‫آيا ُغـْي تَ فها پَ ّامطَ تيْيك ىـي؟‬
I will not encourage them. They will not be encouraged by me.
.‫فٍ تَ ُغـْي تيْيك ًکړم‬ .‫ُغْي تَ فها پَ ّامطَ تيْيك ًـيـي‬
Will I not encourage them? Will they not be encouraged by me ?
‫آيا فٍ تَ ُغـْي تيْيك ًکړم؟‬ ‫آيا ُغـْي تَ فها پَ ّامطَ تيْيك ًـيي؟‬
Won‟t I encourage them? Won‟t they be encouraged by me ?
‫آيا فٍ تَ ُغـْي تيْيك ًکړم؟‬ ‫آيا ُغـْي تَ فها پَ ّامطَ تيْيك ًيـي؟‬
The future continuous tense

َ‫ساتـلـًّْـکــی جــاسی صهـاًـ‬
The future continuous tense is not changed into passive voice but some
Pakistani and Indian grammarians it into passive voice.
‫ؿاتلًّْکي راؿی فهاًَ ػ "فؼـل" پَ هزِـْل ىکل تاًؼي تثؼيلـيږي هګــ ځيٌي پاکنتاًي اّ ٌُؼي ژب‬
.‫پُْاى يي ػ "فؼل" پَ هزِـْل ىکل تثؼيلْي‬
V = V1 + ing V = V3
H.V = will be , shall be H.V = will be being , shall be being


They will be playing football. Football will be being played by them.
.‫ُغـْي تَ ػ فْټثال لْتَ کْي‬ .َ‫ػ فْټثال لْتَ تَ ػ ُغـْي پَ ّامطَ کيؼل‬
She will be typing a letter. A letter will be being typed by her.
. ‫ُغَ تَ يٍْ ؿمالَ ټايـپْي‬ .َ‫يٍْ ؿمالَ ػ ُغي پَ ّامطَ ټايـپـيـؼل‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
I will be watching T.V . T.V will be being watched by me.
.‫فٍ تَ تلْيقّى ګْؿم‬ .‫تلْيقّى تَ فها پَ ّامطَ کتل کيږي‬
Will I be watching T.V ? Will T.V be being wached by me?
‫آيا فٍ تَ تلْيقّى ګْؿم؟‬ ‫آيا تلْيقّى تَ فها پَ ّامطَ کتل کيږي؟‬
I will not be watching T.V . T.V will not be being watched by me.
.‫فٍ تَ تلْيقّى ًَ ګْؿم‬ .‫تلْيقّى تَ فها پَ ّامطَ ًَ کتل کيږي‬
Will I not be watching T.V ? Will T.V not be being watched by me ?
‫آيا فٍ تَ تلْيقّى ًَ ګْؿم؟‬ ‫آيا تلْيقّى تَ فها پَ ّامطَ ًَ کتل کيږي؟‬
Won‟t I be watching T.V ? Won‟t T.V be being watched by me ?
‫آيا فٍ تَ تلْيقّى ًَ ګْؿم؟‬ ‫آيا تلْيقّى تَ فها پَ ّامطَ ًَ کتل کيږي؟‬
The future perfect tense

ًَ‫ساتلـًّْکـی کاهـلَ صها‬
V = V3 V = V3
H.V = will have H.V = will have been

They will have typed the letter. The letters will have been typed by them.
.‫ُغـْي تَ ؿمالَ ټايپ کړي ّي‬ .‫ؿمالَ تَ ػ ُغـْي پَ ّامطَ ټايپ ىْي ّي‬
She will have cooked the food. The food will have been cooked by her.
.‫ُغی تَ ډّډۍ پغَ کړي ّي‬ .‫ډّډۍ تَ ػ ُغی پَ ّامطَ پغَ ىْي ّي‬

Ex: :‫هخال‬
We will have defeated him. He will have been defeated by us.
.‫هْږ تَ ُغَ تَ هاتي ّؿکړي ّي‬ .‫ُغَ تَ فهْږ پَ ّامطَ هاتي عْړلي ّي‬
Will we have defeated him ? Will he have been defeated by us?
‫آيا هْږ تَ ُغَ تَ هاتي ّؿکړي ّي؟‬ ‫آيا ُغَ تَ فهْږ پَ ّامطَ هاتي عْړلي ّي؟‬
We will not have defeated him. He will not have been defeated by us.
.‫هْږ تَ ُغَ تَ هاتي ّؿکړی ًَ ّی‬ .‫ُغَ تَ فهْږ پَ ّامطَ هاتي عْړلي ًَ ّي‬
Will we not have defeated him? Will he not have been defeated by us ?
‫آيا هْږ تَ ُغَ تَ هاتي ّؿکړي ًَ ّي؟‬ ‫آيا ُغَ تَ فهْږ پَ ّامطَ هاتي عْړلی ًَ ّي؟‬
Won‟t we have defeated him? Won‟t he have been defeated by us ?
‫آيا هْږ تَ ُغَ تَ هاتي ّؿکړي ًَ ّي؟‬ ‫آيا ُغَ تَ فهْږ پَ ّامطَ هاتي عْړلي ًَ ّی؟‬
The future perfect continuous tense

ًَ‫ساتلًّْکی کاهلَ جاسی صها‬
The future perfect continuous tense doesn‟t change from active into
passive.
.‫ؿاتلـًّْکــي کاهـلَ راؿی فهاًَ لَ هـؼـلـْم څغَ هـزـِـْل تَ ًَ تـثؼيلـيږي‬
Direct and indirect speech

(Quoted and reported) speech
‫هغـتـقـيـن اّ غـيـش هغتـقـيـن کالم‬
Speech means talk or dialogue between two persons.
.‫ػ کالم هؼٌی ػ ػّّ اىغاٍْ تـهٌځ عثـي يا عثـي اتـي کْل ػي‬
We can express our or somebody else‟s ideas into two ways in English
language .
.ّ‫پَ اًګليني ژتَ کي هْږ کْالي ىْي عپل اّيا ػ ًْؿّ عثـي پَ ػّّ ىکلْ تياى کړ‬
1. Directly. ‫پَ هنتمـين ډّل‬
2. Indirectly. ‫پَ غيـ هنتمين ډّل‬
1) Direct speech. ‫هغـتقـين کالم‬

The direct speech indicates the speaker‟s exact words.
.‫هنتمين کالم ػ ّيًْکي ػليـمي ّيٌاّي تياًْي‬
Ex: He said, “ I play chess with my freind.”
" .‫ " فٍ لَ عپل هلګـي مـٍ مطـًذ تافي کْم‬،‫ ُغَ ّّيل‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Najeeb said, “ I am very happy.”
" .‫ " فٍ ډيــ عـْىضـالَ يـن‬،‫ ًزيـة ّّيـل‬:‫هخـال‬

2) Indirect speech: ‫غـيـش هغـتـقـيـن کـالم‬

The indirect speech denotes the speaker‟s ideas but not all of his exact
words.
.‫غيـ هنتمين کالم ػ ّيًْکي پَ ّيٌاّّ ػاللت کْي هګـ ًَ ټْلي ػليمي کليوي‬
Ex: He said that he played chess with his freind.

.َ‫ ُغَ ّّيل چي ُغَ لَ عپل هلګـي مـٍ مطـًذ تافي کْل‬:‫هخال‬
 The following points should be observed in the direct speech:

:‫پَ هغتقين کالم کي تايذ الًذي ًقطي هشاعات ؽي‬
1) A comma ( , ) is used after the main verb.

.‫) امتؼواليږي‬،( َ‫لَ اٍلي فؼـل څغَ ّؿّمتَ يٍْ کاه‬
2) The narration should be expressed between the quotation marks (“ “).

.‫ّيٌَ تايؼ ػ ًمـل لْل لَ ػالهْ تـهٌځ ( " ") تياى ىي‬
3) The first word in the narration should begin with capital letter.
.‫پَ ّيٌَ کي تايؼ لْهړي تْؿي پَ غټ تْؿي ىـّع ىي‬
Ex: Ahmad said, “My classmates will take a trip to Mazar next week.”
" .‫ " ؿاتلًّْکي اًّّۍ تَ لَ ُوٌَفياًْ مـٍ هقاؿ تَ مفـ ّکړم‬،‫ اصوؼ ّّيل‬:‫هخال‬
Changing direct to indirect speech

‫د هغتقين کالم تثذيلـْل پَ غيش هغتقين کالم‬
The way to change the direct speech to indirect is different in the differ-
ent kinds of sentences.
.‫ػ هنتمـين کالم تثؼيلْل پَ غيـهنتمـين کالم تاًؼي پَ هغتلفـْ رولْ کي هغتلف ډّلًَْ لـي‬

1) Declarative sentences: ‫خثشي جوـلي‬

The following points must be observed in the declative sentences:
:‫الًذي ًقطي تايذ پَ خثشي جولـْ کي هشاعات ؽي‬
1. The comma and quotation marks ( “ ” ) are omitted.
.‫کاهـَ اّ ػ ًـمـل لـْل ػـالهـي ( " " ) لَ هٌځـَ ّړل کـيـږي‬
2. The conjunction (that) is used to connect the main verb with the rest of the sentence.
.‫( ؿتطي تْؿي ػ اٍلي فؼـل لَ پاتي رولي مـٍ ػ ًښلْلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‬that) ‫ػ‬
3. The pronouns are changed according to speaker and reporter.
.‫ّويـًَّ ػ ّيًْکي اّ ًمـل کًّْکي مـٍ مـن تغـيـ عْؿي‬
4. If the main verb is in simple past tense , the tenses are changed.
.‫ فهاًي تغـيـ کـْي‬، ‫کَ چيـي پَ تيـٍ ماػٍ فهاًَ کي اٍلي فؼـل ّي‬
Chart of tenses change

‫د صهـاًـْ د تـغــيـش جـذّل‬
No Direct ‫هغـتقـين‬ Indirect ‫غيش هـغتـقيـن‬
1 Simle present tense ًَ‫صال ماػٍ فها‬ Simple past tense ًَ‫تيـٍ ماػٍ فها‬
2 Present continuous tense ًَ‫صال راؿي فها‬ Past continuous tense ًَ‫تيـٍ راؿی فها‬
3 Present perfect tense ًَ‫صال کاهلَ فها‬ Past perfect tense ًَ‫تيـٍ کاهلَ فها‬
4 Present perfect continuous tense Past perfect continuous tense
ًَ‫صـال کاهلَ رـاؿی فها‬ ًَ‫تـيـٍ کاهلَ راؿی فها‬
5 Simple past tense ًَ‫تيـٍ ماػٍ فها‬ Past perfect tense ًَ‫تيـٍ کاهلَ فها‬
6 Past contiouous tense Past perfect continuous tense
ًَ‫تـيــٍ رـاؿی فهـا‬ ًَ‫تـيـٍ کاهـلَ رـاؿی فها‬
7 Past perfect tense ًَ‫تيـٍ کاهلَ فها‬ Past perfect tense ًَ‫تيـٍ کاهلَ فها‬
8 Past perfect continuous tense Past perfect continuous tense
ًَ‫تيـٍ کاهلَ راؿی فها‬ ًَ‫تيـٍ کاهلَ راؿی فها‬
9 Simple future tense Simple future in the past tense
َ‫ؿاتـلًّْـکـي مـاػٍ فهـاًـ‬ ًَ‫پَ تيـٍ کي ؿاتلًّْکي ماػٍ فها‬
10 Future continuous tense Future in the past continuous tense
ًَ‫ؿاتلًّْکي راؿی فها‬ ًَ‫پَ تيـٍ راؿي کي ؿاتلًّْکي فها‬
11 Future perfect tense Future in the past perfect tense
ًَ‫ؿاتلـًّْکـی کاهلَ فها‬ ًَ‫پَ تيـٍ کاهلَ کي ؿاتلًّْکي فها‬
12 Future perfect continuous tense Future in the past perfect continuous tense
ًَ‫ؿاتلًّْکي کاهلَ راؿی فها‬ ًَ‫پَ تيـٍ کاهلَ راؿی کی ؿاتلًّْکي فها‬
13 Simple future in the past tense Simple future in the past tense
ًَ‫پَ تيـٍ کي ؿاتلًّْکي ماػٍ فها‬ ًَ‫پَ تيـٍ کي ؿاتلًّْکي ماػٍ فها‬
14 Future in the past continuous tense Future in the past continuous tense
ًَ‫پَ تيـٍ راؿی کی ؿاتلًّْکي فها‬ ًَ‫پَ تيـٍ راؿی کی ؿاتلًّْکي فها‬
15 Future in the past perfect tense Future in the past perfect tense
ًَ‫پَ تيـٍ کاهلَ کي ؿاتلًّْکي فها‬ ًَ‫پَ تيـٍ کاهلَ کي ؿاتلًّْکي فها‬
16 Future in the past perfect continuous Future in the past perfect continuous tense.
tense. ًَ‫پَ تيـٍ کاهلَ راؿی کي ؿاتلًّْکی فها‬ ًَ‫پَ تيـٍ کاهلَ راؿی کي ؿاتلًّْکي فها‬

5. All the words and adverbs which show the near situation are change
to far.
.‫ټْلي کلوي اّ ليؼًَّ چي ًږػي ّّش(صالت) ښيي پَ لـي تاًؼي تثؼيليږي‬
Chart of adverbs change

‫د قـيذًّـْ د تـغـيش جـذّل‬
No Direct ‫هـغـتـقـين‬ Indirect ‫غـيش هغـتـقـين‬
1 Now Then
2 Here There
3 These Those
4 This That
5 Ago Before
6 Just Then
7 Yesterday The previous day
8 Next week The following week
9 Last week The previous week
10 Tomorrow The next day
11 To day That day
12 Thus So
6. The verbs ( Must , Should , Ought to , Could) are not changed in the
indirect form.
.‫ ( فؼـلًَْ پَ غيـهنتمين ىکل تاًؼي ًَ تثؼليږي‬Could , Ought to , Should , Must) ‫ػ‬
1) Ex: :‫) هخال‬۱
- He said, “I come here every day”. ."‫ "فٍ ُـٍ ّؿځ ػلتَ ؿاځن‬،‫ ُغَ ّّيل‬-
- He said that he came there every day. .َ‫ ُغَ ّّيل چي ُغَ ُـٍ ّؿځ ُلتَ ؿات‬-
2) Ex: :‫) هخال‬۲

- Bilal said to me, “I am speaking with him now”.
." ‫ " فٍ اّك لَ ُغَ مـٍ ػ عثـّ پَ صال کي ين‬، ‫ تالل هاتَ ّّيل‬-
- Bilal told me that he was speaking with him then.
.ٍّ ‫ تالل هاتَ ّّيل چي ُغَ ّؿّمتَ لَ ُغَ مـٍ ػ عثـّ پَ صال کي‬-
3) Ex: :‫) هخال‬۳
- Karrim said, “Jamal has repaired the fridge”. ." ٍ‫ "روال يغچال تـهـين کـړي ػ‬، ‫کـيـن ّّيـل‬
- Karrim said that Jamal had repaired the fridge. .ٍّ ‫کـين ّّيل چي روال روال يغچال تـهين کړي‬
4) Ex: :‫) هخال‬۴

- She said , “We visited Paris two months ago”.
." ‫ "هـْږ ػٍّ هياىـتي هغکـي پاؿيـل ّليـؼ‬، ‫ُغـي ّّيل‬
- She said that they had visited Paris two months before.
.ٍّ ‫ُغي ّّيل چي ُغـْي ػٍّ هياىتي هغکي پاؿيل ليؼلي‬

Note: ‫ًْټ‬
When the main verb is not in the simple past tense , no change is
possible in the tenses.
.‫ پَ فهاًْ کي تغيـ ًَ ؿاځي‬، ‫کلَ چي پَ ماػٍ تيـٍ فهاًَ کي اٍلي فؼـل ًَ ّي‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- Ahmad says, “ I know him”. ." ‫ " فٍ ُغَ پيژًن‬، ‫اصوؼ ّايي‬
- Ahmad says that he knows him. .‫اصوؼ ّايي چي ُغَ پيژًي‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- He has said , “ Amran is a clever student”.
." ٍ‫ " ػوـاى يْ اليمَ فػٍ کًّْکي ػ‬، ‫ُغَ ّيلي ػي‬
- He has said that Amran is a clever student.
.ٍ‫ُغَ ّيلي ػي چي ػوــاى يْ اليمَ فػٍ کًّْکي ػ‬
Note:‫ًْټ‬
When the narration is unchangeable general fact , no change is made in
the indirect speech ; even if the main verb is in the simple past tense.
َ‫ پَ غيـ هنتمين کالم کي تغيـ ًَ ؿاځي ؛ صتی کَ چيـي پ‬، ‫کلَ چي ًمـل لْل(ّيٌا) کلي صميمت ّي‬
.‫ماػٍ تيـٍ فهاًَ کي اٍلي فؼـل ُن هْرْػ ّي‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- Shabeer said , ” The sky is blue”. ." ٍ‫ " آمواى آتي ػ‬، ‫ىثيـ ّّيل‬
- Shabeer said that the sky is blue. .ٍ‫ىثيـ ّّيل چي آمواى آتی ػ‬
2) Intrrogative sentences: ‫پْښتًْکي (اعتفِاهي) جولي‬

The following points are to be observed:
:‫الًذي ًـقـطـي تايذ هشاعـات ؽــي‬
1. The main verb is changed to a verb which can express a question.

.‫اٍلي فؼـل لَ ُغَ فؼـل مـٍ تثؼيليږي چي کْالي ىي مْال تياى کړي‬
Like : Ask )‫ مْال کْل‬، ‫ (پْښتل‬, Inquire )‫ (تيا پْښتٌَ کْل‬, Want to know )‫ پيژًؼل‬، ‫(پُْيؼل‬
...etc.
2. The comma and quotation marks are omitted.
.‫ػ کاهـي اّ ًمـل لـْل ػالهـي لَ هٌځَ ّړل کـيږي‬
3. To connect the two parts of the sentence.
.‫ػ رـوـلي ػٍّ تــعــي مـــٍ ًـښـلــْي‬

4. The pronouns based on speaker and reporter , are changed.

.‫ّويـًَّ ػ ّيًْکي اّ ًمـل لْل کًّْکي پَ اماك تغيـ کْي‬
5. The subject is placed before verb. .‫فاػـل لَ فؼـل څغَ هغکي ځاي ًيني‬
6. A full stop is used at the end of the sentence instead of a question

mark.
.‫ػ رولي پَ اعيـ کي ػ مْالي ػالهي پَ ځاي ًمطَ ايښْػل کيږي‬
Note: ‫ًْټ‬
The words (do , does , did) are omitted in the indirect speech.
.‫( کلوي پَ غيـهنتمين کالم کي لَ هٌځَ ځي‬did , does , do) ‫ػ‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- He said: “ Can I help you?” " ‫" آيا کْالي ىن لَ تامی مـٍ هـمتَ ّکړم؟‬:‫ُغَ ّّيل‬
- He asked if he could help me. .‫ُغَ پْښتٌَ ّکړٍ چي آيا ُغَ کْالي ىْاي لَ هامـٍ هـمتَ ّکړي‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- He said: “ Do you know me?” " ‫ " آيا ها پيژًۍ؟‬:‫ُغَ ّّيل‬
- He wanted to know if I knew him. .ٍ‫ُغَ غْښتل ّپُْيږي چي آيا ُغَ هي پيژاًؼ‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- Ali said: “Have you visited Kabul?” " ‫ " آيا تامي کاتل ليؼلي ػٍ؟‬:‫ػلی ّّيل‬
- Ali asked me if I had visited Kabul. .ٍّ ‫اصوؼ ّپْښتل چي آيا ها کاتل ليؼلي‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- Khalid said: “Where are you going now?” " ‫ " تامي چيـي ځۍ؟‬:‫عالؼ ّّيل‬
- Khalid wanted to know where I was going then. .‫عالؼ غْښتل ّپُْيږي چي فٍ چيـي تـلـن‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- The students said: “When is our examination?” " ‫ " فهْږ اهتضاى څَ ّعت ػٍ؟‬:‫ىاګـػاًْ ّّيل‬
- The students asked when their examination was..ٍّ ‫ىاګـػاًْ ّپْښتل چي اهتضاى يي څَ ّعت‬

3) Imperative sentences: ‫اهـــشي جــوــلـــي‬

The following poinnts are necessary to be observed in the imperative
sentences.
.‫پَ اهـي رولْ کي الًؼي ًمطي تايؼ ّـّؿي هـاػات ىي‬
1. The main verb is changed to a verb which can express a command

or request.
.‫اٍلي فؼـل پَ ُغَ فؼـل تاًؼي تثؼيليږي چي ّکْالي ىي يْ اهــ يا غـْښتٌَ تياى کړي‬
Like: Order )‫ (ُؼايت ّؿکْل‬, Request )‫ (غـْښتٌَ کْل‬, command )‫ (اهـ کْل‬... etc.
2. To connect the two parts of the sentence. .‫ػ رولي ػٍّ تـعي مـٍ ًښلْي‬
A) Use (to) in the positive case. .‫( امتؼواليږي‬to) ‫پَ هخثت صالت کی‬
B) Use (not to) in the negative case. .‫( امتؼواليږي‬not to) ‫پَ هٌفي صالت کي‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- He said: “Come on time.” " .‫ " پَ ّعت ؿاځي‬:‫ُغَ ّّيل‬
- He ordered to me tocome on time. .‫ُغَ هاتَ ُؼايت ّکړ چي پَ ّعت ؿاىـن‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- He said: “Don‟t go away please.” ". َ‫ " لطفاً لـی هَ ځ‬: ‫ُغَ ّّيل‬
- He asked me not to go away. .‫ُغَ لَ هاڅغَ غْښتٌَ ّکړٍ تـڅْ لـی الړ ًين‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- Jalal said: “Please study your lessons well.” " .َ‫ "لطفا ً عپل ػؿمًَْ ػي ښَ ّّاي‬:‫رالل ّّيل‬
- Jalal requested me to study my lessons well. .‫رالل لَ ها څغَ غْښتٌَ ّکړٍ چي عپل ػؿمًَْ ښَ ّّاين‬
4) Exclamatory sentences: ‫ًـؼايـي رــولـــي‬

The folloowing points should be observed in the exclamatory sentences:
:‫پَ ًؼايي رولْ کي تايؼ الًؼي ټکي هـاػات ىي‬
1. The main verb is changed to one of the verbs which can express em-
otion or strong feeling.
.‫اٍلي فؼـل پَ يْ ُغَ فؼـلًْْ تثؼيليږي چي ُيزاى يا اصناك تياى کړي‬
Like: Cry )‫ فـياػ کْل‬، ‫ (ژړل‬, Appreciate ) ‫ متايل‬، ‫ ػؿک کْل‬، ‫ (ػؿًاّي کْل‬,
Shout )‫ (فـياػ کْل‬, Admire )‫ تيْيمـْل‬، ‫ ( متايل‬.... etc.

2. The comma and quotation marks are omitted.

.‫ػ کاهي اّ ػ ًمـل کْل ػالهي لَ هٌځَ ځي‬
3. The other changes (tenses and adverbs) are the same as declarative
form.
.‫ػ ًْؿّ (فهاًْ اّ ليؼًّْ) تغيـات ػ عثـي صالت پَ څيـ ػي‬
Ex: ‫هخال‬
- He said, “ Welcome to Ghazni !” " ! ‫ " غـقًي تَ ښَ ؿاغالمت‬، ‫ُغَ ّّيل‬
- He greeted with me saying that welcome to Ghazni.
.‫ُغَ ػ ښَ ؿاغالمت ّيلـْ غقًي تَ لَ هامـٍ ؿّغثړ ّکړ‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- Ahmad said, “Well-done you won the challenge !”
"! ‫ " آفـيي ػ هناتمي ّړًّکي ىْي‬، ‫اصوؼ ّّيل‬
- Ahmad appreciated me saying that I had won the challenge.
.ٍ‫اصوؼ ػػي پَ ّيلْ مـٍ چي فٍ ػ هناتمي ّړًّکي ىْي ّم لَ ها څغَ متايٌَ ّکړ‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- He said , “What a noisy he is !” "! ٍ‫ " څَ يْ غالوغالي (مړي) ػ‬، ‫ُغَ ّّيل‬
- He should what a noisy man he was. .ٍّ )‫ُغَ فـياػ ّکړ چي څَ يْغالوغالي (مړي‬
Interjection
‫د غـږ(ًذا) تْسی‬
Interiection is a word which is used to express some sudden feelling or
emotion.
.‫ػ ًؼا تْؿی ُغَ کلوَ ػٍ چي ػ اصناك اّيا ُيزاى لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږی‬
Ex: Alas ! He passed a way. .ْ‫ افنْك ! ُغَ هړ ى‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Oh! It is realy funny. .ٍ‫ آٍ! ّاليؼا ً هنغـٍ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Pooh! I hurt my finger. .ٍ‫ اط! ها عپلَ ګْتَ غْڅَ کړ‬:‫هخال‬

 Interjections are divided into the following parts.

.‫د ًذا تْسی پَ الًذی تشخْ ّيؾل ؽْي دي‬
A: Natural interjections ‫حقيـقي د ًذا تْسی‬

These interjections usually contain one syllable and express strong feeling
or emotion.
.‫ػ ًؼا ػغَ تْؿي هؼوْالً يْ ُزايي ػي اّ لْي اصناك يا ُيزاى تياًْي‬
- The natural interjections are as follow: ‫حقيقي د ًذا تْسي پَ الًذي ډّل دي‬
1. To express surprise. .ٍ‫د تعجة يا حشاًتيا د تياى لپاس‬
Like: Oh! )! ٍ‫ (آ‬, Ah! )!ٍ‫ (آ‬, Ha! )!‫(ُا‬.

Ex: Oh! What a tall building. .ٍ‫ آٍ! څَ لْړٍ ّػاًۍ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
2. To express joy and laughter. .ٍ‫ اّ خٌذا د تياى لپاس‬، ‫خْؽحالي‬
Like: Ha Ha! )!‫(ُا ُا‬.

Ex: Ha Ha! We won the game. .َ‫ ُا ُا! هْږ لْتَ ّګټل‬:‫هخال‬
3. To express grief and pity. .ٍ‫د غـن اّ افغْط د تيا ى لپاس‬

Ex: Alas! He is dead. .ٍ‫ افنْك! ُغَ هړ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
4. To express approval and confirmation. .ٍ‫د تايذ اّ تصذيق د تياى لپاس‬

Ex: Bravo! you have done well the homework.
.ٍ‫ ىاتاك! تا کْؿًۍ ّظيفَ ښَ تـمـٍ کړي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
5. To express disgust , pity and blaming. .ٍ‫د ًفشت عشښٌذًي اّ هالهتيا د تياى لپاس‬
Ex: Fie! Disoppointed in the exam. .!ٍ‫ پَ اهتضاى کی پَ ًاکاهۍ تاًؼي عزالت ّکاږ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Fie, fie! You are blame. .‫ تل! تَ هالهت يي‬، ‫ تل‬:‫هخال‬
6. To express pain. .‫د دسد د تياى لپاسٍ اعتعواليږي‬

Ex: Pooh! I hurt my finger. .ٍ‫ پٍْ(اط)! ها عپلَ ګْتَ غْڅَ کړ‬:‫هخال‬
)‫(ج‬
7. To express greeting and farewell. .ٍ‫پَ اهاًي د تياى لپاس‬ ‫د سّغثړ اّ خذاي‬
Ex: Adieu! See you tommorow. .ٌْ‫ عؼاي پاهاى! مثا ّي‬:‫هخال‬

B: Compound interjections: ‫هشکة د ًذا تْسي‬

These interjections are formed by combination of two or more than two
words and express a strong feeling.
.‫ػ ًؼا ػغَ تْؿي لَ ػّّ يا لَ ػّّ څغَ لَ فياتْ کلوْ تـکية ىْي اّ لْي اصناك تياًْي‬
Like : Well-done! )!‫ (آفــيـي‬, Wellcome! )!‫ (ښــَ ؿاغــالمـت‬, Good heavense
)!َ‫ (اي عؼايـَ ػـزيـث‬,Shame on you! )!ٍ‫ (عزـالت ّکـاږ‬, Ah me! )!‫(افـنـْك پَ هـا‬
Good bye! )!‫ (عؼاي پاهاى‬, Just my luck! )!‫ (فها تؼ تغت‬, It is all very well !
)! ًَ‫ (متـګي ؿّښا‬.... etc)‫(اًّْؿ‬
Interjections formed by parts of speech

‫ُغَ ًذايي تْسي چي د کالم د اجـضاّّ پَ ّعيلَ تؾکيـليږي‬
1. With nouns. .ٍ‫لَ اموًْْ مـ‬

Ex: Stupid guy! !‫ اصوك مړي‬:‫هخال‬
2. With adverbs. .ٍ‫لَ ليؼًّْ مـ‬

Ex: How care less! !َٓ‫ څْهـٍ تي اصتيا‬:‫هخال‬
3. With verbs. .ٍ‫لَ فؼـلًْْ مـ‬

Ex: Listen! Lesten! !‫ غـْږ ًّينۍ! غـْږ ًّينۍ‬:‫هخال‬
Note:‫ًْټ‬
Sometimes we can express emotion or feeling by sentences, which are
called exclamatory sentences.
‫ چـي (پَ ػي ٍـْؿت کي) ػ‬، ‫ځيٌي ّعـتًَْ هـْږ ُيزاى يا اصناك پَ رولَ کـي ښکاؿٍ کـْالي ىـْي‬
.‫ًؼايـي رولـْ پَ ًْم ياػيـږي‬
Ex: :‫هخال‬
- What a noisy guy he is! !ٍ‫څَ يْ غالوغالي (مړي) ػ‬
- How terrible it is! !‫څْهـٍ ډاؿى‬

Suffixes and prefixes

‫سّعتاړي اّ هختاړي‬
Suffixes and prefixes are syllables which are added before and after the
words and change their meaning.
‫ؿّمتاړي اّ هغتاړي ُغَ الفاظ ػي چي هغکي اّ ّؿّمتَ لَ کلوـْ څغَ ػـالٍّ کيږي اّ ػ ُـغـْي‬
.‫هؼٌی تَ تغيـ ّؿکْي‬
Prefixes: ‫هـخـتـاړي‬
Prefixes are syllables which are added before words and change their
meaning.
.‫هغتاړي ُغَ الفاظ ػي چي لَ کلوْ څغَ هغکي ػالٍّ کيږي اّ ػ ُغـْي هؼٌي تَ تغيـ ّؿکْي‬
Like:
Like – Dislike )‫ (عْښيؼل ــ ًَ عْښْل‬, Read – Reread )‫ (ّيل ــ ػّتاؿٍ ّيل‬.... etc.
 The most importan prefixes are as follow: ‫هِوتشيي هختاړي پَ الًذي ډّل دي‬
1) Un:
It is placed before verbs and adjectives to convert their meaning.
.‫ػ فؼـلًْْ څغَ هغکي ځاي ًيني اّ ػ ُغـْي هؼٌي تَ تغيـ ّؿکْي‬
Ex: Able – Unable )‫ (تْاًيؼل ــ ًَ تْاًيؼل‬, Kind – Unkind )‫(هِـتاى ــ ًاهِـتاى‬.
2) In:
It is added before adjectives and converts their meaning.
.‫ػ ٍفتًْْ څغَ هغکي ػالٍّ کيږي اّ ػ ُغْي هؼٌی تَ تغيـ ّؿکْي‬
Ex: Direct – Indirect )‫ (هنتمين ــ غيـهنتمين‬, Formal – Informal )‫(ؿموي ــ غيـ ؿموي‬.
3) Dis:
It is placed before adjectives and verbs and converts their meaning.
.‫ػ ٍفتًْْ څغَ هغکي ځاي ًيني اّ ػ ُغـْي هؼٌي تَ تغيـ ّؿکْی‬
Ex: Agree - Disagree)‫ (هْافميت کْل ــ هغالفت کْل‬, Appear - Disapear )‫(ښکاؿٍ کيؼل ــ ّؿکيؼل‬
4) Re:
It is placed before verbs and shows repetition.
.‫لَ فؼـل څغَ هغکي ځاي ًيني اّ ػ (فؼـلًْْ) تکـاؿ ښيي‬
Ex:Write - Rewrite )‫ (ليکل ــ ػّتاؿٍ ليکل‬, Correct – Recorrect )‫(تَضيش کْل ــ ػّتاؿٍ تَضيش کْل‬

Suffixes: ‫سّعــتـاړي‬
Suffixes are syllables which are placed after words and change their
meaning.
.‫ؿّمتاړي ُغَ الفاظ ػي چي لَ کلوْ څغَ ّؿّمتَ ځاي ًيني اّ ػ ُغـْي هؼٌی تَ تغيـ ّؿکْي‬
Ex: Implement – Implementation ) ‫(ارــا کـْل ــ ارــا‬
 The most important suffixes are as follow: ‫هِوتشيي سّعتاړي پَ الًذي ډّل دي‬
1) Or – er :
These are placed after words and turn them into nouns.
.‫ػغَ لَ کليوْ څغَ ّؿّمتَ ځاي ًيني اّ ُغـْي پَ اموًْْ تثؼيلْي‬
Ex: Hold – Holder )‫ (ًيْل ــ ًيًْکي‬, Act -- Actor )‫(توخيل کْل ــ توخيل کًّْکي‬.
2) Al :
It is added at the end of nouns and changes them to adjectives.
.‫ػ امـوًْْ پَ اعيـ کي ػالٍّ کيږي اّ ُغـْي پَ ٍفتًْْ تثؼيلْي‬
Ex: Nature – Natural )‫ (ٓثؼيت ــ ٓثؼي‬, Nation – National )‫ (هلت ــ هـلـي‬.....etc.
3) Ion :
It is added at the end of verbs and turns them into nouns.
.‫ػ فؼـلًْْ پَ اعيـ کي ػالٍّ کيږي اّ ُغـْي پَ اموًْْ تثؼيلْي‬
Ex: Locate - Location)‫ (هْلؼيت لـل ــ هْلؼيت‬, Participate - Participation.)‫(ګډّى کْل ــ ګډّى‬
4) Sion :
It is placed at the end of the verbs and changes them to abstract nouns.
.‫ػ فؼـلًْْ پَ اعيـ کي ځاي ًيني اّ ُغـْي ػ هؼٌی پَ اموًْْ تاًؼی تثؼيليږي‬
Ex: Decide – Decision )‫ (تَوين ًيْل ــ تَوين‬, Divide – Division )‫(تمنيوْل ـ تمنين‬.
5) Ize :
It is added after the nouns and turns them into verbs.
.‫لَ اموـًْْ څغَ ّؿّمتَ ػالٍّ کيږي اُّغـْي پَ فؼـلًْْ تثؼيلْي‬
Ex: Islam – Islamize)‫ (امالم ــ هنلواًْل‬,National – Nationalize )‫ (هلي ــ هلي کْل‬...etc.
6) Ness :
This suffix is placed after adjectives and changes them to abstract nouns.
.‫ػغَ هغاړی لَ ٍفتًْْ څغَ ّؿّمتَ ځاي ًيني اّ ُغـْي ػ هؼٌی پَ اموًْْ تثؼيلْي‬
Ex: Kind – Kindness)‫ (هِـتاى ــ هِـتاًي‬, Dark – Darkness )‫ (تاؿيک ــ تاؿيکي‬.....etc.

7) Less :
Is added after nouns and converts their meaning.
.‫لَ اموًْْ څغَ ّؿّمتَ ػالٍّ کيږي اّ ػ ُغـْي هؼٌی تغيـّي‬
Ex: Care – Careless)َ‫ (تْرَ ــ تي تْر‬, Hope – Hopeless )‫ (اهيؼ ــ ًا اهيؼ‬..... etc.
8) Ful :
It is placed after nouns and changes them to adjectives.
.‫لَ اموًْْ څغَ ّؿّمتَ ځاي ًيني اّ ُغـْي پَ ٍفتًْْ تثؼيلْي‬
Ex: Sin – Sinful )‫ (ګٌاٍ ــ ګٌِکاؿ‬, Pain – Painful )‫ (ػؿػ – ػؿػًاک‬..... etc.
9) Ive :
It is placed after verbs and changes them to adjectives
.‫لَ فؼـلًْْ څغَ ّؿّمتَ ځاي ًينی اّ ُغـْي پَ ٍفتًْْ تاًؼي تثؼيلْي‬
Ex: Conclude – Conclusive )‫ (ًتيزَ ــ ًتيزَ تغو‬, Indicate – Indicative )‫(ښْػل ــ ښًْکي‬
10) Ment :
It is added at the end of verbs and turns them into nouns.
.‫ػ فؼـلًْْ پَ اعيـ کي اّافَ کيږي اّ ُغـْي پَ اموًْْ تاًؼي تثؼيلْي‬
Ex: Arrange - Arrangement )‫ (تـتيثْل ــ تـتية‬,Punish - Punishment)‫(هزافات کْل ــ هزافات‬
11) Able :
It is placed after verbs and changes them into adjectives.
.‫فؼـلًْْ څغَ ّؿّمتَ ځاي ًيني اّ ُغـْي پَ ٍفتًْْ تاًؼي تثؼيلْي‬
Ex: Eat – Eateable )‫ (عْړل – عْړًکي‬, Drink – Drinkable )‫ (څښل ــ څښًْکي‬.... etc.
Punctuation
ًَ‫عالهَ ايښْد‬
Punctuation is an important part of Grammar by which the speaker can
explain Himself or herself well.
‫ػالهَ ايښْػًَ ػ ګـاهـ يٍْ هِوَ تـعَ ػٍ چي ّيًْکی ػ "ُغَ" پَ ّامطَ کْالي عپل ُـؼف ّاّش‬
.‫"تياى" کړي‬

 The following are the most important symbols in English:

:‫پَ اًګليغي کي هِوتشيٌي عالهي پَ الًذي ډّل دي‬
1) Full stop , period ( .) ‫ټـکـی‬

Period is used to show the longest pause and is used as follow:
:‫ټکی ػ اّږػ تـيي ځٌډ ښکاؿًؼّي ػي اّ پَ الًؼي ډّل امتؼواليږي‬
1. To mark the declarative and imperative sentences.
.ٍ‫ػ عثـي اّ اهـي رولْ ػ ػالهَ ايښْػًي لپاؿ‬
Ex: He come here yesterday. .‫ ُغَ تيـٍ ّؿځ ػلتَ ؿاغي‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Please come on time. .َ‫ لطفا ً پَ ّعت ؿاځ‬:‫هخال‬
2. After abbreviations. .َ‫لَ هغفـفاتْ څغَ ّؿّمت‬
Ex: Mr. Shahid. .‫ ښاغلي ىاُؼ‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Dr. Mirwais. .‫ ػاکتـ هيـّيل‬:‫هخال‬
3. To show a decimal. .ٍ‫ػ اػياؿي ښْػلْ لپاؿ‬

Ex: 5.6 million. .ًَْ‫ هيلي‬۵،۶ :‫هخال‬
2) Comma ( , ) : َ‫کـاهـ‬
Comma represents the shortest pause in the sentences.
.‫کاهَ پَ رولْ کي لَ کْچٌی تـيي ځٌډ ًوايٌؼٍ ګی کْي‬
- Comma is used as follow: :‫کاهَ پَ الًذي ډّل اعتعواليږي‬
1. To separate the series of words which have the same task in a sent-
ence.
.‫ػ يْ ػمتَ کلواتْ رال کْلْ لپاؿٍ چي پَ يٍْ رولَ کي ػيي ّظيفَ مـتَ ؿمْي‬
Ex: Herat , Ghazni , Wardak and Kunar are the provinces of Afghanistan.
.‫ ّؿػک اّ کٌړ ػ افغاًنتاى ّاليتًَْ ػي‬، ‫ غقًي‬، ‫ ُـات‬:‫هخال‬
2. After the main verb in the direct speech.

.‫پَ هنتمين کالم کي لَ اٍلي څغَ ّؿّمت‬
Ex: He said , “ I am very happy.” " .‫ " فٍ ډيـ عْىضالَ ين‬، ‫ ُغَ ّّيل‬:‫هخال‬

3. After (yes) and (no). .َ‫( څغَ ّؿّمت‬no) ّ‫( ا‬yes) َ‫ل‬
Ex: Are you a doctor? ‫ آيا تَ يْ ډاکتـ يي؟‬:‫هخال‬
Yes , I am a doctor. .‫ فٍ يْ ډاکتـ ين‬، ُْ
No , I am not a doctor. .‫ فٍ يْ ډاکتـ ًَ ين‬، ًَ
3) Semi colon ( ; ) )َ‫ټـکـي کـاهــَ (ًيـوـَ ؽـاسح‬

Semi colon shows a longer pause than comma but shorter than period.
.‫ټکي کاهَ ًنثت لَ کاهي څغَ ػؿافتـځٌډ هګـ لَ ټکي څغَ لٌډتـ ځٌډ ښکاؿٍ کْي‬
1. Semi colon can be used instead of a conjunction between two
independent sentences.
.‫ټکي کاهَ کْالي ىي ػ ػّّ هنتملْ رولْ تـهٌځ ػ ؿتطي تْؿی پَ ځاي امتؼوال ىي‬
Ex: He is a student ; Muzamil is a doctor.
.ٍ‫ ُغـَ يْ فػٍ کـًّْکـي ػٍ ؛ هقهـل يـْ ډاکـتـ ػ‬:‫هخال‬
2. To separate the series of related words separated by comma.
.‫ػ ُغَ ػمتَ تړلْ کلوْ ػ رال کْلْ لپاؿٍ چي ػ کاهي پَ ّامطَ رال ىْي ػي‬
Ex: To see , saw , seen ; to ride , rode , ridden ; to write , wrote , written.
4) Colon ( : ) )‫ؽـاسحَ ( دٍّ ټـکـي‬

Colon represents the longer pause than semi colon but shorter than period
and is used as follow.
‫ىاؿصَ ًنثت لَ ًيوَ ىاؿصي څغَ پَ ػؿافتـ هګـ ټکي تَ پَ لٌډتـ ځٌډ ًوايٌؼٍ ګي کْي اّ پَ الًؼي‬
.‫ډّل امتؼواليږي‬
1. To express examples. .ٍ‫د هثالًْْ تياًْلْ لپاس‬

Ex : He can play football. .‫ ُغَ کْالي ىي ػ فْټثال لْتَ ّکړي‬: ‫هخال‬
2. Instead of comma in the direct speech. .‫پَ هغتقين کالم کي د کاهي پَ ځاي‬
Ex: He said : “I do my homeworke.” ". َ‫ " هاعپلَ کْؿًۍ ّظيفَ مـتَ ّؿمْل‬: ‫ ُغَ ّّيل‬:‫هخال‬
3. To express enumerations. .ٍ‫د ؽويشلْ د تياى لپاس‬

Ex: The (to do) verbs are : Do , Does , Did.
. َ‫ څغ‬Did , Does , Do : َ‫( فؼـلًَْ ػثاؿت ػي ل‬to do) ‫ػ‬
4. To express a quotation. .ٍ‫د يْ ًقـل قْل تياى لپاس‬
Ex: H. Mohammad)ً( says : prayer is the key of paradise.
.ٍ‫ لوًْځ ػ رٌت کيلي ػ‬: ‫ صْـت هضوؼ(ً) فـهايي‬:‫هخال‬

5) Exclamation mark ( ! ). َ‫د غــږ(ًذا) يا تعـجـة عـالهـ‬

Exclamation mark is used as follow: ‫د غږيا تعجة عالهَ پَ الًذي ډّل اعتعواليږي‬
1. After interjections. .َ‫د ًذا لَ تْسي څخَ ّسّعت‬

Ex: Pooh! I hurt my finger. .ٍ‫ اط! ها عپلَ ګْتَ پـي کړ‬:‫هخال‬
2. At the end of the exclamatory sentences. .‫د ًذايي جولْ پَ اخيش کي‬
Ex: What a fooish he is! !ٍ‫ څَ يْ اصوك مړي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
3. After imperative verbs which asks for attention.
.‫لَ اهشي فعـلًْْ څخَ ّسّعتَ چي د تْجَ غْښتٌَ ّي‬
Ex: Help me! !ٍ‫ هـمتَ ؿامـٍ ّکړ‬:‫هخال‬
Ex: Long live Afghanistan! !‫ ژًّؼي ػي ّي افغاًنتاى‬:‫هخال‬
6) Question mark (?). َ‫د عـْالـيَ عـالهـ‬

Question mark is used as follow: ‫د عْاليَ عالهَ پَ الًذي ډّل اعتعواليږي‬
1. At the end of intrrogative sentences. .‫د عْالي جولي پَ اخيشکي‬

Ex: Can you speak Arabic? ‫ آيا تَ پَ ػــتی عثـي کْالي ىي؟‬:‫هخال‬
2. After intonation questions. .َ‫د غـږي عْالًْْ څخَ ّسّعت‬

Ex: You are here? ‫ تامْ ػلتَ يامت؟‬:‫هخال‬
7) Slash ( / ). َ‫د اًتخاب عـالهـ‬

Slash shows a choice between two words or sentences.
.‫ػ اًتغاب ػالهَ ػ ػّّ کلوْ تـهٌځ اًتغاب ښيي‬
Ex: S + will / shall + V + C.
8) Hyphen ( - ) َ‫د ّصـل عـالهـ‬

1. To connect the words in a combined noun.
.ٍ‫پَ يـْ امـن کي ػ کلـوـْ ػ ٍّلـْلـْ لـپاؿ‬
Ex: Father - in - law , Man - of - war.
2. At the end of lines to connect the rest of an uncompleted word.

.ٍ‫ػ ليکي پَ اعيـکي ػ يْ ًاهکلي کلوي ػ ٍّلْلْ لپاؿ‬
Ex: Afghanistan is an agricultural and ancient country many people of af-

ghanistan are uneducated.
.‫ افغاًنتاى يْ فؿاػتي ُيْاػ ػٍ اّ ػ افغاًنتاى ډيـ علک تي مْاػٍ ػي‬:‫هخال‬

3. To separate syllable. .ٍ‫د ُجا د جال کْلْ لپاس‬

Ex: Moral = Mo - ral.
Ex: Clever = Cle - ver.
9) Dash ( – ). ‫د فاصـلي خظ‬

1. Between two numbers or dates to express the duration.
.‫ػ ػّّ ػؼػًّْ يا ًيـټْ تـهٌځ هْػٍ تياًْي‬
Ex: I studied from page 10 – 20. .ٍ‫ هظ پْؿي هطالؼَ ّکړ‬۲۱ ‫ څغَ تـ‬۱۱ َ‫ ل‬:‫هخال‬
2. To show tongue obstacles and stammering. .ٍ‫ػ ژتي تٌؼيو اّ تْتلي ښْػلْ لپاؿ‬
Ex: Fa – fa – father come to Kabul. .‫ پَ ــ پَ ــ پالؿ کاتل تَ ؿاغي‬:‫هخال‬
10) Quotation mark (“ “). َ‫د ًقـل قـْل عـالهــ‬

The quotation marks can be used to show a narration.
.‫ػ ًمل لْل ػالهَ کْالي ىي ػ يْي ّيٌا لپاؿٍ امتؼوال ىي‬
Ex: Shabeer said , “ I am writting a letter now”.
." ‫ " فٍ اّك ػ يْي ؿمالي پَ ليکلْ تْعت ين‬، ‫ ىثيـ ّّيل‬:‫هخال‬
11) Parentheses ( ) ‫کْچٌی قـْط‬

1. To express the meaning of something. .ٍ‫ػ يْىي ػ هؼٌي تياًْلْ لپاؿ‬
Ex: Hashish (narcotic) is harmful for health.
.‫ چـك (هغؼؿ) ػ ؿّغتيا لپاؿٍ هْـ ػي‬:‫هخال‬
2. To express the parts of a division. .ٍ‫ػ يْ لنوت ػ تـعْ تياًْلْ لپاؿ‬
Ex: Afghanistan has two native languages. (a) Pashto (b) Dari .
.‫( ػؿی‬b) ْ‫( پښت‬a) ‫ افغاًنتاى ػٍّ هضلي ژتي لـي‬:‫هخال‬
12) Apostrophe ( „ ) َ‫اپا عتشافي يا د لَ هځَ ّړلْ عاله‬

1. In the genitive case. ."ٍ‫پَ اّافي کي "لَ هلکي امن مـ‬
Ex: Arfan‟s book. .‫ ػ ػــفاى کتاب‬:‫هخال‬

Ex: Mohammad‟s father. .‫ ػ هضوؼ پالؿ‬:‫هخال‬

2. To show a contraction. .ٍ‫ػ اعتَاؿ ښْػلْ لپاؿ‬

Ex: He has studied the book = He‟s studied the book.
.ٍ‫ ُـغـَ کتاب هطالؼـَ کـړي ػ‬:‫هخال‬
13) Ellipsis or dots ( ... ) ‫څـْ ًـقـطـي‬

Shows the omission of word or words. .‫ػ کلوي يا ػ کلوْ لَ هٌځَ ّړل ښيي‬
Ex: The auxiliary verbs consist in: am , is , are , was , were , must ... etc.
.‫ اّػامي ًْؿ‬... Must , were , was , are , is , am :َ‫ کْهکي فؼـلًَْ ػثاؿت ػي ل‬:‫هخال‬
Writing
ٌَ‫لـيکـ‬
Writing is a basic art and modern necessity. Through writting we can
express our ideas for others and understand about the others ideas as-
well.
‫ ػ ليکٌي لَ الؿي هْږ کْالي ىْ عپل ًظـيات يا اُؼاف‬.ٍ‫ليکٌَ يْ امامي اّ ػَـي ّـّؿت ػ‬
. ّ‫ًْؿّتَ تياى کړّ اّ ُن پَ "ّوي کي" ػ ًْؿّ لَ ًظـياتْ يا اُؼافـْ څغَ آالس صاٍلَ کړ‬
We can express our ideas by writing sentences and paragraphs.
.ّ‫هْږ کْالي ىْ عپل ًظـيات يا ػمايؼ ػ رولْ يا هتٌْ پَ ليکلْ مـٍ تياى کړ‬
1) Sentences writing: ٌَ‫جـوـلَ لـيـکـ‬

Sentence is a group of words which makes a complete meaning.
.‫رولَ ػ کلوْ ُغَ ګـّپ ػٍ چي کاهلَ يٍْ کاهلَ هؼٌی افاػٍ کْي‬
Ex: Ahmad plays footbal every day. .‫ اصوؼ ُـٍ ّؿځ ػ فْټثال لْتَ کْي‬:‫هخال‬
The following points sould be observed in writing a sentence.

.‫د يْي جولي پَ ليکلْ عشٍ تايذ الًذي ټکي هشاعات ؽي‬
1. The first letter must be capital. .‫لْهړي تْؿی تايؼ لْي ّي‬
2. Threre must be space among the words. .‫ػ کلوْ تـهٌځ تايؼ فاٍلَ هْرْػٍ ّي‬
3. Mark a sentence with a full stop or question mark as required.
.‫يٍْ رولَ لَ ټکي يا مْاليَ ػالهي ػ غْښتٌي مـٍ من ػالهَ ايښْػًَ ىي‬
4. The sentence must be logical. .‫رولَ تايؼ هٌطمي ّي‬

2) Paragraph writing: ٌَ‫هــتـي يا پـشاګـــشاف لـيـکـ‬

A group of sentences which are joined by conjunction and follow one
main idea is called paragraph.
‫ُغَ ګـّپ ػ کلوْ چي ػ ؿتٔ تْؿی پَ ّامطَ مـٍ تړل ىْي ّي اّ يٍْ هفکْؿٍ ّړاًؼي کړي ػ هتي‬
.‫يا پـاګـاف پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬
A paragraph usually has one topic sentence and several supporting sente-
nces.
.‫يْ هتي هؼوْالً ػ يْ هّْْػي اّ څْ صوايْي رولـْ لـًّکي ّي‬
1. Topic sentences: ‫هـْضـْعــي جــولي‬

The sentence which introduces a paragraph is called topic sentences. The
topic sentence is usually used at the beginning of a paragraph.
‫ هّْْػي رولَ هؼوْالً ػ رولي‬.‫ ػ هّْْػي رولي پَ ًْم ياػيږي‬، ‫ُغَ رولَ چي هتي هؼـفي کْي‬
.‫پَ مـکي ليکل کيږي‬
2. Supporting sentences: ‫حـوـايـْي جـوـلي‬
The sentences which support the topic sentence and add details to a par-
agraph are called supporting sentences.
‫ُغَ رولي چي هّْْػي رولَ صوايَ کـْي اّ پَ هتي تاًؼي رـقيات فياتْي ػ صوايـْي رـولْ پَ ًْم‬
.‫ياػيږي‬
 The paragraph are divided into four parts:
:‫هتـٌــًَْ پَ څـلــّسّ تشخــّ ّيـؾـل ؽــْي دي‬
1) Expository paragraphs. ًٌَْ‫اعثاؿي هتـ‬

2) Persuasive paragraphs. ًٌَْ‫تـيْيمـي هتـ‬
3) Narrative paragraphs. ًٌَْ‫ًـمـلـي(ؿّايتي) هت‬
4) Descriptive paragraphs. ًٌَْ‫تٍْيفي هت‬
1) Expository paragraphs.ًٌَْ‫اخثاسي هتـ‬

A group of sentences which gives information about some person , place
or thing is called expository paragraph.
.‫ ځاي يا ىي پَ تاؿٍ کي هؼلْهات ّؿکْي اعثاؿي هتي تلل کيږي‬، ٌ‫ُغَ ګـّپ ػ رولْ چي ػ ىغ‬
1) Persuasive paragraphs. ًٌَْ‫تـؾْيقـي هتـ‬

A paragraph which encourages some one to do or not to do something is
called persuasive paragraph.
.‫ تيْيمي هتي تلل کيږي‬، ‫ُغَ هتي چي يْىغٌ ػ يْىي تـمـٍ کْلْ اّيا ًَ تـمـٍ کْلْ تَ تيْيمْي‬

2) Narrative paragraphs. ًٌَْ‫ًـقـلي (سّايتي) هتـ‬

A group of sentences which expresses a narration is called narrative para-
graph.
.‫ُغَ ګـّپ ػ رولْ چي ًمل(ؿّايت) تياًْي ػ ًملي هتي تلل کيږي‬
3) Descriptive paragraph. ًَْ‫تْصـيـفــي هــتــٌـ‬

A paragraph which describes some one or something is called descriptive
Paragraph.
.‫ُغَ هتي چي ىغٌ يا ىي تٍْيف کړي تٍْيفي هتي تلل کيږي‬
Letter writing
ٌَ‫لـيـک لـيکـ‬
Ltter writing constitute the main parts of writing , of course letter writing
is a way to communicate with others in writing.
ّ‫ الـثتَ ليک ليکٌَ ُغَ ٓـيمَ ػٍ چي ػ ُغی پَ ّميلَ لَ ًْؿ‬،‫ليک ليکٌَ ػ ليکٌي هِوَ تـعَ تيکيلْي‬
.ْ‫مـٍ اړيکي ًين‬
1) Heading ‫ػـٌـْاى‬
2) Greeting or salutation ‫ؿّغثړ يا مالم‬
3) Body or text ‫ػ "ليک" هتي‬
4) Closing َ‫"ػ ليک" عاتو‬
5) Signature "‫ػ اهْاء "ځاي‬
1) Heading : ‫عـٌـْاى‬
In the heading the write‟s adress and the date of writing is written.
.‫پَ ػٌْاى کي ػ ليکًّْکي آػؿك اّ ػ ليکٌي ًيټَ ليکل کيږي‬
2) Greeting or salutation ‫سّغثـړ يا عـالم‬

A letter usually starts with words which express the writer‟s feeling.
.‫يْ ليک هؼوْالً لَ ُغَ کلوْ مـٍ ىـّع کيږي چي ػ ّيًْکي اصناك تياًْي‬
Like: Dear sir )َ‫(ګـاًَ ښاغلي‬, My dear Dad ) ‫ (فها ګـاًَ تاتا‬, Dear Madam )‫(ګـاًی آغلي‬.
3) Body or text : ‫د "ليک" هــتــــي‬

Body is the most important part of a letter which expresses the writer‟s
aim for writing and purpose of the letter.
.‫هتي ػ يْ ليک هِوتـيٌَ تـعَ ػٍ چي ػ ليکًّْکي ُؼف لَ ليکٌي اّ ػ ليک همَؼ تياًْي‬

The following points should be observed in the text:

:‫د "ليک" پَ هتي کي تايذ الًذي ټکي هشاعات ؽي‬
1. The letter must be clear. .‫ليک تايؼ ّاّش ّي‬
2. Avoid using complicated words. .‫ػ پيچلْ کلوْ څغَ هغٌيْي ّىي‬
3. There must be space among the words. .‫ػ کلوْ تـهٌځ تايؼ فاٍلَ ّي‬
4) Closing : " َ‫د "ليک" خاتـوـ‬

It is not fair to close a letter abruptly. .‫هٌامثَ ًؼٍ چي يْ ليک ػفؼتا ً عتن کړي ىي‬
A letter is usually closed by the following words.
.‫يْ ليک هؼوْالً پَ الًؼي کلوْ عاتوَ پيؼا کْي‬
Sincerely yours )ٌ‫ (متامْ هغل‬, Yours ever )"‫ (متامْ ُوييګي "هلګـی‬, Truly yours
)‫ (متامْ ٍاػق‬.... etc.
5) Signature : "‫د اهضاء "ځاي‬

In this part the writer usually write‟s his name and signature. The signat-
re is placed below the closing in the middle.
‫ اهْاء ػ ليک پَ الًؼي اعـيـي هاتـيي کـي ځـاي‬.‫پَ ػي تـعَ کي ليکـًّْکي عپل ًـْم اّ اهْاء کْي‬
.‫ًيني‬
Example of a letter: :‫د يْ ليک هثال‬
Khushhal Khan. .‫عْىضال عاى‬
Wardak hospital street. .َ‫ّؿػګ ؿّغتْى کْڅ‬
Kabul , Afghanistan. .‫ افغاًنتاى‬، ‫کاتل‬
2 September 2012. .۲۱۱۲ ‫ مپتوثـ‬۲
My dear father! !ٍ‫صها ګشاًَ پالس‬

I was so glad to receive your letter last Sunday. I am sorry I couldn’t
send a reply at once. Our final examination was on and I was very
busy. You know I am not very good in English, my teacher advises me to
read English books from our library , and has given me the names of
several which he recommends. I think, if I had an English ditionary , it
would be of great help to me in reading these books. Will you please buy
me one and send it to me? I promise you I will make very good use of
it. Please tell my mother that I am quite happy and safe here and
keeping very fit. she need not be anxious about me.
Sincerely yours
Khalil Ahmad “Dervish”

Some English proverbs

ًَْ‫ځـيٌي اًګلـيغـي هـتلـ‬
 A man is only as rich as he is contened.

.‫لٌاػت کًّْکي اًناى هالؼاؿٍ ّي‬
 A hard gathering a wide scattering.

.‫ صناب پَ هنمال‬،‫تغيو پَ عـّاؿ‬
 A friend to everybody is a friend to nobady.

.ٍ‫ػ ټْلْ ػّمت ػ ُيچا ػّمت ًؼ‬
 A friend in need is a friend is deed.

.‫ػّمت ُغَ ػي چي پَ مغتَ کي پکاؿ ؿاىي‬
 A hungry belly has no ears. .‫ّږی ګيډٍ ايواى ًلـي‬
 A nod to the wise a rod for the fool.

.‫اٍيل تَ اىاؿت کن اٍل تَ کْتک‬
 A blow with a word strikes deeper than a below with a sword.

.‫ػ تْؿي ټپ تَ رْړ ىي عْ ػژتي ټپ تَ رْړ ًيي‬
 A burnt child dreads the fire. .‫هاؿ چيچلی لَ پړي ُن ّيـيږي‬
 Be true and fear not. .ٍ‫چی غل ًَ يي لَ پاچا هَ ډاؿيږ‬
 Better to be alone than a bad accompany. .ٍ‫ػ تؼ هلګـی څغَ يْافيتْب ښَ ػ‬
 Money is the root of all evils. .ٍ‫پيني ػ فناػ هٌثغ ػ‬
 A widow‟s mite. .‫تـګ مثق تضفَ ػؿّيو‬

References
ًَْ‫اخځليکـ‬
1. Creative English Grammar.

2. Muslim English Grammar.
3. Azeraksh English Grammar.
4. English Language for foreigners.
5. Amiri English Grammar.
6. Mmand English Grammar.
7. Learn English Rapidly.
8. Invest time on Grammar.
9. English Grammar in use.
10. Oxford Grammar.
11. Chalenger English Grammar.
12. Different webs.

درویش ګرامر PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

درویش ګرامر PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dervish English Grammar

»‫ عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو‬:‫ليکًّْکي‬ 1

‫‪Dervish English Grammar‬‬

‫ليکوونکي ‪ :‬خليل احمد "دروېش"‬

‫‪All rights of publication reserved with the author‬‬

‫ليکًّْکي‪ :‬عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو»‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫دروېش تماس نمبر‪0788480493 :‬‬ ‫تشښٌاليک‪KhalilDervish _ 001@yahoo .com :‬‬

‫ليکًّْکي‪ :‬عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو»‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ليکًّْکي‪ :‬عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو»‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫ليکًّْکي‪ :‬عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو»‬ ‫‪5‬‬

‫‪Grammar: Grammar is the series of rules regulations which is used‬‬

‫‪Letter: The conventional alphabetical character or a written symbol used to‬‬

‫‪ ‬پَ اًګليغي ژتَ کي تْسي عوْها ً پَ دٍّ ډّلَ دي‪:‬‬

‫‪Ex: We are students.‬‬ ‫هخال‪ :‬هْږ ىاګـػاى يْ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :۲‬ػعاٍْ اموًْْ اّ ٍفتًْْ ػلوړی تْؿی ػليکلْ لپاؿٍ‪:‬‬

‫‪ :۳‬ػکال ػهياىتْ اّ ػ اًّۍ ػ ًْهًْْ ػ لوړی تْؿی ػ ليکلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږي‪:‬‬

‫ليکًّْکي‪ :‬عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو»‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫‪ :۶‬ػ لمثًْْ ػلْهړی تْؿي ػليکلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږی‪.‬‬

‫‪ :۱۱‬ػ غـًّْ اّ ػؿياتًْْ ػ ًْم ػليکلْ لپاؿٍ امتؼواليږی‪.‬‬

‫ًــــــْټ‪ :‬پَ اًګليني ژتَ کي ټْل ‪ ۲۶‬تْؿي ػي‪.‬‬

‫‪ Vowel letters:‬‬

‫ليکًّْکي‪ :‬عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو»‬ ‫‪7‬‬

 The role of vowel letters. .‫د غږ لشًّکْ تْسّ ًقؼ‬

Ex: PPlz ____________ Popalzai

2. Vowel letters causes syllabication in the word ( the analysis of the

Ex: Report = Re ____ port. Ex: Moral = Mo____ ral.

‫غږلـًّکي تْؿی‬ ‫غږلـًّکي تْؿی‬

Ex: an apple. Ex: an orange.

 Semi vowel letters:( w , y). .( w , y) :‫ًيوَ غږ لشًّکي تْسي‬

»‫ عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو‬:‫ليکًّْکي‬ 8

Ex:window , word , yellow : (consonant ٍ‫( تــي غــــږ‬.

 Consonant letters.)‫(تـــــــي غــــــــــږٍ تــــْسي‬

Note: Syllable is the unite of classification of a word according to its

:َ‫) تي غږٍ تْؿي ػي چي ػثاؿت ػي ل‬۱۹(‫ پَ اًګليني ژتَ کي ًَ لل‬

 Explanation of consonant letters:

.‫( ػ تْؿي هغکي ؿاىي‬t) ‫( تْؿي ػ‬b) ‫ پَ ُغَ کلوْ کي چي ػ‬.a

Ex: Debt , Doubt …

Ex: Comb , Thumb.

»‫ عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو‬:‫ليکًّْکي‬ 9

‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )c‬تْؿي لَ (‪ )h‬مـٍ يْځاي امتؼواليږي اّػ (ه ‪،‬چ ‪،‬ک) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫ک‬ ‫چ‬ ‫چ‬ ‫ک‬

‫‪ :۳‬ػ (‪ )D‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (ډ) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )D‬تْؿي ػ (‪ )G ,J‬لَ تْؿي څغَ هغکي ًَ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )D‬تْؿي ځيٌي ّعت ػ (ُ) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Ex: Girl , Gender , Get.‬‬

‫ليکًّْکي‪ :‬عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو»‬ ‫‪10‬‬

‫‪ :۶‬ػ (‪ )H‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ ژتَ کي ػ (س ‪ )ٍ،‬غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪Exs:‬‬ ‫‪a: Laugh , Rough‬‬

‫‪b: She , Shine‬‬

‫‪c: Character ,School.‬‬

‫‪d: Rhyme , Rheumatism.‬‬

‫بي غږه‬ ‫بي غږه‬

‫‪e: Biography , Phone.‬‬

‫‪f: Chalk , Choice.‬‬

‫‪ :۷‬ػ )‪(J‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (د) اّ ( ژ ) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫ليکًّْکي‪ :‬عليل اصوؼ « ػؿّېو»‬ ‫‪11‬‬

‫‪ :۸‬ػ )‪ (K‬توري په پښتو کي د (ک) غږ ورکوي‪.‬‬

‫‪ :۹‬ػ )‪(L‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (ل) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‬ػ )‪ (L‬تْؿي اکخـاً ّعت ػکليوي پَ هٌځ کي ًَ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬

‫‪ :۱۱‬ػ (‪ )M‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ ( م ) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪ :۱۱‬ػ )‪ (N‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (ى) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪ :۱۲‬ػ )‪ (P‬تْؿي پَ پښتْ کي ػ (پ) غږ ّؿکْي‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‬ػ (‪ )S‬تْؿي ډيـ ځايًْْ کي تي غږّي اًَّ تلفع کيږي‪.‬‬

Ex: Report = Re port. Ex: Moral = Mo ral.